Audio, Visual & Navigation System: Section

DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA
AUDIO, VISUAL & NAVIGATION SYSTEM

SECTION AV B
E
CONTENTS
WITHOUT NAVIGATION System Description ..................................................22 F
Component Parts Location ......................................24
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 14 Component Description ...........................................25
G
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW .........14 HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM ...................... 26
Work Flow ............................................................... 14 System Diagram ......................................................26
System Description ..................................................26
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ....................16 Component Parts Location ......................................27 H
Component Description ...........................................28
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BAT-
TERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL ................................... 16 REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM ..................... 29
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING I
System Diagram ......................................................29
BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Description .... 16 System Description ..................................................29
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING Component Parts Location ......................................31
BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Special Re- Component Description ...........................................32 J
pair Requirement ..................................................... 16
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT) ... 33
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING Diagnosis Description ..............................................33
CONTROL UNIT ........................................................ 16 K
CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV) ........................43
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT : Description ................................ 16 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TEL ADAPTER UNIT)... 46
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING Diagnosis Description ..............................................46 L
CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement .... 16
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 48
REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE
M
CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT ......................... 16 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 48
REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE Description ...............................................................48
CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description DTC Logic ................................................................48
.... 16 Diagnosis Procedure ..............................................48 AV
REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE
CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Special Re- U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ......................... 49
pair Requirement ..................................................... 16 Description ...............................................................49 O
DTC Logic ................................................................49
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 17 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................49
MULTI AV SYSTEM ...........................................17 U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT .............................. 50 P

System Diagram ...................................................... 17 Description ...............................................................50
System Description ................................................. 17 DTC Logic ................................................................50
Component Parts Location ...................................... 19
Component Description ........................................... 20 U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT .............................. 51
Description ...............................................................51
AUDIO SYSTEM .................................................22 DTC Logic ................................................................51
System Diagram ...................................................... 22
Revision: 2009 March AV-1 2009 FX35/FX50

U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................... 52 Description .............................................................. 68
Description .............................................................. 52 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 68
DTC Logic ............................................................... 52
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................. 69
U1243 FRONT DISPLAY UNIT ......................... 53 Description .............................................................. 69
DTC Logic ............................................................... 53
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 53 HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIG-
NAL CIRCUIT .................................................... 70
U1250 CAMERA CONTROL UNIT .................... 55 Description .............................................................. 70
DTC Logic ............................................................... 55
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 55 VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL
CIRCUIT ............................................................. 71
U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER .................. 56 Description .............................................................. 71
DTC Logic ............................................................... 56
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 56 AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ......................... 72
Description .............................................................. 72
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT ............................... 58 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 72
Description .............................................................. 58
DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT ........................ 74
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ..... 59 Description .............................................................. 74
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 74
AV CONTROL UNIT .................................................. 59
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 59 REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIR-
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT ............................................ 59
CUIT ................................................................... 75
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ..... 59 Description .............................................................. 75
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ...................................... 60
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Proce- CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (CAM-
dure ........................................................................ 60 ERA CONTROL UNIT TO AV CONTROL
UNIT) .................................................................. 77
BOSE AMP. ............................................................... 61 Description .............................................................. 77
BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure ....................... 61 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 77
IPOD ADAPTER ........................................................ 61 COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ........... 78
iPod ADAPTER : Diagnosis Procedure .................. 62 Description .............................................................. 78
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ..................................... 62
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Proce- MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................... 79
dure ........................................................................ 62 Description .............................................................. 79
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT ....................................... 62 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 79
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT ........................... 81
... 62
Description .............................................................. 81
TEL ADAPTER UNIT ................................................ 63 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 81
TEL ADAPTER UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ......... 63
MODE CHANGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................. 82
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ..................... 65 Description .............................................................. 82
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 65
COMMUNICATION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................ 66 (CONT-SAT) ...................................................... 83
Description .............................................................. 66 Description .............................................................. 83
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 66 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 83
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 67 REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT (SAT→CONT) ... 85
Description .............................................................. 67 Description .............................................................. 85
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 67 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 85
RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT ...... 68 STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT ........ 86

Description .............................................................. 86 PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 248
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 86 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System A
Component Inspection ............................................ 87 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ............................................................... 248
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT .........88 Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 248
Description .............................................................. 88 B
Precaution for Harness Repair .............................. 248
Component Inspection ............................................ 89 PREPARATION ......................................... 250
C
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT....90 PREPARATION ............................................... 250
Description .............................................................. 90 Commercial Service Tools ..................................... 250
D
Component Inspection ............................................ 91 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 251
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 92 AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 251
Exploded View ....................................................... 251 E
AV CONTROL UNIT ...........................................92 Removal and Installation ....................................... 251
Reference Value ..................................................... 92
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVI- FRONT DISPLAY UNIT .................................. 252
Exploded View ....................................................... 252 F
GATION - ................................................................ 99
DTC Index ............................................................. 117 Removal and Installation ....................................... 252
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT .................................... 119 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER .............................. 253 G
Reference Value ................................................... 119 Exploded View ....................................................... 253
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVI- Removal and Installation ....................................... 253
GATION - .............................................................. 121 H
REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 254
BOSE AMP. ...................................................... 140 Exploded View ....................................................... 254
Reference Value ................................................... 140 Removal and Installation ....................................... 254
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVI- I
GATION - .............................................................. 142 FRONT SQUAWKER ...................................... 255
Exploded View ....................................................... 255
iPod ADAPTER ................................................ 161 Removal and Installation ....................................... 255
J
Reference Value ................................................... 161
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVI- REAR SQUAWKER ........................................ 256
GATION - .............................................................. 163 Exploded View ....................................................... 256
Removal and Installation ....................................... 256 K
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT .............................. 181
Reference Value ................................................... 181 CENTER SPEAKER ........................................ 257
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVI- Exploded View ....................................................... 257
Removal and Installation ....................................... 257 L
GATION - .............................................................. 182
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ............................ 201 WOOFER ......................................................... 258

Reference Value ................................................... 201 Exploded View ....................................................... 258 M
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVI- Removal and Installation ....................................... 258
GATION - .............................................................. 202 BOSE AMP. ..................................................... 259
Exploded View ....................................................... 259 AV
TEL ADAPTER UNIT ....................................... 221
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVI- SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ........................... 260
GATION - .............................................................. 222 O
Exploded View ....................................................... 260
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 241 Removal and Installation ....................................... 260
MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS .................... 241 ANTENNA BASE ............................................ 261 P

Symptom Table ..................................................... 241 Exploded View ....................................................... 261
Removal and Installation ....................................... 261
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 246
Description ............................................................ 246
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ............................ 262
Exploded View ....................................................... 262
PRECAUTION ............................................ 248 Removal and Installation ....................................... 262

PRESET SWITCH ............................................ 263 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
Exploded View .......................................................263 CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement ... 278
Removal and Installation .......................................263
PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION
iPod ADAPTER ............................................... 264 ADJUSTMENT ........................................................ 278
Exploded View .......................................................264 PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSI-
Removal and Installation .......................................264 TION ADJUSTMENT : Description ....................... 278
PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSI-
iPod CONNECTOR ......................................... 265 TION ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Require-
Exploded View .......................................................265 ment ...................................................................... 278
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS ............................. 266 MONITOR) ............................................................... 278
Exploded View .......................................................266 CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND
Removal and Installation .......................................266 VIEW MONITOR) : Description ............................. 279
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND
MICROPHONE ................................................. 267 VIEW MONITOR) : Special Repair Requirement . 279
Exploded View .......................................................267
Removal and Installation .......................................267 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................... 285
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT ............................. 268 MULTI AV SYSTEM ......................................... 285
Exploded View .......................................................268 System Diagram ................................................... 285
Removal and Installation .......................................268 System Description ............................................... 285
Component Parts Location ................................... 288
REAR VIEW CAMERA .................................... 269 Component Description ........................................ 289
Exploded View .......................................................269
Removal and Installation .......................................269 AUDIO SYSTEM ............................................... 292
Adjustment .............................................................270 System Diagram ................................................... 292
System Description ............................................... 292
TEL ADAPTER UNIT ....................................... 271 Component Parts Location ................................... 294
Exploded View .......................................................271 Component Description ........................................ 295
NAVIGATION SYSTEM .................................... 297
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ......................... 272 System Diagram ................................................... 297
Exploded View .......................................................272 System Description ............................................... 297
Removal and Installation .......................................272 Component Parts Location ................................... 300
ANTENNA FEEDER ........................................ 273 Component Description ........................................ 301
Harness Layout .....................................................273 AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM .............. 302
NAVIGATION (SINGLE MONITOR) System Diagram ................................................... 302
BASIC INSPECTION .................................. 274 Component Parts Location ................................... 309
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ....... 274 Component Description ........................................ 310
Work Flow (Multi AV) .............................................274 CAMERA ASSISTANCE SONAR SYSTEM .... 312
Work Flow (Sonar) .................................................276 System Diagram ................................................... 312
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................. 278 System Description ............................................... 312
Component Parts Location ................................... 315
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BAT- Component Description ........................................ 316
TERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL .................................278
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT) .. 317
BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Description ..278 Diagnosis Description ........................................... 317
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV) ...................... 330
BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Special Re- DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MON-
pair Requirement ...................................................278
ITOR CONTROL UNIT) .................................... 334
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING Diagnosis Description ........................................... 334
CONTROL UNIT .......................................................278
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [SONAR CONTROL
CONTROL UNIT : Description ...............................278 UNIT (WITH AROUND VIEW MONITOR)] ....... 337
CONSULT-III Function (SONAR) .......................... 337

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 339 DTC Logic .............................................................. 353
A
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 339 U121F AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 354
Description ............................................................ 339 Description ............................................................. 354
DTC Logic ............................................................. 339 DTC Logic .............................................................. 354
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 354 B
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 339
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ........................ 340 U1204 GPS ...................................................... 355
Description ............................................................ 340 Description ............................................................. 355 C
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 340 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 355
U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 341 U1205 GPS ...................................................... 356 D

Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 356 E
U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 342
Description ............................................................ 342 U1206 GPS ...................................................... 357
DTC Logic ............................................................. 342 Description ............................................................. 357
DTC Logic .............................................................. 357 F
U1201 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 343 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 357
Description ............................................................ 343
DTC Logic ............................................................. 343 U1207 GPS ...................................................... 358 G
Description ............................................................. 358
U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 344 DTC Logic .............................................................. 358
Description ............................................................ 344 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 358
H
DTC Logic ............................................................. 344
U1243 FRONT DISPLAY UNIT ....................... 359
U1217 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 345 Description ............................................................. 359
Description ............................................................ 345 DTC Logic .............................................................. 359 I
DTC Logic ............................................................. 345 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 359
U1218 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 346 U1244 GPS ANTENNA ................................... 361
Description ............................................................ 346 J
Description ............................................................. 361
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 361
U1219 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 347 K
Description ............................................................ 347 U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA .......... 362
DTC Logic .............................................................. 362
U1220 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 348 L
Description ............................................................ 348
DTC Logic ............................................................. 348 U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT ............................ 363
Description ............................................................. 363 M
U121A AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 349
Description ............................................................ 349 B2700 CORNER SENSOR [FL] ...................... 364
AV
DTC Logic .............................................................. 364
U121B AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 350
Description ............................................................ 350 B2701 SENSOR HARNESS OPEN [CR-FL] .. 365
DTC Logic ............................................................. 350 Description ............................................................. 365 O
DTC Logic .............................................................. 365
U121C AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 351 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 365
Description ............................................................ 351
DTC Logic ............................................................. 351 B2702 CORNER SENSOR [FR] ..................... 366 P
Description ............................................................. 366
U121D AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 352 DTC Logic .............................................................. 366
Description ............................................................ 352
DTC Logic ............................................................. 352 B2703 SENSOR HARNESS OPEN [CR-FR] .. 367
Description ............................................................. 367
U121E AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 353 DTC Logic .............................................................. 367

B2704 CORNER SENSOR [RL] ...................... 368 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 381
Description .............................................................368
DTC Logic ..............................................................368 HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIG-
NAL CIRCUIT ................................................... 382
B2705 SENSOR HARNESS OPEN [CR-RL] . 369 Description ............................................................ 382
Description .............................................................369 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 382
DTC Logic ..............................................................369
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................369 VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL
CIRCUIT ............................................................ 383
B2706 CORNER SENSOR [RR] ..................... 370 Description ............................................................ 383
DTC Logic ..............................................................370
AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ........................ 384
B2707 SENSOR HARNESS OPEN [CR-RR] . 371 Description ............................................................ 384
DTC Logic ..............................................................371
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................371 MODE CHANGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................. 385
Description ............................................................ 385
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ... 372 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 385
AV CONTROL UNIT .................................................372 DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT ....................... 386
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ..........372 Description ............................................................ 386
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT ...........................................372
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ....372 MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 387
Description ............................................................ 387
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH .....................................373
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Proce-
dure .......................................................................373 CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............... 389
BOSE AMP. ..............................................................374 Description ............................................................ 389
BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure ......................374 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 389
IPOD ADAPTER .......................................................374 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL CIR-

iPod ADAPTER : Diagnosis Procedure .................374 CUIT .................................................................. 391
Description ............................................................ 391
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT ..........375 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 391
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Di-
agnosis Procedure .................................................375 STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT ....... 393
Description ............................................................ 393
SONAR CONTROL UNIT (WITH AROUND VIEW Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 393
MONITOR) ................................................................375 Component Inspection .......................................... 394
SONAR CONTROL UNIT (WITH AROUND VIEW
MONITOR) : Diagnosis Procedure ........................375 STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT ....... 395
Description ............................................................ 395
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 377 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 395
Description .............................................................377 Component Inspection .......................................... 396
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................377
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT.. 397
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT .............. 378 Description ............................................................ 397
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................378 Component Inspection .......................................... 397
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................. 379 FRONT CAMERA COMMUNICATION SIG-
Description .............................................................379 NAL CIRCUIT ................................................... 399
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................379 Description ............................................................ 399
RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT .... 380 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 399
Description .............................................................380 FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .. 400
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................ 381 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 400
Description .............................................................381

REAR CAMERA COMMUNICATION SIGNAL SONAR CONTROL UNIT (WITH AROUND
CIRCUIT ........................................................... 402 VIEW MONITOR) ............................................ 540 A
Description ............................................................ 402 Reference Value .................................................... 540
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 402 Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA-
TION (SINGLE MONITOR) - ................................. 542 B
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .... 403 Fail-Safe ................................................................ 563
Description ............................................................ 403 DTC Index ............................................................. 564
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 565 C
SIDE CAMERA LH COMMUNICATION SIG-
NAL CIRCUIT ................................................... 405 MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS .................. 565
Description ............................................................ 405 Symptom Table ..................................................... 565 D
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............. 571
SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT.. 406 Description ............................................................. 571
Description ............................................................ 406 E
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 406 PRECAUTION ............................................ 576
SIDE CAMERA RH COMMUNICATION SIG- PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 576
F
NAL CIRCUIT ................................................... 408 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
Description ............................................................ 408 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 408 SIONER" ............................................................... 576
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 576 G
SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT.. 409 Precaution for Harness Repair .............................. 576
Description ............................................................ 409
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 409 PREPARATION ......................................... 578 H
BUZZER CIRCUIT ............................................ 411 PREPARATION ............................................... 578
Description ............................................................ 411 Commercial Service Tools ..................................... 578
Component Function Check .................................. 411 I
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 411 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 579
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 413 AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 579

J
Exploded View ....................................................... 579
AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 413 Removal and Installation ....................................... 579
Reference Value ................................................... 413
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA-
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT .................................. 580 K
TION (SINGLE MONITOR) - ................................. 419 Exploded View ....................................................... 580
Fail-Safe ................................................................ 440 Removal and Installation ....................................... 580
DTC Index ............................................................. 442 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER .............................. 581 L
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT .................................... 443 Exploded View ....................................................... 581

Removal and Installation ....................................... 581
Reference Value ................................................... 443
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA- M
REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 582
TION (SINGLE MONITOR) - ................................. 445 Exploded View ....................................................... 582
BOSE AMP. ...................................................... 467 Removal and Installation ....................................... 582
AV
Reference Value ................................................... 467 FRONT SQUAWKER ...................................... 583
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA- Exploded View ....................................................... 583
TION (SINGLE MONITOR) - ................................. 469 Removal and Installation ....................................... 583 O
iPod ADAPTER ................................................ 491 REAR SQUAWKER ........................................ 584
Reference Value ................................................... 491 Exploded View ....................................................... 584
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA- Removal and Installation ....................................... 584 P
TION (SINGLE MONITOR) - ................................. 493
CENTER SPEAKER ........................................ 585
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT .. 514 Exploded View ....................................................... 585
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA-
TION (SINGLE MONITOR) - ................................. 518 WOOFER ......................................................... 586
Exploded View ....................................................... 586

Removal and Installation .......................................586 Removal and Installation ....................................... 603
BOSE AMP. ..................................................... 587 SONAR SENSOR ............................................. 604

Exploded View .......................................................587
Removal and Installation .......................................587 FRONT ..................................................................... 604
FRONT : Exploded View ....................................... 604
ANTENNA BASE ............................................. 588 FRONT : Removal and Installation ....................... 604
Exploded View .......................................................588
REAR ....................................................................... 604
REAR : Exploded View ......................................... 605
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ............................. 589 REAR : Removal and Installation .......................... 605
Exploded View .......................................................589
BUZZER ............................................................ 606
Exploded View ...................................................... 606
PRESET SWITCH ............................................ 590 Removal and Installation ....................................... 606
Exploded View .......................................................590
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR .......................... 607
Exploded View ...................................................... 607
iPod ADAPTER ............................................... 591 Removal and Installation ....................................... 607
Exploded View .......................................................591
ANTENNA FEEDER ......................................... 608
Harness Layout ..................................................... 608
iPod CONNECTOR ......................................... 592 NAVIGATION (TWIN MONITOR)
Exploded View .......................................................592
Removal and Installation .......................................592 BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 609
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS ............................. 593 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........ 609
Exploded View .......................................................593 Work Flow (Multi AV) ............................................ 609
Removal and Installation .......................................593 Work Flow (Sonar) ................................................ 611
MICROPHONE ................................................. 594 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .................. 613

Exploded View .......................................................594
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BAT-
TERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL ................................ 613
GPS ANTENNA ............................................... 595 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING
Exploded View .......................................................595 BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Description . 613
Harness Layout .....................................................595 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING
Removal and Installation .......................................596 BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Special Re-
pair Requirement .................................................. 613
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT . 597
Exploded View .......................................................597 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
Removal and Installation .......................................597 CONTROL UNIT ...................................................... 613
FRONT CAMERA ............................................ 598 CONTROL UNIT : Description .............................. 613
Exploded View .......................................................598 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
Removal and Installation .......................................598 CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement ... 613
REAR CAMERA .............................................. 599 PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION

Exploded View .......................................................599 ADJUSTMENT ........................................................ 613
Removal and Installation .......................................599 PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSI-
TION ADJUSTMENT : Description ....................... 613
SIDE CAMERA LH .......................................... 600 PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSI-
Exploded View .......................................................600 TION ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Require-
Removal and Installation .......................................600 ment ...................................................................... 613
SIDE CAMERA RH .......................................... 601 CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW
Exploded View .......................................................601 MONITOR) ............................................................... 613
Removal and Installation .......................................601 CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND
VIEW MONITOR) : Description ............................. 614
SONAR CONTROL UNIT (WITH AROUND CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND
VIEW MONITOR) ............................................. 603 VIEW MONITOR) : Special Repair Requirement . 614
Exploded View .......................................................603

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 620 U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 682
Description ............................................................. 682 A
MULTI AV SYSTEM ......................................... 620 DTC Logic .............................................................. 682
System Diagram .................................................... 620
System Description ............................................... 620 U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 683
B
Component Parts Location .................................... 623 Description ............................................................. 683
Component Description ......................................... 624 DTC Logic .............................................................. 683
AUDIO SYSTEM ............................................... 627 U1201 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 684 C

System Diagram .................................................... 627 Description ............................................................. 684
System Description ............................................... 627 DTC Logic .............................................................. 684
Component Parts Location .................................... 629 D
Component Description ......................................... 630 U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 685
Description ............................................................. 685
NAVIGATION SYSTEM .................................... 632 DTC Logic .............................................................. 685
System Diagram .................................................... 632 E
System Description ............................................... 632 U1217 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 686
Component Parts Location .................................... 635 Description ............................................................. 686
Component Description ......................................... 636 DTC Logic .............................................................. 686
F
MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM ............ 637 U1218 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 687
System Diagram .................................................... 637 Description ............................................................. 687
System Description ............................................... 637 DTC Logic .............................................................. 687 G
Component Parts Location .................................... 638 U1219 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 688
Component Description ......................................... 639
Description ............................................................. 688
DTC Logic .............................................................. 688 H
AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM .............. 641
System Diagram .................................................... 641 U1220 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 689
Description ............................................................. 689 I
Component Parts Location .................................... 648
DTC Logic .............................................................. 689
Component Description ......................................... 649
U121A AV CONTROL UNIT ........................... 690
CAMERA ASSISTANCE SONAR SYSTEM .... 651 Description ............................................................. 690 J
System Diagram .................................................... 651
DTC Logic .............................................................. 690
Component Parts Location .................................... 654 U121B AV CONTROL UNIT ........................... 691 K
Component Description ......................................... 655 Description ............................................................. 691
DTC Logic .............................................................. 691
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT).. 656
Diagnosis Description ........................................... 656 U121C AV CONTROL UNIT ........................... 692 L
CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV) ...................... 671 Description ............................................................. 692
DTC Logic .............................................................. 692
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MON-
M
ITOR CONTROL UNIT) .................................... 675 U121D AV CONTROL UNIT ........................... 693
Diagnosis Description ........................................... 675 Description ............................................................. 693
DTC Logic .............................................................. 693
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [SONAR CONTROL AV
UNIT (WITH AROUND VIEW MONITOR)] ....... 678 U121E AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 694
CONSULT-III Function (SONAR) .......................... 678 Description ............................................................. 694
DTC Logic .............................................................. 694 O
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 680
U121F AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 695
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 680 Description ............................................................. 695
Description ............................................................ 680 DTC Logic .............................................................. 695 P
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 680
U1204 GPS ...................................................... 696
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ........................ 681 Description ............................................................. 696
Description ............................................................ 681 DTC Logic .............................................................. 696

U1205 GPS ...................................................... 697 DTC Logic ............................................................. 713
DTC Logic ..............................................................697
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................697 B2706 CORNER SENSOR [RR] ...................... 714
Description ............................................................ 714
U1206 GPS ...................................................... 698 DTC Logic ............................................................. 714
Description .............................................................698
DTC Logic ..............................................................698 B2707 SENSOR HARNESS OPEN [CR-RR] .. 715
DTC Logic ............................................................. 715
U1207 GPS ...................................................... 699 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 715
Description .............................................................699
DTC Logic ..............................................................699 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 716
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................699 AV CONTROL UNIT ................................................ 716
U1243 FRONT DISPLAY UNIT ....................... 700 AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ......... 716
Description .............................................................700 FRONT DISPLAY UNIT ........................................... 716
DTC Logic ..............................................................700 FRONT DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure .... 716
REAR DISPLAY UNIT ............................................. 717
U1244 GPS ANTENNA .................................... 702 REAR DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ...... 717
Description .............................................................702
DTC Logic ..............................................................702 VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR ............................................ 718
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................702 VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR : Diagnosis Procedure ..... 718
U1247 REAR DISPLAY UNIT .......................... 703 MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH .................................... 718
Description .............................................................703 MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Proce-
DTC Logic ..............................................................703 dure ....................................................................... 718
BOSE AMP. ............................................................. 719
U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA ........... 705 BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure ...................... 719
Description .............................................................705 DVD PLAYER .......................................................... 720
DTC Logic ..............................................................705 DVD PLAYER : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 720
IPOD ADAPTER ...................................................... 720
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT ............................. 706 iPod ADAPTER : Diagnosis Procedure ................ 720
Description .............................................................706
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT ......... 721
B2700 CORNER SENSOR [FL] ...................... 708 AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Di-
Description .............................................................708 agnosis Procedure ................................................ 721
DTC Logic ..............................................................708
B2701 SENSOR HARNESS OPEN [CR-FL] ... 709 MONITOR) ............................................................... 721
Description .............................................................709 SONAR CONTROL UNIT (WITH AROUND VIEW
DTC Logic ..............................................................709 MONITOR) : Diagnosis Procedure ....................... 721
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CON-
B2702 CORNER SENSOR [FR] ...................... 710 TROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY UNIT) ........ 723
Description .............................................................710 Description ............................................................ 723
DTC Logic ..............................................................710 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 723
B2703 SENSOR HARNESS OPEN [CR-FR] . 711 RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV
Description .............................................................711 CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY UNIT).. 724
DTC Logic ..............................................................711 Description ............................................................ 724
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................711 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 724
B2704 CORNER SENSOR [RL] ...................... 712 RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CON-
Description .............................................................712 TROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY UNIT) ........ 725
DTC Logic ..............................................................712 Description ............................................................ 725
B2705 SENSOR HARNESS OPEN [CR-RL] . 713 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 725
Description .............................................................713

RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VID-
(AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY EO DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DISPLAY UNIT) A
UNIT) ................................................................ 726 . 737
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 726 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 737 B
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CON- AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ...................... 738
TROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY UNIT) ........ 727 Description ............................................................. 738
Description ............................................................ 727 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 738 C
DVD IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ...................... 739
HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL Description ............................................................. 739 D
CIRCUIT (FRONT DISPLAY UNIT TO AV Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 739
CONTROL UNIT) .............................................. 728
MODE CHANGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............... 740
Description ............................................................ 728 E
Description ............................................................. 740
VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIR-
DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT ..................... 741 F
CUIT (FRONT DISPLAY UNIT TO AV CON- Description ............................................................. 741
TROL UNIT) ...................................................... 729 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 741
Description ............................................................ 729
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 729 MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................. 742 G
Description ............................................................. 742
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VID- Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 742
EO DISTRIBUTOR TO FRONT DISPLAY
H
UNIT) ................................................................ 730 CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .............. 744
I
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DIS- STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL CIR-
TRIBUTOR TO REAR DISPLAY UNIT) ........... 731 CUIT ................................................................ 746
Description ............................................................ 731 Description ............................................................. 746 J
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT ..... 748
DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DISPLAY UNIT) ..... 732 Description ............................................................. 748 K
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 732 Component Inspection ........................................... 749
L
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT ..... 750
DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DISPLAY UNIT) ..... 733 Description ............................................................. 750
Component Inspection ........................................... 751 M
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT . 752
DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DISPLAY UNIT) ..... 734 Description ............................................................. 752 AV
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 734 Component Inspection ........................................... 752
FRONT CAMERA COMMUNICATION SIG- O

VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIR-
CUIT (REAR DISPLAY UNIT TO VIDEO DIS- NAL CIRCUIT .................................................. 754
TRIBUTOR) ...................................................... 735 Description ............................................................. 754
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 754 P
Description ............................................................ 735
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 735 FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT . 755
HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL Description ............................................................. 755
CIRCUIT (REAR DISPLAY UNIT TO VIDEO
DISTRIBUTOR) ................................................ 736 REAR CAMERA COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
Description ............................................................ 736 CIRCUIT .......................................................... 757

Description .............................................................757 Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA-
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................757 TION (TWIN MONITOR) - ..................................... 917
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ... 758 DVD PLAYER ................................................... 942
Description .............................................................758 Reference Value ................................................... 942
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................758 Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA-
TION (TWIN MONITOR) - ..................................... 944
SIDE CAMERA LH COMMUNICATION SIG-
NAL CIRCUIT .................................................. 760 AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT .. 969
Description .............................................................760 Reference Value ................................................... 969
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................760 Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA-
TION (TWIN MONITOR) - ..................................... 973
SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT. 761
Description .............................................................761 SONAR CONTROL UNIT (WITH AROUND
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................761 VIEW MONITOR) .............................................. 999
Reference Value ................................................... 999
SIDE CAMERA RH COMMUNICATION SIG- Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA-
NAL CIRCUIT .................................................. 763 TION (TWIN MONITOR) - ....................................1001
Description .............................................................763 Fail-Safe ...............................................................1026
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................763 DTC Index ............................................................1027
SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT. 764 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ..........................1028
Description .............................................................764
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................764 MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS ..................1028
Symptom Table ....................................................1028
BUZZER SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............................. 766
Description .............................................................766 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION .............1037
Component Function Check ..................................766 Description ...........................................................1037
PRECAUTION ..........................................1042
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............. 768
PRECAUTIONS ..............................................1042
AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 768 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
Reference Value ....................................................768 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA- SIONER" ..............................................................1042
TION (TWIN MONITOR) - .....................................774 Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .........................1042
Fail-Safe ................................................................799 Precaution for Harness Repair .............................1042
DTC Index .............................................................801
PREPARATION ........................................1044
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT ................................... 802
Reference Value ....................................................802 PREPARATION ..............................................1044
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA- Commercial Service Tools ...................................1044
TION (TWIN MONITOR) - .....................................804
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............1045
REAR DISPLAY UNIT ..................................... 830
Reference Value ....................................................830 AV CONTROL UNIT .......................................1045
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA- Exploded View .....................................................1045
TION (TWIN MONITOR) - .....................................832 Removal and Installation ......................................1045
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR ..................................... 858 FRONT DISPLAY UNIT ..................................1046

Reference Value ....................................................858 Exploded View .....................................................1046
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA- Removal and Installation ......................................1046
TION (TWIN MONITOR) - .....................................861 REAR DISPLAY UNIT ....................................1047
BOSE AMP. ..................................................... 887 Exploded View .....................................................1047
Reference Value ....................................................887 Removal and Installation ......................................1047
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA- VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR ...................................1048
TION (TWIN MONITOR) - .....................................889
Exploded View .....................................................1048
iPod ADAPTER ............................................... 915 Removal and Installation ......................................1048
Reference Value ....................................................915 DVD PLAYER .................................................1049

Exploded View ....................................................1049 MICROPHONE ...............................................1063
Removal and Installation .....................................1049 Exploded View .....................................................1063 A
Removal and Installation .....................................1063
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER .............................1050
Exploded View ....................................................1050 GPS ANTENNA ..............................................1064
Removal and Installation .....................................1050 B
Exploded View .....................................................1064
Harness Layout ...................................................1064
REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................1051 Removal and Installation .....................................1065
Exploded View ....................................................1051 C
Removal and Installation .....................................1051 AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT 1066
Exploded View .....................................................1066
FRONT SQUAWKER .....................................1052 Removal and Installation .....................................1066
Exploded View ....................................................1052 D
Removal and Installation .....................................1052 FRONT CAMERA ...........................................1067
Exploded View .....................................................1067
REAR SQUAWKER .......................................1053 Removal and Installation .....................................1067 E
Exploded View ....................................................1053
Removal and Installation .....................................1053 REAR CAMERA .............................................1068
Exploded View .....................................................1068
CENTER SPEAKER .......................................1054 F
Exploded View ....................................................1054
Removal and Installation .....................................1054 SIDE CAMERA LH .........................................1069
Exploded View .....................................................1069 G
WOOFER ........................................................1055 Removal and Installation .....................................1069
Exploded View ....................................................1055
Removal and Installation .....................................1055 SIDE CAMERA RH ........................................1070
Exploded View .....................................................1070 H
BOSE AMP. ....................................................1056 Removal and Installation .....................................1070
Exploded View ....................................................1056
Removal and Installation .....................................1056 SONAR CONTROL UNIT (WITH AROUND I
VIEW MONITOR) ...........................................1072
ANTENNA BASE ...........................................1057 Exploded View .....................................................1072
Exploded View ....................................................1057 Removal and Installation .....................................1072
Removal and Installation .....................................1057 J
SONAR SENSOR ...........................................1073
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ...........................1058
Exploded View ....................................................1058 FRONT ...................................................................1073 K
Removal and Installation .....................................1058 FRONT : Exploded View .....................................1073
FRONT : Removal and Installation ......................1073
PRESET SWITCH ..........................................1059
Exploded View ....................................................1059 REAR .....................................................................1073 L
Removal and Installation .....................................1059 REAR : Exploded View ........................................1074
REAR : Removal and Installation ........................1074
iPod ADAPTER ..............................................1060
M
Exploded View ....................................................1060 BUZZER .........................................................1075
Removal and Installation .....................................1060 Exploded View .....................................................1075
iPod CONNECTOR ........................................1061 AV
Exploded View ....................................................1061 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ........................1076
Removal and Installation .....................................1061 Exploded View .....................................................1076
Removal and Installation .....................................1076 O
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS ............................1062
Exploded View ....................................................1062 ANTENNA FEEDER .......................................1077
Removal and Installation .....................................1062 Harness Layout ...................................................1077
P

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
BASIC INSPECTION
Work Flow INFOID:0000000003838526
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JSNIA0732GB
• Reference 1··· Refer to AV-43, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".

• Reference 2··· Refer to AV-117, "DTC Index".
• Reference 3··· Refer to AV-241, "Symptom Table".
DETAILED FLOW
1.INTERVIEW AND SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items.
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc-
tion occurred).
• Check the symptom.
Is the occurred symptom malfunction?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> INSPECTION END
2.DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT-III
1. Connect CONSULT-III and perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV”. Refer to AV-43, "CONSULT-III Func-
tion (MULTI AV)". A
NOTE:
Skip to step 4 of the diagnosis procedure if “MULTI AV” is not displayed.
2. Check if any DTC is displayed in the self-diagnosis results.
B
Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
C
3.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC
1. Check the DTC indicated in the self-diagnosis results.
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC Index. Refer to AV-117, "DTC Index". D
>> GO TO 5.
E
4.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-241, "Symptom
Table". F
>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR G
1. Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts.
2. Perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV” with CONSULT-III.
NOTE: H
Erase the stored self-diagnosis results after repairing or replacing the relevant components if any DTC
has been indicated in the self-diagnosis results.
3. Check that the symptom does not occur. I
Does the symptom occur?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO >> INSPECTION END J
AV

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : De-
scription INFOID:0000000003838527
Always correct the center position of the predicted course line after disconnecting the battery negative termi-
nal.
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Spe-
cial Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000003838528
1.CORRECTION OF CENTER POSITION OF PREDICTED COURSE LINE

Refer to the following for details.
>> Refer to AV-16, "REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE CENTER POSITION
ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Requirement".
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description
INFOID:0000000003838529
When camera control unit is replaced, the center position of predicted course line shall be corrected.
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Re-
quirement INFOID:0000000003838530

>> Refer to AV-16, "REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE CENTER POSITION
ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Requirement".
REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUST-
MENT
MENT : Description INFOID:0000000003838531
Adjust the center position of the predicted course line of the rear view monitor if it is shifted.
MENT : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000003838532
1.DRIVING
Drive the vehicle straight ahead 100 m (328.1 ft) or more at a speed of 30 km/h (18.6 MPH) or more.
>> END

MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
MULTI AV SYSTEM
System Diagram INFOID:0000000003838533
B
G
JSNIA1389GB
NOTE:
• The name MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH indicates the integration of PRESET SWITCH and MULTIFUNCTION
SWITCH virtually. H
• A radio antenna base integrated with radio antenna and satellite
radio antenna is adopted.
I
K
JSNIA1603GB
System Description INFOID:0000000003838534

L
Multi AV system means that the following systems are integrated.
System name System explanation M

AUDIO SYSTEM AV-22, "System Description"
• Status of audio, climate control system, fuel economy, mainte-
nance and navigation are displayed.
AV
• AV control unit displays the fuel consumption status while re-
VEHICLE INFORMATION SYSTEM ceiving data signal through CAN communication from ECM, uni-
fied meter and A/C amp.
O
• AV control unit is connected to BCM via CAN communication
transmitting/receiving for the vehicle settings function.
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM AV-26, "System Description"
P
AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM Refer to the following “AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM”.
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM AV-29, "System Description"
• AV control unit functions by transmitting/receiving data one by one with each unit (slave unit) that configures
them completely as a master unit by connecting between units that configure the MULTI AV system with two
AV communication lines (H, L).
• Two AV communication lines (H, L) adopt a twisted pair line that is resistant to noise.

MULTI AV SYSTEM
• AV control unit is connected by CAN communication, and it receives data signals from the ECM, unified
meter and A/C amp. It computes and displays fuel economy information values with the obtained informa-
tion. The transmitting/receiving of data signals is performed by BCM. In addition, it transmits the required
signal of vehicle setting and receives the response signal.
• AV control unit is connected with display and serial communication, and it transmits the required signal of
display and display control and receives the response signal from front display. Also, it is connected with sat-
ellite radio by serial communication, and it transmits the operating signal and receives the display signal.
NOTE:
AV control unit can perform CONSULT-III self-operating function and on board self-diagnosis.
• CONSULT-III self-diagnosis: refer to AV-43, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
• On board self-diagnosis: refer to AV-33, "Diagnosis Description".
On board self-diagnosis of TEL adapter unit can be performed.
• Refer to AV-46, "Diagnosis Description" for on board self-diagnosis.
AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM
• Image and sound can be output from an external device by connecting a device with auxiliary input jacks.
• Operation can be performed with multifunction switch and steering switch. Multifunction switch transmits
operation signal to AV control unit with communication.
JSNIA1589GB

MULTI AV SYSTEM
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000003838535
JSNIA1491ZZ
M
1. Front squawker RH 2. Center speaker 3. Front squawker LH

4. Front door speaker LH 5. Camera control unit 6. Rear door speaker LH AV
7. Rear squawker LH 8. BOSE amp. 9. Woofer
10. Rear view camera 11. Satellite radio tuner 12. TEL adapter unit
13. TEL antenna 14. Rear squawker RH 15. Antenna base (antenna amp. and O
satellite antenna)
16. Rear door speaker RH 17. Front door speaker RH 18. Front display unit
19. Steering angle sensor 20. Steering switch 21. Preset switch P
22. Auxiliary input jacks 23. iPod connector 24. AV control unit
25. Multifunction switch 26. iPod adapter 27. Microphone
A. Under front seat (LH side) B. Luggage floor (LH side) C. Luggage floor (RH side)
D. Luggage side RH E. Spiral cable part F. Rear view of the front display unit

MULTI AV SYSTEM
Component Description INFOID:0000000003838536
Part name Description

• It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and is connected to each control
unit by communication. It operates each system according to communication
signals from AV control unit.
• AV control unit includes the audio and vehicle information functions.
• It is connected to ECM, unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication
to obtain necessary information for the vehicle information function.
• It is connected to BCM via CAN communication transmitting/receiving for the
AV CONTROL UNIT
vehicle settings function.
• It inputs the illumination signals that are required for the display dimming con-
trol.
• It inputs the signals for driving status recognition (vehicle speed, reverse and
parking brake).
• Auxiliary image signal is input from the auxiliary input jacks.
• Camera image signal is input from camera control unit.
• Front display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control
unit.
• RGB image signal is input from AV control unit (RGB, RGB area and RGB syn-
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
chronizing). Camera image signal is input from AV control unit.
• Composite image signal (auxiliary images) is input from the AV control unit.
• Synchronize signal (HP, VP) is output to AV control unit.
• Inputs power (amp. ON) and sound signal from AV control unit, and outputs
sound signal to woofer and each speaker.
BOSE AMP.
• Input “Driver's Audio Stage” mode change signal from AV control unit.
• Woofer amp. ON signal is transmitted to woofer.
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp.
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
• Outputs sound (mid and low range).
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT SQUAWKER
• Outputs sound (high and mid range).
REAR SQUAWKER
CENTER SPEAKER
• Inputs power (woofer amp. ON) and sound signal from BOSE amp.
WOOFER
• Outputs low-frequency sound.
• Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio and aux-
iliary input operations are integrated.
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
• Connected with preset switch via cable, and operation signal is transmitted to
AV control unit via AV communication.
• Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio and air
conditioner operations are integrated.
PRESET SWITCH • Connected with multifunction switch via cable, and operation signal is transmit-
ted to AV control unit via AV communication.
• The disk ejection operating signal is performed by hardwire.
• Camera image signal is input from rear view camera. Camera image signal is
output to AV control unit.
• Power (camera ON signal) is transmitted to rear view camera.
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
• Superimposes the guiding line and predicted course line to the camera image
that outputs to AV control unit.
• Camera control unit is connected via AV communication.
• The image from rear camera is transmitted to camera control unit.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
• It receives power (camera ON signal) from camera control unit and operates.
• Operations such as audio and hands-free phone are possible.
STEERING SWITCH
• Steering switch signal (operation signal) is output to AV control unit.

MULTI AV SYSTEM
A
It is connected to the AV control unit and transmits the steering angle signal via
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
CAN communication.
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS Auxiliary input jacks Image and sound signal are transmitted to AV control unit.
B
A radio antenna base integrated with radio antenna amp. and satellite radio an-
tenna is adopted.
ANTENNA AMP.
• Radio signal received by rod antenna is amplified and transmitted to AV control C
ANTENNA BASE
unit.
• Power (antenna amp. ON signal) is supplied from AV control unit.
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
• Receives satellite radio waves and outputs it to satellite radio tuner. D
• Inputs iPod sound signal from iPod®, and outputs iPod sound signal to AV con-
trol unit.
iPod ADAPTER • Receiving/transmitting of iPod® operation signals are performed as follows: E
- between AV control unit and iPod adapter: AV communication.
- between iPod® and iPod adapter: serial communication.
• Inputs the TEL voice signal from TEL antenna and outputs it to AV control unit. F
TEL ADAPTER UNIT • It is connected with AV control unit via AV communication and controlled with
AV control unit.
TEL ANTENNA Receives the TEL voice signal and outputs it to TEL adapter unit. G
• Used only when hands-free phone is operated.
MICROPHONE • Outputs Mic. signal (TEL voice signal) to TEL adapter unit.
• The power (Mic. power supply) is supplied from TEL adapter unit.
H
• Inputs the satellite radio signal from satellite radio antenna and outputs the
sound signal to AV control unit.
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
• It is controlled with AV control unit and serial communication (communication
signal and request signal). I
AV

AUDIO SYSTEM
AUDIO SYSTEM
JSNIA1390GB
NOTE:
A radio antenna base integrated with radio antenna and satellite
JSNIA1603GB
The audio system is equipped with the following functions. Each function can be operated by multifunction
switch, preset switch or steering switch. It indicates the operation status of AUDIO to display.
Function
AM/FM radio
Satellite radio
CD
iPod connection
Driver's Audio Stage
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Operating Signal
Operation of the audio system can be performed with multifunction switch, preset switch or steering switch.
• Operating signal is transmitted to AV control unit with AV communication when it is operated by multifunction
switch or preset switch. The disk ejection operating signal is performed by hardwire.
• Operating signal is transmitted to AV control unit with steering switch signal when it is operated by steering
switch.
Screen Display
• The display is switched by communication signal between front display unit and AV control unit.
• The image signal that displays operating status is performed by the RGB image signal, RGB area signal and
RGB synchronizing signal.
AM/FM Radio Mode
• AM/FM radio tuner is built into AV control unit.

AUDIO SYSTEM
• Audio signal is received by rod antenna, next it is amplified by antenna amp., and finally it is input into AV
control unit. The FM sub antenna is installed on the back door window glass and AV control unit receives A
audio signal.
• Audio signal is input to BOSE amp., BOSE amp. outputs to woofer and each speaker from AV control unit.
Satellite Radio System B
• Satellite radio tuner is controlled by serial communication and request signal from AV control unit.
• Satellite radio wave is received by satellite radio antenna and is input into satellite radio tuner. Satellite radio
tuner outputs satellite radio sound signal to AV control unit. AV control unit outputs satellite radio sound sig- C
nal to BOSE amp., BOSE amp. outputs the sound signal to each speaker and woofer.
CD Mode
• CD function is built into AV control unit. D
• AV control unit outputs audio signals to BOSE amp., BOSE amp. outputs to woofer and each speaker when
CD is inserted to AV control unit.
iPod Connection E
• Connect iPod® and iPod adapter with the wire harness. iPod adapter inputs iPod sound signal from iPod®.
When iPod mode is selected, iPod adapter outputs iPod sound signal to AV control unit. AV control unit out-
puts sound signal to BOSE amp. and BOSE amp. outputs sound signal to woofer and each speaker.
F
• Receiving/transmitting of iPod® operation signals are performed as follows:
- between iPod® and iPod adapter: serial communication. G
• iPod® connection status can be recognized whether iPod adapter receives iPod connection recognition sig-
nal.
• iPod adapter can charge iPod®. H
Driver's Audio Stage Mode
• Driver's Audio Stage controls the speaker output characteristic by BOSE amp. so that driver seat is the cen-
ter of sound. I
• ON/OFF signals of Driver's Audio Stage are transmitted from AV control unit to BOSE amp. using Mode sig-
nal.
J
AV

AUDIO SYSTEM
JSNIA1491ZZ

4. Front door speaker LH 5. Camera control unit 6. Rear door speaker LH
13. TEL antenna 14. Rear squawker RH 15. Antenna base (antenna amp. and
satellite antenna)
19. Steering angle sensor 20. Steering switch 21. Preset switch

AUDIO SYSTEM

• The AM/FM receiving function and the CD playing function are equipped. B
AV CONTROL UNIT
• BOSE amp. ON signal and sound signal are transmitted to BOSE amp.
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT unit. C
• RGB image signal (audio operation condition) is input from AV control unit.
BOSE AMP.
D
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER E
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. F
FRONT SQUAWKER
REAR SQUAWKER
• Outputs sound (high and mid range). G
CENTER SPEAKER
• Inputs power (amp. ON) and sound signal from BOSE amp. H
WOOFER
• Each audio operation can be operated.
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH • Connected with preset switch via cable, and operation signal is transmitted to I
• It is connected to multifunction switch by AV communication. The operation
PRESET SWITCH J
signal is transmitted to AV control unit.
• The CD ejection operating signal is performed by hardwire.
STEERING SWITCH K
tenna is adopted.
ANTENNA AMP. L
• Radio signal received by glass antenna is amplified and transmitted to AV con-
ANTENNA BASE
trol unit.
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA M
• Receives the satellite radio waves and outputs it to satellite radio tuner.
trol unit. AV
iPod ADAPTER • Receiving/transmitting of iPod® operation signals are performed as follows:
- between iPod® and iPod adapter: serial communication. O
• Inputs the satellite radio signal from satellite radio antenna and outputs the
sound signal to AV control unit.
• It is controlled with AV control unit and serial communication (communication
signal and request signal). P

HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
JSNIA1503GB
• TEL adapter unit is controlled with AV communication from AV control unit.

• The connection between portable telephone and TEL adapter unit is performed via Bluetooth™ communica-
tion.
• The voice guidance signal is input from TEL adapter unit to AV control unit and output via BOSE amp. to
front speaker when operating cellular phone.
• TEL adapter unit has the on board self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-46, "Diagnosis Description".
When receiving a call
TEL voice signal received with the portable telephone is input from TEL antenna via TEL adapter unit to AV
control unit via Bluetooth™ communication and output via BOSE amp. to front speaker. The operation is per-
formed via steering switch or voice recognition function (TEL operation only).
When a call is transmitted
Voice sound (TEL voice signal) is input from the microphone to TEL adapter unit. It is input from TEL antenna
via Bluetooth communication to portable telephone. It is transmitted to phone on the other side. The operation
is performed with steering switch or voice recognition function (TEL operation only).

JSNIA1491ZZ
M

satellite antenna)


• Inputs TEL voice signal or voice guidance signal from TEL adapter unit and
outputs it to BOSE amp. during reception.
AV CONTROL UNIT
• Connects with TEL adapter unit and AV communication and controls hands
free phone system.
unit.
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
• Inputs RGB image signal (RGB, RGB area and RGB synchronizing) from AV
control unit and displays the status of hands free phone system.
Inputs TEL voice signal or voice guidance signal from AV control unit and outputs
BOSE AMP.
it to front door speaker and center speaker.
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Outputs TEL voice signal or voice guidance signal from BOSE amp.
FRONT SQUAWKER
• Adjust the sound when using TEL.
PRESET SWITCH
• The operation signal is transmitted to AV control unit via AV communication.
• The hands free phone system can be operated.
STEERING SWITCH
• Used when operating the hands-free phone.
MICROPHONE • Outputs Mic. signal (TEL voice signal) to TEL adapter unit.
• The power (Mic. power supply) is supplied from TEL adapter unit.
• Inputs the TEL voice signal from TEL antenna and outputs it to AV control unit.
TEL ADAPTER UNIT • It is connected with AV control unit via AV communication and controlled with
AV control unit.
TEL ANTENNA Receives the TEL voice signal and outputs it to TEL adapter unit.

REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
A
JSNIA1499GB
G
CAMERA IMAGE OPERATION PRINCIPLE H

• Power is supplied to rear view camera from camera control unit and the rear view camera outputs the cam-
era image to camera control unit when selector lever is set to reverse position and the reverse signal on
camera control unit is input. I
• Camera control unit superimposes the guiding line and predicted course line to the image from rear view
camera and outputs to front display unit. In this case, the reverse signal is also input to AV control unit.
Therefore, AV control unit recognizes the selector lever as in the reverse position. And then AV control unit
switches the image displayed by the communication signal between AV control unit and front display unit J
with the camera image.
• AV control unit outputs camera image signal that is inputted from camera control unit to front display unit.
• Camera control unit controls the direction and distance of predicted course line according to the sensor sig- K
nal from steering angle sensor.
• Steering angle sensor connected to the AV control unit and transmits the steering angle signal via CAN com-
munication.
L
• AV control unit determines whether rear view camera is equipped or not, based on the presence of camera
connection recognition signal. It switches to rear view monitor image at the time of reverse signal input when
rear view camera is equipped.
• Warning message under the rear view monitor display is described by AV control unit. M
AV

Rear view monitor guiding line
JSNIA1420GB

JSNIA1491ZZ
M

satellite antenna)


• Image on display is transmitted to rear view monitor image by serial communi-
cation between AV control unit and front display unit.
AV CONTROL UNIT • Warning displayed on the rear view monitor image is illustrated.
• AV control unit recognizes the presence of camera system with camera con-
nection recognition signal.
• Camera image signal is input from AV control unit.
• RGB image signal for warning display is input from AV control unit.
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
• Rear view monitor image is changed by serial communication from AV control
unit.
• Camera image signal is input from rear view camera. Camera image signal is
• Power (camera ON signal) is transmitted to rear view camera.
• Superimpose the guiding line and predicted course line to the camera image
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
that outputs to AV control unit.
• Inputs the sensor signal from steering angle sensor, and then controls the pre-
dicted course line.
• Camera control unit is connected via AV communication.
• The image of vehicle rear view is transmitted to camera control unit.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
• It receives power (camera ON signal) from camera control unit and operates.
It is connected to the AV control unit and transmits the steering angle signal via
CAN communication.

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
A
Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000003838549
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH AND PRESET SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B

The ON/OFF operation (continuity) of each switch in the multifunction switch and preset switch can be
checked.
Self-diagnosis Mode C
• Press the “BACK” switch and the “UP” switch of the 4-direction
switches within 10 seconds after turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ACC and hold them for 3 seconds or more. The buzzer D
sounds, all indicators of the preset switch illuminate, and the self-
diagnosis mode starts.
• The continuity of each switch in the ON position can be checked by
pressing the switch. The buzzer sounds if the switch is normal. E
NOTE:
The hazard switch and disk eject switch cannot be checked.
F
JSNIA0136GB
Finishing Self-diagnosis Mode

Self-diagnosis mode is canceled when turning the ignition switch OFF. G
MULTI AV SYSTEM ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

• The AV control unit diagnosis function starts up with multifunction switch operation and AV control unit per- H
forms a diagnosis for each unit in the system during the on board diagnosis.
• Perform a CONSULT-III diagnosis if the on board diagnosis does not start, e.g., the screen does not display
anything, multifunction switch does not function, etc.
I
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS
Description
• The trouble diagnosis function has a self-diagnosis mode for conducting trouble diagnosis automatically and J
a confirmation/adjustment mode for operating manually.
• Self-diagnosis mode performs AV control unit diagnosis and the connection diagnosis between each of the
units that make up the system, and it indicates the results to the display. K
• The confirmation/adjustment mode allows the technician to check, modify or adjust the vehicle signals and
set values, as well as to monitor the system error records and system communication status. The checking,
modifying or adjusting generally requires human intervention and judgment (the system cannot make judg-
ment automatically). L
On Board Diagnosis Item
Mode Description M
• AV control unit diagnosis
Self Diagnosis
• Perform the connection diagnosis between each of the units.
AV

Mode Description
The confirmations of the tint with the color spectrum bar display and
Display Diagnosis
shading of color with the gradation bar display can be performed.
Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, parking brake,
Vehicle Signals
lights, ignition switch, and reverse.
Speaker Test The connection of a speaker can be confirmed by test tone.
Climate Control Start auto air conditioner system self-diagnosis.
The system malfunction and the frequency when occurring in the past
Error History are displayed. When the malfunctioning item is selected, the time and
Confirmation/ place that the selected malfunction last occurred are displayed.
Adjustment
Vehicle CAN Diagnosis The transmitting/receiving of CAN communication can be monitored.
The communication condition of each unit of Multi AV system can be
AV COMM Diagnosis
monitored.
The signal connected to camera control unit can be checked and the
Camera Cont. guiding line position that overlaps rear view camera image can be adjust-
ed.
Delete Unit Connection Log Erase the connection history of unit and error history
Initialize Settings Initializes AV control unit memory.
STARTING PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the audio system OFF.
3. While pressing the “SETTING” button, turn the volume control
dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 40 clicks or more. (When
the self-diagnosis mode starts, a short beep will sound.)
• Shifting from the current screen to the previous screen is per-
formed by pressing the “BACK” button.
JSNIA0137GB
4. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and then the

items of “Self Diagnosis” and “Confirmation/Adjustment” can be
selected.
JSNIA0138GB
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE

1. Start the self-diagnosis function and select “Self-diagnosis”.
- Self-diagnosis subdivision screen is displayed, and the self- A
- The bar graph visible on the center of the self-diagnosis subdivi-
sion screen indicates the progress of the trouble diagnosis.
B
JSNIA0139GB
D
2. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self-diagnosis is com-
pleted. The unit names and the connection lines are color-coded
according to the diagnostic results. E
Con-
Diagnosis results Unit nection F
line
Normal Green Green
Connection malfunction Gray Yellow G
Unit malfunction Note Red Green JSNIA1391GB
NOTE:
H
• Only the control unit (AV control unit) is displayed in red.
• Replace AV control unit if “Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit malfunction” is indicated. The symptom is an AV
control unit internal error. Refer to AV-251, "Exploded View".
- If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined accord- I
ing to the following order of priority: red > gray.
- The comments of the self-diagnosis results can be viewed with a
component in the diagnosis result screen. J
JSNIA0141GB
M
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
• The self-diagnosis mode allows the technician to diagnose the connection in the communication line
between AV control unit and each unit, and the internal operation of AV control unit.
• Because the start condition of the diagnosis function is a switch operation, the on board diagnosis function AV
cannot be started up if any malfunction is detected in the communication circuit between AV control unit and
the multifunction switch.
• Check the applicable display in following table, and then repair the malfunctioning parts. O
Self-diagnosis Result Chart

Possible malfunction location / Action

Diagnosis results Description
to take
“Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit
AV control unit malfunction is detected. Replace AV control unit.
malfunction”
Check AV control unit power supply

Malfunction is detected in AV control and ground circuits. When detecting no
unit power supply and ground circuits. malfunction in those components, re-
place AV control unit.
JPNIA0833GB
NOTE:
When a control unit malfunction is detected (red in
unit display), connection malfunctions with other
connection units may be displayed.
When either one of the following

items are detected:
• malfunction is detected in the com-
munication circuits between AV con- Communication circuits between AV
trol unit and front display unit. control unit and front display unit.
• malfunction is detected in the com-
munication signal between AV con-
trol unit and front display unit.
JPNIA0834GB

items are detected:
• satellite radio tuner power supply
and ground circuits malfunction are
detected. • Satellite radio tuner power supply
• malfunction is detected in the com- and ground circuit.
munication circuits between AV con- • Communication circuits between AV
trol unit and satellite radio tuner. control unit and satellite radio tuner.
• malfunction is detected in the com- • Request signal circuit between AV
munication signal between AV con- control unit and satellite radio tuner.
trol unit and satellite radio tuner.
• malfunction is detected in the re-
JPNIA0835GB
quest signal circuit between AV con-

items are detected:
• iPod adapter power supply and
ground circuits malfunction are de-
tected.
ground circuit.
• malfunction is detected in the AV
• AV communication circuits between
communication circuits between AV
AV control unit and iPod adapter.
control unit and iPod adapter.
communication signal between AV
control unit and iPod adapter.
JPNIA0836GB

Diagnosis results Description
to take A

items are detected:
B
• TEL adapter unit power supply and
tected.
ground circuits.
• malfunction is detected in the AV C
communication circuits between AV
AV control unit and TEL adapter unit.
control unit and TEL adapter unit.
communication signal between AV D
control unit and TEL adapter unit.
JPNIA0837GB
Malfunction is detected in the camera Camera control unit recognition circuit

F
control unit recognition circuit between between AV control unit and camera
AV control unit and camera control unit. control unit.
G
JSNIA1590GB H
CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT MODE
1. Start the diagnosis function and select “Confirmation/Adjustment”. The confirmation/adjustment mode I
indicates where each item can be checked or adjusted.
2. Select each switch on the “Confirmation/Adjustment Mode”
screen to display the relevant trouble diagnosis screen. Press
the “RETURN” switch to return to the initial Confirmation/Adjust- J
ment Mode screen.
JSNIA0147GB
Display Diagnosis M
AV
JSNIA0688GB

The tint of the color bar indication is as per the following list if a RGB signal error is detected.
R (red) signal error : Light blue (Cyan) tint

G (green) signal error : Purple (Magenta) tint
B (blue) signal error : Yellow tint
Vehicle Signals
A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and
the signals recognized by the system.
JSNIA0149GB
Diagnosis item Display Vehicle status Remarks

Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Vehicle speed ON
Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
ON Parking brake is applied.
Parking brake
OFF Parking brake is released.
ON Light switch ON
Lights —
OFF Light switch OFF
ON Ignition switch ON
Ignition —
OFF Ignition switch ACC
Shift the selector lever to the “R” po-
ON
sition.
Reverse Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
Shift the selector lever to a position
OFF
other than the “R” position.
Speaker Test
Select “SPEAKER DIAGNOSIS” to display the Speaker Diagnosis
screen. Press “START and NEXT” to generate a test tone in a
speaker. Press “Start” to generate a test tone in the next speaker.
Press “End” to stop the test tones.
NOTE:
The frequency of test tone emitted from each speaker is as follows.
Tweeter* : 3 kHz
Front speaker : 300 Hz
Rear speaker : 1 kHz
JSNIA0150GB
*: Squawker
Climate Control
Refer to “HEATER & AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL SYSTEM” for details.
Error History
The self-diagnosis results are judged depending on whether any error occurs from when “Self-diagnosis” is
selected until the self-diagnosis results are displayed.
However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition switch is turned
ON and then no error has occurred until the self-diagnosis start. Check the “Error Record” to detect any error
that may have occurred before the self-diagnosis start because of this condition.

Count up method A
• The counter resets to 0 if an error occurs when the ignition switch is turned ON. The counter increases by 1 A
if the condition is normal at the next IGN ON cycle.
• The counter upper limit is 39. Any counts exceeding 39 are ignored. The counter can be reset (no error
record display) with the “Delete log” switch or CONSULT-III.
B
Count up method B
• The counter increases by 1 if an error occurs when the ignition switch is ON. The counter will not decrease
even if the condition is normal at the next IGN ON cycle.
• The counter upper limit is 50. Any counts exceeding 50 are ignored. The counter can be reset (no error C
Display type of occur- D

Error history display item
rence frequency
Count up method A CAN communication line, control unit (CAN), AV communication line, control unit (AV communication)
Count up method B Other than the above E
J
JSNIA0151GB
Error item
Error items may be displayed simultaneously according to the cause. If error items are displayed simulta- K
neously, the cause can be detected by the combination of display items.
Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take L

Perform diagnosis with CONSULT-III, and
then repair malfunctioning parts according
CAN communication malfunction is detect-
CAN COMM CIRCUIT to the diagnosis results.
ed. M
Refer to AV-43, "CONSULT-III Function
(MULTI AV)".
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detect-
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) AV
ed.
AV communication circuit initial diagnosis
CONTROL UNIT (AV) Replace AV control unit.
malfunction is detected.
FLASH-ROM Error Of Control Unit O
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
CAN Controller Memory Error

Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take
When either one of the following items
are detected:
• front display unit power supply and
ground circuits malfunction are detected. • Front display unit power supply and
• malfunction is detected in the communi- ground circuits.
Front Display Connection Error
cation circuits between AV control unit • Communication circuits between AV con-
and front display unit. trol unit and front display unit.
• malfunction is detected in the communi-
cation signal between AV control unit and
front display unit.
are detected:
• satellite radio tuner power supply and
ground circuits malfunction are detected.
• Satellite radio tuner power supply and
ground circuits.
cation circuits between AV control unit
• Communication circuits between AV con-
SAT Connection Error and satellite radio tuner.
• Request signal circuit between AV con-
satellite radio tuner.
• malfunction is detected in the request
signal circuit between AV control unit and
Malfunction is detected in the camera con- Camera connection recognition circuit be-
Camera Control Unit Connection Error nection recognition circuit between AV con- tween AV control unit and camera control
trol unit and camera control unit. unit.
are detected:
• multifunction switch power supply and
ground circuits malfunction are detected. • Multifunction switch power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • malfunction is detected in the AV com- ground circuits.
• Switches Connection Error munication circuits between AV control • AV communication circuits between AV
unit and multifunction switch. control unit and multifunction switch.
• malfunction is detected in the AV com-
munication signal between AV control
unit and multifunction switch.
are detected:
• iPod adapter unit power supply and
ground circuits malfunction are detected. • iPod adapter power supply and ground
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • malfunction is detected in the AV com- circuits.
• iPod Connection Error munication circuits between AV control • AV communication circuits between AV
unit and iPod adapter. control unit and iPod adapter.
unit and iPod adapter.
are detected:
• camera control unit power supply and
ground circuits malfunction is detected. • Camera control unit power supply and
• Rear View Camera Connection Error munication circuits between AV control • AV communication circuits between AV
unit and camera control unit. control unit and camera control unit.
unit and camera control unit.

A
are detected:
ground circuits malfunction are detected. • TEL adapter unit power supply and B
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • malfunction is detected in the AV com- ground circuit.
• H/F Unit Connection Error munication circuits between AV control • AV communication circuits between AV
unit and TEL adapter unit. control unit and TEL adapter unit.
• malfunction is detected in the AV com- C
unit and TEL adapter unit.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT D
• Switches Connection Error Malfunction is detected in the AV communi-
AV communication circuits between AV
• iPod Connection Error cation circuits between AV control unit and
control unit and camera control unit.
• Rear View Camera Connection Error camera control unit.
• H/F Unit Connection Error E
Vehicle CAN Diagnosis
• CAN communication status and error counter is displayed.
• The error counter displays “OK” if a malfunction was not detected F
in the past and displays “0” if a malfunction is detected. It increases
by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle.
The upper limit of the counter is 39. G
• The error counter is erased if reset.
Malfunction counter H
Items Display (Current)
(Past)
Tx(HVAC) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
JSNIA0080GB
Rx(ECM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39 I
Rx(Cluster) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
Rx(BCM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
J
Rx(HVAC) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
Rx(USM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
AV COMM Diagnosis K
• Displays the communication status between AV control unit (mas-
ter unit) and each unit.
• The error counter displays “OK” if any malfunction was not L
detected in the past and displays “0” if a malfunction is detected. It
increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch
ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39.
• The error counter is erased if reset. M
Status Counter
Items AV
(Current) (Past)
JPNIA0512GB
C Tx(ITM–SW) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
C Rx(PrimarySW–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
O
C Rx(BTHF–ITM)* OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
C Rx(iPod Adpt.–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
*: With hands-free phone P
Camera Cont.
The two functions of “Connection Confirmation” and “Adjust Offset of Rear View Camera” are available.
CONNECTION CONFIRMATION

The steering angle sensor, reverse signal and vehicle speed sensor
can be inspected.
JSNIA0084GB
Diagnosis item Display Vehicle status

When steering the vehicle with ignition switch ON (remains ON until connection
ON
mode is stopped when it is turned ON)
Steer. Angle Sensor • Ignition switch at ACC
OFF
• No steering with ignition switch ON
— Malfunction detected in camera connection recognition signal
ON Selector lever is in “R” with ignition switch ON
• Ignition switch at ACC
Reverse Sensor OFF
• Selector lever is in position other than “R” with ignition switch ON
— Malfunction detected in camera-connection recognition signal
ON Vehicle speed is more than 0 km/h (0 MPH) with ignition switch ON
• Ignition switch at ACC
Vehicle Speed Sensor OFF
• Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH) with ignition switch ON
— Malfunction detected in camera connection recognition signal
Side view Switch — Not used
ADJUST OFFSET OF REAR VIEW CAMERA
Use this mode to adjust the guide line display position of the rear
view monitor if necessary after removing the rear view monitor cam-
era.
JSNIA0085GB
Delete Unit Connection Log

Deletes any unit connection records and error records from AV con-
trol unit memory. (Clear the records of the unit that has been
removed.)
JSNIA0154GB
Initialize Settings

Initializes AV control unit memory.
A
JSNIA0155GB
D
CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV) INFOID:0000000003838550
CONSULT-III functions E
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via the communication with AV control unit.
Diagnosis mode Description

F
Ecu Identification The part number of AV control unit can be checked.
Performs a diagnosis on AV control unit, a connection diagnosis for the communication circuit
Self Diagnostic Result
of the Multi AV system and displays the current and past malfunctions collectively.
G
Data Monitor The diagnosis of vehicle signal that is input to AV control unit can be performed.
AV COMMUNICATION
When “AV communication” of “CAN Diag Support Monitor” is selected, the following function will be performed. H
Displays the communication status from AV control unit to each unit as well as the error
AV&NAVI C/U
AV communication counter. I
AUDIO Displays AV control unit communication status and the error counter.
ECU IDENTIFICATION
J
The part number of AV control unit is displayed.
SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULT
• In CONSULT-III self-diagnosis, self-diagnosis results and error history are displayed simultaneously. K
• The timing is displayed as “0” if any of the error codes [U1000], [U1010], [U1300] or [U1310] are detected.
The counter increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle.
Self-diagnosis results display item L

Perform diagnosis with CONSULT-III, and M
CAN communication malfunction is detect- then repair the malfunctioning parts accord-
CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]
ed. ing to the diagnosis results.
Refer to AV-48, "Diagnosis Procedure".
AV
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010]
ed.
CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] Replace AV control unit. O
Control Unit FLASH-ROM [U1200]
CAN CONT [U1216]
P

are detected:
• malfunction is detected in communica- ground circuits.
FRONT DISP CONN [U1243]
tion circuits between AV control unit and • Communication circuits between AV con-
front display unit. trol unit and front display unit.
• malfunction is detected in communica-
tion signal between AV control unit and
front display unit.
Malfunction is detected in camera connec- Camera connection recognition circuit be-
CAMERA CONT. CONN [U1250] tion recognition circuit between AV control tween AV control unit and camera control
unit and camera control unit. unit.
are detected:
• satellite radio tuner power supply and
• Satellite radio tuner power supply and
ground circuits.
tion circuits between AV control unit and
• Communication circuits between AV con-
SAT CONN [U1255] satellite radio tuner.
• Request signal circuits between AV con-
tion signal between AV control unit and
• malfunction is detected in request signal
circuits between AV control unit and sat-
ellite radio tuner.
are detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] • malfunction is detected in AV communi- ground circuits.
• SWITCH CONN [U1240] cation circuits between AV control unit • AV communication circuits between AV
and multifunction switch. control unit and multifunction switch.
• malfunction is detected in AV communi-
multifunction switch.
are detected:
• camera control unit power supply and
ground circuits malfunction are detected. • Camera control unit power supply and
• REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] cation circuits between AV control unit • AV communication circuits between AV
and camera control unit. control unit and camera control unit.
camera control unit.
are detected:
• iPod adapter power supply and ground
circuits malfunction are detected. • iPod adapter power supply and ground
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] • malfunction is detected in AV communi- circuits.
• IPod CONN [U1254] cation circuits between AV control unit • AV communication circuits between AV
and iPod adapter. control unit and iPod adapter.
iPod adapter.

A
are detected:
ground circuit malfunction are detected. • TEL adapter unit power supply and B
• HAND FREE CONN [U1256] cation circuits between AV control unit • AV communication circuits between AV
and TEL adapter unit. control unit and TEL adapter unit.
• malfunction is detected in AV communi- C
TEL adapter unit.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] D
• SWITCH CONN [U1240] Malfunction is detected in the AV communi-
AV communication circuits between AV
• REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] cation circuits between AV control unit and
control unit and camera control unit.
• IPod CONN [U1254] camera control unit.
• HAND FREE CONN [U1256] E
DATA MONITOR
ALL SIGNALS F
• Displays the status of the following vehicle signals inputted into AV control unit.
• For each signal, actual signal can be compared with the condition recognized on the system.
G
Display Item Display Vehicle status Remarks

On Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) H
VHCL SPD SIG
Off Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
On Parking brake is applied.
PKB SIG
Off Parking brake is released. I
On Light switch ON
ILLUM SIG
Off Light switch OFF
— J
On Ignition switch ON
IGN SIG
Off Ignition switch ACC
Shift the selector lever to the “R” posi- K
On
tion
REV SIG Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
Off
other than the “R” position L
SELECTION FROM MENU
Allows the technician to select which vehicle signals should be displayed and displays the status of the
selected vehicle signals. M
Item to be selected Description

AV
VHCL SPD SIG
PKB SIG
The same as when “ALL SIGNALS”
ILLUM SIG O
is selected.
IGN SIG
REV SIG
P

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TEL ADAPTER UNIT)
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS

During on board diagnosis the diagnosis function of TEL adapter unit starts with the operation of steering
switch and performs the diagnosis when ignition switch is turned to ACC.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS ITEM
The on board diagnosis has 3 modes: the self-diagnosis mode that performs the trouble diagnosis, the
speaker adaptation data deleting mode and the hands-free phone system initialization mode.
CAUTION:
• Perform the diagnosis with the vehicle stopped.
• Perform STEP2 if necessary.
STEP MODE Description

• The self-diagnosis mode performs the microphone test.
• The self-diagnosis mode also diagnoses TEL adapter
STEP1 Self-diagnosis unit, TEL antenna and steering switch.
• Those results are indicated with voice guidance and dis-
played on the screen.
The speaker adaptation data deleting mode can delete the
Speaker adaptation data deleting
speaker adaptation data.
STEP2
Hands-free phone system initialization mode can perform
Hands-free phone system initialization
the initialization of the hands-free phone system.
Self-diagnosis mode reads out the self-diagnosis results and indicates DTC on the display.
NOTE:
• Error count is read out simultaneously when reading out the DTC name.
• The errors are read out continuously when some errors occur at the same time. The DTC displays are com-
bined and displayed. For example, DTC 01100 is displayed when DTC 01000 and DTC 00100 are indicated
at the same time.
Self-diagnosis results
DTC DTC name Possible causes
DTC 10000 INTERNAL FAILURE TEL adapter unit
DTC 01000 ANT. SHORT TO BATT OR OPEN
TEL antenna
DTC 00100 ANT. SHORT TO GROUND
DTC 00010 STEERING REMOTE BUTTON STUCK A
Steering switch
DTC 00001 STEERING REMOTE BUTTON STUCK B
DTC 00000 THERE ARE NO FAILURE RECORDS TO REPORT —
The Details Of Error Count

The error count displays "0" when an error occurs. The next time it counts up to "1" if conditions are normal
with the ignition switch ON. It continues the count up unless the initialization of hands-free phone system is
performed.

FLOW CHART OF TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
AV
JSNIA1235GB
P

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
Description INFOID:0000000003838552
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each
control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-32, "CAN Communication Signal Chart".
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000003838553
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of CON-

DTC Diagnostic item is detected when ... Probable malfunction location
SULT-III
AV control unit is not transmitting or receiving
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or CAN communication system.
more.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003838554
1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “MULTI AV”.
Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed?
YES >> Refer to “LAN system”. Refer to LAN-22, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO >> Refer to GI section. Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident".

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
A
Initial diagnosis of AV control unit. B

DTC DETECTION LOGIC C

SULT-III D
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. AV control unit.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003838557 E
1.REPLACE AV CONTROL UNIT

When DTC U1010 is detected, replace AV control unit. F
>> INSPECTION END

G
AV

U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT
Replace the AV control unit if this DTC is displayed. Refer to AV-251, "Exploded View".

• It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each control
signals from the AV control unit.
• AV control unit includes audio function and vehicle information function.
• It is connected to ECM and unified meter and A/C amp via CAN communica-
tion to obtain necessary information for the vehicle information function.
AV CONTROL UNIT • It is connected to BCM via CAN communication transmitting/receiving for the
trol.
parking brake).
Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Action to take
CONSULT-III
CONTROL UNIT (AV) An initial diagnosis error is detected in AV communication
U1310 Replace AV control unit.
[U1310] circuit.

A
Replace the AV control unit if this DTC is displayed. Refer to AV-251, "Exploded View". B

• It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each control C
• It is connected to ECM and unified meter and A/C amp via CAN communica- D
• It inputs the illumination signals that are required for the display dimming con- E
trol.
parking brake).
• Auxiliary image signal is input from the auxiliary input jacks. F
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
H
Cont Unit
An internal malfunction is detected in AV control unit
U1200 FLASH- ROM Replace AV control unit.
(FLASH-ROM).
[U1200]
I
AV

Replace the AV control unit if this DTC is displayed. Refer to AV-251, "Exploded View".

• It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each control
• It is connected to ECM and unified meter and A/C amp via CAN communica-
trol.
parking brake).
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
CAN CONT Internal malfunction of AV control unit (CAN controller) is
U1216 Replace AV control unit.
[U1216] detected.

U1243 FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
A
B
unit.
C
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT • Inputs the RGB image signal (RGB, RGB area and RGB synchronizing) from
AV control unit and the auxiliary image signal from the auxiliary input jacks.
• Outputs the synchronizing signals (HP and VP) to the AV control unit.
D
E
Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Possible causes
CONSULT-III
When either one of the following items is detected:
• front display unit power supply and ground circuits mal- • Front display unit power supply and F
function is detected. ground circuits.
FRONT DISP CONN
U1243 • malfunction is detected in communication circuits be- • Communication circuits between
[U1243]
tween AV control unit and front display unit. AV control unit and front display
• malfunction is detected in communication signal be- unit.
G
tween AV control unit and front display unit.

H
1.CHECK FRONT DISPLAY UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check front display unit power supply and ground circuits. Refer to AV-59, "FRONT DISPLAY UNIT : Diagno- I
sis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. J
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
K
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between front display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
L
Front display unit AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
M
11 56
M71 M83 Existed
22 44
4. Check continuity between front display unit harness connector and ground. AV
Front display unit

Continuity O
Connector Terminals
Ground
11
M71 Not existed
22 P
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (CONT→DISP)
1. Connect front display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.

3. Check signal between front display unit harness connector and ground.
(+)
Front display unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal
When adjusting display

M71 11 Ground
brightness.
PKIB5039J

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit.
4.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DISP→CONT)
Check signal between front display unit harness connector and ground.
(+)
Connector Terminal
When adjusting display

M71 22 Ground
brightness.
PKIB5039J

YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace front display unit.

U1250 CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
U1250 CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
A
B
• Camera image signal is input from rear view camera, and camera image is in-
dicated on the display.
C
• Power (camera ON signal) is sent to rear view camera.
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
• Controlled by AV communication sent from AV control unit.
• AV control unit recognizes the presence of camera system with camera con-
nection recognition signal. D
E
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
CAMERA CONT. CONN A malfunction is detected in camera connection recogni- Camera connection recognition sig- F
U1250
[U1250] tion signal circuit nal circuit

G
1.CHECK CAMERA-CONNECTION RECOGNITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. H
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and camera control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and camera control unit harness connector.
I
AV control unit Camera control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M84 68 B50 14 Existed J
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. K
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector. L
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
M
(+)
Voltage
AV control unit (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal AV
M84 68 Ground 5.0 V
O
YES >> Replace camera control unit.

U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER

• Inputs the satellite radio signal from satellite radio antenna and outputs it to the
AV control unit.
• It is controlled with the communication (communication signal, request signal)
from AV control unit.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
• Satellite radio tuner power supply
• satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuits
and ground circuits.
• Communication circuits between
• malfunction is detected in communication circuits be-
SAT CONN AV control unit and satellite radio
U1255 tween AV control unit and satellite radio tuner.
[U1255] tuner.
• malfunction is detected in communication signal be-
• Request signal circuit between AV
tween AV control unit and satellite radio tuner.
control unit and satellite radio tun-
• malfunction is detected in request signal circuit be-
er.
tween AV control unit and satellite radio tuner.
1.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO TUNER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-62, "SATELLITE RADIO TUNER :
Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT AND REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and satellite radio tuner connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and satellite radio tuner harness connector.
AV control unit Satellite radio tuner

Continuity
28 8
M82 29 B236 9 Existed
30 10
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminals
28 Ground
M82 29 Not existed
30
YES >> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE A

1. Connect AV control unit connector.
B
(+)
Voltage
AV control unit (−) C
(Approx.)
Connector Terminals
28 7.5 V
M82 Ground D
29 7.0 V
YES >> GO TO 4. E
4.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. F
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector.
3. Connect satellite radio tuner.
4. Turn ignition switch ON. G
5. Check voltage between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground.
(+) H
Voltage
Satellite radio tuner (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B236 10 Ground 7.0 V I

YES >> INSPECTION END J
NO >> Replace satellite radio tuner.
AV

U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT
U1300 is indicated when malfunction occurs in communication signal of multi AV system. Indicated simulta-
neously, without fail, with the malfunction of control units connected to AV control unit with communication line.
Determine the possible malfunction cause from the table below.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS DISPLAY ITEM
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
• multifunction switch power supply and ground circuits • Multifunction switch power supply
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
malfunction is detected. and ground circuits.
U1300 [U1300]
• malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits • AV communication circuits be-
U1240 • SWITCH CONN
between AV control unit and multifunction switch. tween AV control unit and multi-
[U1240]
• malfunction is detected in AV communication signal be- function switch.
tween AV control unit and multifunction switch.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • camera control unit power supply and ground circuits • Camera control unit power supply
[U1300] malfunction are detected. and ground circuits.
U1300
• REAR CAMERA • malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits • AV communication circuits be-
U1252
CONN between AV control unit and camera control unit. tween AV control unit and camera
[U1252] • malfunction is detected in AV communication signal be- control unit.
tween AV control unit and camera control unit.
• iPod adapter power supply and ground circuits malfunc- • iPod adapter power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
tion is detected. ground circuits.
U1300 [U1300]
U1254 • IPod CONN
between AV control unit and iPod adapter. tween AV control unit and iPod
[U1254]
• malfunction is detected in AV communication signal be- adapter.
tween AV control unit and iPod adapter.
• TEL adapter unit power supply and ground circuits mal- • TEL adapter unit power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
function is detected. ground circuits.
U1300 [U1300]
U1256 • HAND FREE CONN
between AV control unit and TEL adapter unit. tween AV control unit and TEL
[U1256]
• malfunction is detected in AV communication signal be- adapter unit.
tween AV control unit and TEL adapter unit.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
[U1300]
• SWITCH CONN
U1300 [U1240]
AV communication circuits between
U1252 • REAR CAMERA Malfunction is detected in the AV communication circuits
AV control unit and camera control
U1254 CONN between AV control unit and camera control unit.
unit.
U1256 [U1252]
• IPod CONN [U1254]
• HAND FREE CONN
[U1256]

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
A
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003838574
B
1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses.
C
Power source Fuse No.
Battery 34
D
Ignition switch ACC or ON 19
Ignition switch ON or START 3
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT F
Check voltage between AV control unit harness connectors and ground.

G
Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.)
Battery power supply M81 19 OFF Battery voltage
ACC power supply M81 7 ACC Battery voltage H
Ignition signal M85 104 ON Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 3. I
NO >> Check harness between AV control unit and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT J
2. Disconnect AV control unit connectors.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connectors and ground.
K
Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Continuity
M81 20
Ground OFF Existed L
M85 85
YES >> INSPECTION END M
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003838575
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (DISPLAY SIDE) O

Check voltage between front display unit harness connectors and ground.
Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.) P
Inverter VCC 2
M71 ACC 9.0 V
Signal VCC 3
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (CONTINUITY)

2. Disconnect the harness connector between front display unit and AV control unit.
3. Check continuity between front display unit harness connectors and AV control unit harness connector.
Signal name Front display unit (M71) AV control unit (M83) Continuity
Inverter VCC 2 59 Existed
Signal VCC 3 47 Existed
4. Check continuity between front display unit harness connectors and ground.
Signal name Front display unit (M71) — Continuity

Inverter VCC 2 Ground Not existed
Signal VCC 3 Ground Not existed
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT SIDE)
1. Connect the AV control unit harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ACC.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connectors and ground.
Inverter VCC 59
M83 ACC 9.0 V
Signal VCC 47
NO >> Replacement of AV control unit.
4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect front display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between front display unit harness connector and ground.
Ground M71 1 OFF Existed
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003838576
1.CHECK FUSE

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between multifunction switch harness connector and ground.
A
ACC power supply M72 3 ACC Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal? B
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between multifunction switch and fuse.
C
2. Disconnect multifunction switch connector. D
3. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and ground.
E
YES >> INSPECTION END F
BOSE AMP.
G
BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003838577
1.CHECK FUSE H
Check for blown fuse.

I
Battery 8
YES >> GO TO 2. J
K
Check voltage between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.
L
Battery power supply B42 11 OFF Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 3. M
NO >> Check harness between BOSE amp. and fuse.
AV
2. Disconnect BOSE amp. connector.
3. Check continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.
O
Ground B42 12 OFF Existed
P
iPod ADAPTER

iPod ADAPTER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003838578
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 34
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check voltage between iPod adapter harness connector and ground.
NO >> Check harness between iPod adapter and fuse.
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003838579
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 34
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check voltage between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground.
ACC power supply B236 16 ACC Battery voltage
NO >> Check harness between satellite radio tuner and fuse.
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003838580
1.CHECK FUSE

Power source Fuse No. A

Battery 34
B
YES >> GO TO 2.
C
Check voltage between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
D
ACC power supply B50 30 ACC Battery voltage E
YES >> GO TO 3.
F
NO >> Check harness between camera control unit and fuse.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
2. Disconnect camera control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
H
Is inspection result normal? I
TEL ADAPTER UNIT J
TEL ADAPTER UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003838581
K
1.CHECK FUSE
L
Battery 34
Ignition switch ACC or ON 19 M
AV
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT O
Check voltage between TEL adapter unit harness connector and ground.
Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.) P
Ignition signal B237 3 ON Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between TEL adapter unit and fuse.


2. Disconnect TEL adapter unit connector.
3. Check continuity between TEL adapter unit harness connector and ground.

RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit with RGB signal to the front display unit. B
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT C

3. Check continuity between front display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector. D

Continuity E
M71 17 M83 40 Existed
4. Check continuity between front display unit harness connector and ground. F
Front display unit

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground G
M71 17 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL I
3. Check signal between front display unit harness connector and ground. J
(+)
Front display unit (−) Condition Reference value K
Connector Terminal
L
Start confirmation/adjustment
mode, and then display color bar by
M71 17 Ground
selecting “Color Spectrum Bar” on M
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS screen.
SKIB2238J
AV
YES >> Replace front display unit.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. O

RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit with RGB signal to the front display unit.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


Continuity
Front display unit

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M71 6 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL
(+)
Connector Terminal
M71 6 Ground
selecting “Color Spectrum Bar” on
SKIB2236J


RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT C


Continuity E
Front display unit

Continuity
M71 18 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL I
(+)
Connector Terminal
L
M71 18 Ground
selecting “Color Spectrum Bar” on M
SKIB2237J
AV

RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Transmit the RGB synchronizing signal to the front display unit so as to synchronize the RGB image displayed
with AV control unit.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT


Continuity
Front display unit

Continuity
M71 19 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL
(+)
Front display unit (−) Reference value
Connector Terminal
M71 19 Ground
SKIB3603E


RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Transmits the display area of RGB image displayed by AV control unit with RGB area (YS) signal to front dis- B
play unit.
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect front display unit connector and AV control unit connector. D
Front display unit AV control unit E

Continuity
F
Front display unit G

Continuity
M71 9 Not existed
H
YES >> GO TO 2.
I
2.CHECK RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL
2. Turn ignition switch ON. J
(+) K
Reference value
Front display unit (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
L
At RGB image is displayed 5.0 V
M
M71 9 Ground
At AUX image is displayed
AV
PKIB4948J
Is the inspection result normal? O

P

HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
In composite image (AUX image, camera image), transmit the vertical synchronizing (VP) signal and horizon-
tal synchronizing (HP) signal from front display unit to AV control unit so as to synchronize the RGB images
displayed with AV control unit such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


Continuity
Front display unit

Continuity
M71 8 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL
(+)
Connector Terminal
M71 8 Ground
SKIB3601E

YES >> Replace AV control unit.

VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
In composite image (AUX image, camera image), transmit the vertical synchronizing (VP) signal and horizon- B
tal synchronizing (HP) signal from front display unit to AV control unit so as to synchronize the RGB images
displayed with AV control unit such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003838595 C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. D
E
Continuity
M71 20 M83 57 Existed F
G
Front display unit
Continuity
M71 20 Not existed H
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. I
2.CHECK VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL

1. Connect front display unit connector and AV control unit connector. J
K
(+)
Connector Terminal L
M
M71 20 Ground
AV
SKIB3598E

O
P

AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
• Transmits the image signal of AUX device from auxiliary input jacks to AV control unit.
• AV control unit transmits the image signal that is inputted to the front display unit.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AUX INPUT JACKS AND AV CONTROL UNIT)
2. Disconnect auxiliary input jacks connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between auxiliary input jacks harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
Auxiliary input jacks AV control unit

Continuity
4. Check continuity between auxiliary input jacks harness connector and ground.
Auxiliary input jacks

Continuity
M154 7 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AUX IMAGE SIGNAL (AUX INPUT JACKS TO AV CONTROL UNIT)
1. Connect auxiliary input jacks connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check signal between auxiliary input jacks harness connector and ground.
(+)
Auxiliary input jacks (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal
M154 7 Ground At AUX image is displayed.
SKIB2251J

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check that there is no malfunction in the external device.
3.CHECK CONTINUITY COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT AND FRONT DIS-
PLAY UNIT)

Front display unit AV control unit A

Continuity
B
Front display unit C

Continuity
M71 15 Not existed
D
YES >> GO TO 4.
E
4.CHECK COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector and front display unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. F
(+) G
Connector Terminal
H
I
M71 15 Ground At AUX image is displayed.
J
SKIB2251J

YES >> Replace front display unit. K
AV

DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
The disk eject signal is output to AV control unit when the eject switch of multifunction switch is pressed.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect multifunction switch connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
Multifunction switch AV control unit

Continuity
Multifunction switch
Continuity
M72 14 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Reference value
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M85 103 Ground 3.3 V
YES >> Replace preset switch.

REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
• Camera control unit outputs camera power supply to rear view camera and inputs rear view camera image B
signal from rear view camera when the reverse signal is input.
• The camera control unit that inputs the camera image signal transmits the camera image signal to the AV
control unit.
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT D

2. Disconnect camera control unit connector and rear view camera connector.
3. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and rear view camera harness connec- E
tor.
Camera control unit Rear view camera F

Continuity
B50 8 D121 1 Existed
4. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and ground. G
Camera control unit

Continuity H
B50 8 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE CAMERA POWER SUPPLY J
1. Connect camera control unit connector and rear view camera connector.
K
3. Shift position is “R”
4. Check voltage between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
L
(+)
Voltage
Camera control unit (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal M
B50 8 Ground Shift position is “R” 6.0 V
YES >> GO TO 3. AV
NO >> Replace camera control unit.
3.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT O
2. Disconnect camera control unit connector and rear view camera connector.
3. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and rear view camera harness connec-
tor. P
Camera control unit Rear view camera

Continuity

Camera control unit

Continuity
B50 6 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect camera control unit connector and rear view camera connector.
3. Shift position is “R”
4. Check signal between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
(+)
Camera control unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal
At rear view camera im-

B50 6 Ground
age is displayed.
SKIB2251J

YES >> Replace camera control unit.
NO >> Replace rear view camera.

CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (CAMERA CONTROL UNIT TO AV CON-
TROL UNIT)
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (CAMERA CONTROL UNIT TO AV
A
CONTROL UNIT)
B
• Camera control unit outputs camera ON signal to rear view camera and inputs rear view camera image sig-
nal from rear view camera when the reverse signal is input.
• The camera control unit that inputs the camera image signal transmits the camera image signal to the AV C
control unit.
D
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (CAMERA CONTROL UNIT TO AV CONTROL
UNIT)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. E
2. Disconnect camera control unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
F
Camera control unit AV control unit
Continuity
G
B50 12 M84 65 Existed
H
Camera control unit
Continuity
B50 12 Not existed I

YES >> GO TO 2. J
2.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL (CAMERA CONTROL UNIT TO AV CONTROL UNIT)
1. Connect camera control unit connector and AV control unit connector. K
3. Check signal between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
L
(+)
Camera control unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal M
AV
At rear view camera image
B50 12 Ground
is displayed.
O
SKIB2251J
Is inspection result normal? P

NO >> Replace camera control unit.

COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
AV control unit that inputs the camera image signal and AUX image signal transmits the composite image sig-
nal to the front display unit.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY
UNIT)
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and front display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and front display unit harness connector.
AV control unit Front display unit

Continuity
AV control unit
Continuity
M83 36 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY UNIT)
1. Connect AV control unit connector and front display unit connector.
3. Check signal between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
(+)
AV control unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal
At rear view camera or AUX

M83 36 Ground
image is displayed.
SKIB2251J


MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Supply power from TEL adapter unit to microphone. The microphone transmits the sound/voice to the micro- B
phone.
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN TEL ADAPTER UNIT AND MICROPHONE CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect TEL adapter unit connector and microphone connector. D
3. Check continuity between TEL adapter unit harness connector and microphone harness connector.
TEL adapter unit Microphone E

Continuity
7 1
F
B237 8 R17 2 Existed
29 4
4. Check continuity between TEL adapter unit harness connector and ground. G
TEL adapter unit

Continuity H
Connector Terminals
Ground
7
B237 Not existed
29 I
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. J
2.CHECK VOLTAGE MICROPHONE VCC
1. Connect TEL adapter unit connector.
K
3. Check voltage between TEL adapter unit harness connector.
L
(+) (−)
Voltage
TEL adapter unit TEL adapter unit
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M
B237 29 B237 8 5.0 V
YES >> GO TO 3. AV
NO >> Replace TEL adapter unit.
3.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL O
2. Connect microphone connector.
4. Check signal between TEL adapter unit harness connector. P

(+) (−)
TEL adapter unit TEL adapter unit Condition Reference value
B237 7 B237 8 Give a voice.
PKIB5037J

YES >> Replace TEL adapter unit.
NO >> Replace microphone.

CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
TEL adapter unit identifies the vehicle model according to the control signal and performs the control. B
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT C

2. Disconnect TEL adapter unit connector.
3. Check continuity between TEL adapter unit harness connector and ground. D
TEL adapter unit

Continuity E
Connector Terminals
20 Ground
B237 23 Existed F
24
YES >> Replace TEL adapter unit. G
AV

MODE CHANGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
• AV control unit transmits the mode change signal to BOSE amp.

• Driver's Audio Stage controls the speaker's output characteristic by BOSE amp. so that the driver's seat is to
be the center of sounds.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY MODE CHANGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect BOSE amp. connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
BOSE amp. AV control unit

Continuity
BOSE amp.
Continuity
B41 17 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK MODE CHANGE SIGNAL
1. Connect BOSE amp. connector.
3. Check signal between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.
(+)
Reference value
BOSE amp. (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B41 17 Ground 8.5 V
NO >> Replace BOSE amp.

COMMUNICATION SIGNAL CIRCUIT (CONT-SAT)
A
Satellite radio tuner and AV control unit are connected with a serial communication. They transmit the opera- B
tion signal from AV control unit to satellite radio tuner, and transmit the display signal from satellite radio tuner
to AV control unit.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect satellite radio tuner connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between satellite radio tuner harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
E
Satellite radio tuner AV control unit
Continuity
9 29 F
B236 M82 Existed
10 30
4. Check continuity between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground. G
Satellite radio tuner

Continuity
Connector Terminals H
Ground
9
B236 Not existed
10
I
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (SAT→CONT)
1. Connect satellite radio tuner connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. K
3. Check signal between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground.
(+) L
Satellite radio tuner (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal
M
When satellite radio mode is AV

B236 9 Ground
selected.
O
SKIA9300J

YES >> GO TO 3. P
3.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (CONT→SAT)
Check signal between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground.

(+)
Connector Terminal
When satellite radio mode is

B236 10 Ground
selected.
SKIA9301J

YES >> Replace satellite radio tuner.

REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT (SAT→CONT)
REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT (SAT→CONT)
A
Request signal transmits the signal to recognize the connection of satellite radio tuner from satellite radio B
tuner to AV control unit.
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect satellite radio tuner connector and AV control unit connector. D
3. Check continuity between satellite radio tuner unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connec-
tor.
E
Satellite radio tuner AV control unit
Continuity
B236 8 M82 28 Existed F
4. Check continuity between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground.
G
Satellite radio tuner
Continuity
B236 8 Not existed H
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL

1. Connect satellite radio tuner connector and AV control unit connector. J
3. Check signal between satellite radio tuner harness connector and ground.
K
(+)
M
When satellite radio mode is
B236 8 Ground
selected.
AV
SKIA9299J

O
P

STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT
Transmits the steering switch signal to AV control unit.

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and spiral cable harness connector.
AV control unit Spiral cable

Continuity
AV control unit
Continuity
M81 6 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE
Check spiral cable.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace spiral cable.
1. Connect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector.
(+) (−)
Reference
AV control unit AV control unit value
(Approx.)
M81 6 M81 15 3.3 V
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH
2. Check steering switch. Refer to AV-87, "Component Inspection".
NO >> Replace steering switch.

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000003838622
A
Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector.
D
JSNIA0216GB
E
Steering switch Steering switch Resistance value
Condition
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal (Ω)
F
SOURCE switch ON 0
MENU UP switch ON 120 – 122
14
MENU DOWN switch ON 318 – 324 G
M303 M303 17 switch ON 716 – 730
VOL DOWN switch ON 0

H
15 VOL UP switch ON 120 – 122
switch ON 318 – 324

I
AV

STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT


Continuity
AV control unit
Continuity
M81 16 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check spiral cable.
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+) (−)
Reference
AV control unit AV control unit value
(Approx.)
M81 16 M81 15 3.3 V
YES >> GO TO 4.

A
D
JSNIA0216GB
E
Condition
F
SOURCE switch ON 0
14
M303 M303 17 switch ON 716 – 730

H

I
AV

STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT


Continuity
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check spiral cable.
YES >> GO TO 3.
AV control unit
Continuity
M81 15 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 4.

A
D
JSNIA0216GB
E
Condition
F
SOURCE switch ON 0
14
M303 M303 17 switch ON 716 – 730

H

I
AV

AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

AV CONTROL UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000003838629
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

CONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status
Ignition switch Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) On

VHCL SPD SIG
ON Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Off
Ignition switch Parking brake is applied. On

PKB SIG
ON Parking brake is released. Off
Ignition switch Light switch ON On

ILLUM SIG
ON Light switch OFF Off
Ignition switch
— On
ON
IGN SIG
Ignition switch
— Off
ACC
Ignition switch Selector lever in R position On

REV SIG
ON Selector lever in any position other than R Off
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JPNIA0009ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Keep pressing SOURCE
0V
switch.
Keep pressing switch. 0.7 V

Ignition
6 15
Steering switch signal A Input switch Keep pressing switch. 1.3 V
(P) (B)
ON
Keep pressing 2.0 V
switch.
Except for above. 3.3 V
Ignition
7
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(V)
ACC
9 Lighting switch is OFF. 0V

Ground Illumination signal Input OFF
(R) Lighting switch is ON. 12.0 V

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition B
15 Steering switch signal
Ground — switch — 0V
(B) Ground
ON
Keep pressing VOL DOWN C
0V
switch.
Ignition Keep pressing VOL UP
16 15 0.7 V
Steering switch signal B Input switch switch.
(L) (B) D
ON

E
Ignition
19
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(Y)
OFF
Ignition F
20
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
G
Ignition
22 21 Satellite radio sound signal When satellite radio mode
(B) (W) LH
Input switch
is selected.
H
ON
SKIB3609E I
Ignition
J
Input switch
(G) (R) RH is selected.
ON
K
SKIB3609E
25 — Shield — — — —
L
26 — Shield — — — —
Ignition Driver's Audio Stage ON 0V
27
Ground Mode change signal Output switch
(SB) Driver's Audio Stage OFF 8.5 V M
ON
AV
Ignition
28 Request signal When satellite radio mode
Ground Input switch
(W) (SAT→CONT) is selected.
ON
O
SKIA9299J
Ignition
29 Communication signal When satellite radio mode
Ground Input switch
(B) (SAT→CONT) is selected.
ON
SKIA9300J

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
Ground Output switch
(R) (CONT→SAT) is selected.
ON
SKIA9301J
33 — FM sub Input — — —
34 — AM–FM main Input — — —
Ignition
35 Ground Antenna amp. ON signal Output switch — 12.0 V
ACC
Ignition
36 At rear view camera or AUX
Ground Composite image signal Output switch
(SB) image is displayed.
ON
SKIB2251J
Ignition
37
Ground Composite image ground — switch — 0V
(V)
ON
Start confirmation/adjust-
ment mode, and then dis-
Ignition
38 play color bar by selecting
Ground RGB signal (B: blue) Output switch
(P) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2237J
Ignition
Ground RGB signal (G: green) Output switch
(L) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2236J
Ignition
Ground RGB signal (R: red) Output switch
(G) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2238J

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
41 C
Ground RGB synchronizing signal Output switch —
(W)
ON
SKIB3603E D
42 — Shield — — — —
At RGB image display 5.0 V
E
Ignition
43
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Output switch F
(B) At AUX image display
ON
G
PKIB4948J
H
Ignition
44 Communication signal When adjusting display
Ground Input switch
(BR) (DISP→CONT) brightness.
ON
I
PKIB5039J
Ignition
45 Horizontal synchronizing
Ground Input switch — K
(R) (HP) signal
ON
SKIB3601E L
Ignition
46
Ground Signal ground — switch — 0V
(LG)
ON M
Ignition
47
Ground Signal VCC Output switch — 9.0 V
(O)
ACC
AV
48
— Shield — — — —
(BR)
49
— Shield — — — — O
(Y)
50 — Shield — — — —
55 — Shield — — — — P

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
(Y) (CONT→DISP) brightness.
ON
PKIB5039J
Ignition
57 Vertical synchronizing (VP)
Ground Input switch —
(G) signal
ON
SKIB3598E
Ignition
58
Ground Inverter ground — switch — 0V
(BR)
ON
Ignition
59
Ground Inverter VCC Output switch — 9.0 V
(Y)
ACC
64 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
65 At rear view camera image
Ground Camera image signal Input switch
(W) display
ON
SKIB2251J
Ignition
66
Ground AUX image signal Input switch At AUX image display
(G)
ON
SKIB2251J
Connected to camera con-

Ignition 0V
68 Camera-connection recog- trol unit connector.
Ground — switch
(W) nition signal Not connected to camera
ON 5.0 V
control unit connector.
73 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
74
Ground AUX image signal ground — switch — 0V
(R)
ON

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition During voice guide output

80 79 C
TEL voice signal Input switch
(L) (P) with the switch pressed.
ON
SKIB3609E D
81 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
83 82 When iPod mode is select-
iPod sound signal RH Input switch
(BR) (Y) ed. F
ON
SKIB3609E
G
Ignition
85
(B)
ON
H
86 Input/
— CAN–H — — —
(L) Output
87 Input/
— CAN–L — — — I
(P) Output
88 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(LG) (H) Output
J
— — — —
(V) (L) Output
— — — —
(G) (H) Output K
91
AV communication signal Input/
(V)*1 — — — —
(L) Output
(R)*2 L
M
Ignition
95 97 When AUX mode is select-
AUX sound signal RH Input switch
(B) (W) ed.
ON
AV
SKIB3609E
Ignition
AUX sound signal LH Input switch
(R) (W) ed. P
ON
SKIB3609E

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
iPod sound signal LH Input switch
(R) (G) ed.
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
101
Ground Switch ground — switch — 0V
(BR)
ON
103 Pressing the eject switch. 0V

Ground Disk eject signal Input —
(SB) Except for above 3.3 V
Ignition
104
Ground Ignition signal Input switch — Battery voltage
(G)
ON
Ignition R position 12.0 V
105
Ground Reverse signal Input switch
(O) Other than R position 0V
ON
Parking brake ON 0V
Ignition
106
Ground Parking brake signal Input switch
(V) Parking brake OFF
ON
JSNIA0007GB
NOTE:
The maximum voltage varies de-
pending on the specification
(destination unit).
Ignition
107 Vehicle speed signal When vehicle speed is ap-
Ground Input switch
(R) (8-pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25 MPH)
ON
JSNIA0012GB
Ignition
108 114
Sound signal rear RH Output switch Audio output
(BR) (Y)
ON
SKIB3609E

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
109 115 C
Sound signal front RH Output switch Audio output
(R) (G)
ON
SKIB3609E D
Ignition
110
Ground Amp. ON signal Output switch — 10.0 V
(V)
ON E
111 — Shield — — — —
F
118 Ignition
112
(LG)*1 Sound signal rear LH Output switch Audio output
(V)
(SB)*2 ON G
SKIB3609E
H
Ignition
113 119 I
Sound signal front LH Output switch Audio output
(P) (L)
ON
J
SKIB3609E
NOTE:
*1: With hands-free phone
K
*2: Without hands-free phone
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION - INFOID:0000000003838630
L
NOTE:
AV

AV CONTROL UNIT
The name MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH indicates the integration of PRESET SWITCH and MULTIFUNCTION
SWITCH virtually.
JCNWM1015GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1016GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1017GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1018GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1019GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1020GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1021GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1022GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1023GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1024GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1025GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1026GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1027GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1028GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1029GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1030GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1031GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1032GB
P
DTC Index INFOID:0000000003838631

AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Display item Refer to

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] AV-48, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010] AV-49, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1310 CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] AV-50, "DTC Logic"
U1200 Control Unit FLASH-ROM [U1200] AV-51, "DTC Logic"
U1216 CAN CONT [U1216] AV-52, "DTC Logic"
U1243 FRONT DISP CONN [U1243] AV-53, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1250 CAMERA CONT. CONN [U1250] AV-55, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1255 SAT CONN [U1255] AV-56, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1300 • AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300]
AV-58, "Description"
U1240 • SWITCH CONN [U1240]
U1252 • REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252]
U1254 • IPOD CONN [U1254]
U1256 • HAND FREE CONN [U1256]
U1252 • REAR CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] AV-58, "Description"
U1254 • IPOD CONN [U1254]
U1256 • HAND FREE CONN [U1256]

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
JPNIA0006ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.) G
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
Ground Ground — switch — 0V H
(B)
ON
Ignition
2
Ground Inverter VCC Input switch — 9.0 V
(Y) I
ACC
Ignition
3
Ground Signal VCC Input switch — 9.0 V
(O) J
ACC
Ignition
4
Ground Composite image ground — switch — 0V
(V)
ON K
5
— Shield — — — —
(Y)
L
Ignition
Ground RGB signal (G: green) Input switch M
(L) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2236J AV
7 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
Ground Output switch —
(R) (HP) signal P
ON
SKIB3601E

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
9
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Input switch
(B) At AUX image display
ON
PKIB4948J
Ignition
Ground Input switch
(Y) (CONT→DISP) brightness.
ON
PKIB5039J
Ignition
13
Ground Inverter ground — switch — 0V
(BR)
ON
Ignition
14
Ground Signal ground — switch — 0V
(LG)
ON
Ignition
15
Ground Composite image signal Input switch At AUX image display
(SB)
ON
SKIB2251J
16
— Shield — — — —
(BR)
Ignition
Ground RGB signal (R: red) Input switch
(G) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2238J
Ignition
Ground RGB signal (B: blue) Input switch
(P) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2237J

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
19 C
Ground RGB synchronizing signal Input switch —
(W)
ON
SKIB3603E D
E
Ignition
(G) signal
On
F
SKIB3598E
21 — Shield — — — —
G
Ignition H
(BR) (DISP→CONT) brightness.
ON
I
PKIB5039J
23 — Shield — — — —
J
NOTE:
K
AV

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
SWITCH virtually.
JCNWM1015GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1016GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1017GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1018GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1019GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1020GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1021GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1022GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1023GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1024GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1025GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1026GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1027GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1028GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1029GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1030GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1031GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1032GB

BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP.
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JSNIA1223ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1 10 Sound signal rear door
Output switch Audio output
(Y) (G) speaker LH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(SB) (V) speaker RH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
4 5 Sound signal front door
(L) (P) speaker LH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
6 7 Sound signal front squawk-
(O) (W) er LH
ON
SKIB3609E

BOSE AMP.
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
8 13 Sound signal front door C
(LG) (Y) speaker RH
ON
SKIB3609E D
E
Ignition
9 14 Sound signal woofer and
(G) (R) rear squawker (LH and RH)
ON
F
SKIB3609E
Ignition
11 G
(GR)
OFF
Ignition
12 H
(B)
ON
I
Ignition
15 28 Sound signal center speak-
(Y) (G) er
ON J
SKIB3609E
Ignition Driver's Audio Stage ON 0V K

17
Ground Mode change signal Input switch
(O) Driver's Audio Stage OFF 8.5 V
ON
L
Ignition
18 32
(P) (L)
Sound signal front LH Input switch Audio output M
ON
SKIB3609E AV
Ignition O
19 20
Sound signal front RH Input switch Audio output
(R) (G)
ON
P
SKIB3609E

BOSE AMP.
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
21 22
Sound signal rear LH Input switch Audio output
(V) (SB)
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
23 33
Sound signal rear RH Input switch Audio output
(BR) (Y)
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
25
Ground Woofer amp. ON signal Output switch — 12.0 V
(L)
ACC
Ignition
(V) (LG) er RH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
31
Ground Amp. ON signal Input switch — 12.0 V
(GR)
ACC
NOTE:

BOSE AMP.
SWITCH virtually. A
AV
JCNWM1015GB P

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1016GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1017GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1018GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1019GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1020GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1021GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1022GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1023GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1024GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1025GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1026GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1027GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1028GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1029GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1030GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1031GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1032GB

IPOD ADAPTER
IPOD ADAPTER
A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
JSNIA0618ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.) G
+ – Signal name
Output
H
Ignition
iPod sound signal LH Output switch
(R) (G) ed.
ON I
SKIB3609E
Ignition
2 14 When iPod mode is select- K
iPod sound signal RH Output switch
(BR) (Y) ed.
ON
SKIB3609E
L
Ignition
3
(O)
ACC M
— — — —
(V) (L) Output
Ignition AV
5
(Y)
OFF
Ignition O
8
(W)
Ground iPod battery charge Output switch Connected to iPod® 12.0 V
ON

IPOD ADAPTER
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Communication signal Ignition The wave pattern is dis-

9
Ground Output switch played just after iPod con-
(Y) (iPod adapter→iPod®) ON nection.
JPNIA0462GB
NOTE:
After the wave pattern display,
the value continues Approx 3.3 V
Communication signal Ignition

10
Ground ® Input switch Connected to iPod®
(BR) (iPod →iPod adapter) ON
JPNIA0462GB
Ignition
11
(L)
Ground ACCESSORY-IDENTIFY — switch Connected to iPod® 0V
ON
Ignition
(R) (W) ed.
ON
SKIB3609E
15 — Shield — — — —
— — — —
(LG) (H) Output
Ignition
17
(B)
ON
19 — Shield — — — —
Ignition Not connected to iPod® 4.0 V
21 iPod connection recogni-
Ground Input switch
(SB) tion signal
ON Connected to iPod® 0V
Ignition
22
(W)
Ground ACCESSORY-DETECT — switch Connected to iPod® 0V
ON
Ignition
(B) (W) ed.
ON
SKIB3609E

IPOD ADAPTER
A
NOTE:
SWITCH virtually. B
AV
JCNWM1015GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1016GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1017GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1018GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1019GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1020GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1021GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1022GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1023GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1024GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1025GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1026GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1027GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1028GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1029GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1030GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1031GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1032GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
JPNIA0007ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.) G
+ – Signal name
Output
5 — Shield — — — —
H
Ignition
6 At rear view camera image I
(W) display
ON
SKIB2251J
J
Ignition
7
Ground Camera ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON K
8
Ground Camera power supply Output switch
(R) Other than R position 0V
ON L
11 — Shield — — — —
M
Ignition
Ground Camera image signal Output switch
(W) display
ON AV
SKIB2251J
Connected to camera con- O

Ignition 0V
14 Camera connection recog- trol unit connector
Ground — switch
(R) nition signal Not connected to camera
ON 5.0 V
control unit connector P
— — — —
(P) (L) Output
— — — —
(L) (H) Output
— — — —
(B) (L) Output

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
— — — —
(W) (H) Output
22
ON
NOTE:
(destination unit).
Ignition
Ground Input switch
(G) (8-pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25 MPH)
ON
JSNIA0012GB
Ignition
30
(B)
ACC
Ignition
31
(B)
ON
Ignition
32
(SB)
OFF
NOTE:

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
SWITCH virtually. A
AV
JCNWM1015GB P

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1016GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1017GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1018GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1019GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1020GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1021GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1022GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1023GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1024GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1025GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1026GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1027GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1028GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1029GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1030GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1031GB

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1032GB

A
JSNIA1449ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal Description
Reference value
Input/ Condition
+ – Signal name (Approx.)
Output G
H
Ignition
Output switch
(R) (G) LH is selected.
ON
I
SKIB3609E
Ignition
Output switch
(B) (W) RH is selected. K
ON
SKIB3609E
L
5 — Shield — — — —
6 — Shield — — — —
M
Ignition
8 Request signal When satellite radio mode
(W)
Ground
(SAT→CONT)
Output switch
is selected.
AV
ON
SKIA9299J O
Ignition P
(B) (SAT→CONT) is selected.
ON
SKIA9300J

Terminal Description
Reference value
Input/ Condition
+ – Signal name (Approx.)
Output
Ignition
Ground Input switch
(R) (CONT→SAT) is selected.
ON
SKIA9301J
Ignition
12
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
16
(V)
ACC
33 — Satellite antenna Input — — —
NOTE:

SWITCH virtually. A
AV
JCNWM1015GB P

JCNWM1016GB

AV
JCNWM1017GB

JCNWM1018GB

AV
JCNWM1019GB

JCNWM1020GB

AV
JCNWM1021GB

JCNWM1022GB

AV
JCNWM1023GB

JCNWM1024GB

AV
JCNWM1025GB

JCNWM1026GB

AV
JCNWM1027GB

JCNWM1028GB

AV
JCNWM1029GB

JCNWM1030GB

AV
JCNWM1031GB

JCNWM1032GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
TEL ADAPTER UNIT
A
JPNIA0011ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.) G
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage H
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
2
(LG) I
ACC
Ignition
3
(W) J
ON
Ignition
4
(B)
ON K
Ignition
L
7
8 Microphone signal Input switch Give a voice
(L)
ON
M
PKIB5037J
Ignition
8 Ground Microphone ground — switch — 0V AV
ON
O
Ignition During voice guide output
9 10
TEL voice signal Output switch with the switch
(L) (P)
ON pressed. P
SKIB3609E
Ignition
20
Ground Control signal — switch — 0V
(B)
ON

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
23
(B)
ON
Ignition
24
(B)
ON
NOTE:
(destination unit).
Ignition
Ground Input switch
(P) (8-pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25MPH)
ON
JSNIA0012GB
Ignition
29
8 Microphone VCC Output switch — 5.0 V
(P)
ON
33 — TEL antenna Input — — —
34 — Shield — — — —
— — — —
(L) (H) Output
— — — —
(P) (L) Output
NOTE:

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
SWITCH virtually. A
AV
JCNWM1015GB P

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1016GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1017GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1018GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1019GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1020GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1021GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1022GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1023GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1024GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1025GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1026GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1027GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1028GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1029GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1030GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
AV
JCNWM1031GB

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
JCNWM1032GB

MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000003838644
B
OPERATION
C
Symptoms Check items Possible malfunction location / Action to take
• Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuit.
• All switches cannot be operated.
• AV communication circuit between AV control unit and
• “MULTI AV” is displayed on system D
selection screen when the CON-
Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
SULT-III is started.
Refer to AV-43, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
• All switches cannot be operated. E
Multifunction switch and preset AV control unit power supply and ground circuit malfunc-
• “MULTI AV” is not displayed on sys-
switch operation does not work. tion. Refer to AV-59, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis
tem selection screen when the CON-
Procedure".
F
Multifunction switch or preset switch malfunction. Per-
Only specified switch cannot be operat- form multifunction switch and preset switch self-diagno-
ed. sis function. Refer to AV-60, "MULTIFUNCTION
SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure". G
RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE

Basic Inspection H
™
• Check that the cellular phone is corresponding type (Bluetooth correspond) when the hands-free related
malfunction vehicle is in service before performing a diagnosis.
• There is a case that malfunction occurs due to the version change of the phone type, etc. even though it is a I
corresponding type. Therefore, confirm it by changing the cellular phone to another corresponding type
phone, and check that it operates normally. It is necessary to distinguish whether the cause is the vehicle or
cellular phone. J
Simple check for Bluetooth™ communication
• If cellular phone and AV control unit cannot be connected with Bluetooth™ communication, following proce-
dure allows the technician to judge which device has malfunction. K
1. Turn on a cellular phone, not connecting Bluetooth™ communication.
2. Start CONSULT-III, then start Windows®. L
3. Set CONSULT-III near a cellular phone.
4. When operated Bluetooth™ registration by cellular phone, check
if CONSULT-III* would be displayed on the device name. M
(If other Bluetooth™ device is located near cellular phone, a
name of the device would be displayed also.)
NOTE: AV
*:Displayed device name is “NISSAN- ”.
• If no device name is displayed, cellular phone is malfunctioning.
Repair the cellular phone first, then perform diagnosis. O
• If CONSULT-III is displayed on device name, cellular phone is nor-
mal. Perform diagnosis as per the following table. JPNIA0441GB
On board self-diagnosis of hands-free phone system P

Always perform the on board self-diagnosis at first after completing the basic inspection when the malfunction
is detected on the hands-free phone system. Narrow down possible causes using the Diagnosis Chart if there
is no malfunction in the on board self-diagnosis.
Trouble diagnosis chart by symptom

Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location

Does not recognize cellular
phone connection. (No connec- TEL adapter unit malfunction.
Repeat the registration of cellular phone.
tion is displayed on the display Refer to AV-271, "Exploded View".
at the guide.)
• Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
• No malfunction.
Hands-free phone cannot be Both the reception and the speech cannot
TEL adapter unit malfunction.
established. be performed.
Refer to AV-271, "Exploded View".
• Malfunction is detected.
The operation of the “ ” switch can TEL voice signal circuit malfunction between TEL adapt-
The other party's voice cannot be performed. er unit and AV control unit.
be heard by hands-free phone. Control signal circuit.
The operation of the “ ” switch can-
not be performed. Refer to AV-81, "Diagnosis Procedure".
TEL adapter unit.

Originating sound is not heard Sound operation function is normal.
by the other party with hands-
free phone communication. Microphone signal circuit.
Sound operation function does not work.
RELATED TO RGB IMAGE

There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
self-diagnosis result. Refer to AV-43, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
• Front display unit power supply and ground circuit.
RGB image is not shown. Refer to AV-59, "FRONT DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis
There is no malfunction in CONSULT-III
Procedure".
self-diagnosis results.
• Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit.
RGB signal (R: red) circuit.
Light blue (Cyan) tint.
Color of RGB image is not RGB signal (G: green) circuit.
Purple (Magenta) tint.
proper. Refer to AV-66, "Diagnosis Procedure".
RGB signal (B: blue) circuit.
Screen looks yellowish.
RGB synchronizing signal circuit.
RGB screen is rolling. —
Fuel economy display is mal-
functioning. Ignition signal circuit malfunction.
There is no malfunction in CONSULT-III
Refer to AV-59, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Proce-
self-diagnosis results.
dure".
RELATED TO AUDIO
Disk eject signal circuit.
The CD cannot be removed. —

A
• BOSE amp. power supply and ground circuit.
No sound from all speakers. Refer to AV-61, "BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure".
• Amp. ON signal circuit
• Woofer power supply and ground circuit. B
• Sound signal woofer circuit between BOSE amp. and
Audio sound is not heard. Sound is not heard from woofer. woofer.
• Woofer ON signal circuit between BOSE amp. and
woofer.
C
Sound is not heard from center speaker. Sound signal center speaker circuit.
Sound is heard only from specific places D
Sound signal circuit of malfunctioning system.
(RH front, RH rear, LH front and LH rear).
It does not change to “Driver's Mode change signal circuit.
—
Audio Stage” mode. Refer to AV-82, "Diagnosis Procedure".
E
Perform the following inspection procedure.
1. Check satellite radio antenna mounting nut for
looseness.
“ANTENNA” is not displayed even when
NOTE: F
Tightening torque: 6.5 N·m (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb.)
the channel is turned to 0 in Satellite ra-
2. Visually check for satellite radio antenna feeder.
dio mode.
3. Replace the satellite radio antenna.
Refer to AV-261, "Exploded View". G
4. Replace the satellite radio tuner.
Satellite radio is not received.
Perform the following inspection procedure. H
1. Check the connection between satellite radio tuner
and antenna feeder.
2. Check the connection between satellite radio anten-
“ANTENNA” is displayed when the chan- na and antenna feeder. I
nel is turned to 0 in Satellite radio mode. 3. Check Antenna feeder for open circuit.
4. Replace the satellite radio antenna.
5. Replace the satellite radio tuner. J
The sound of Satellite radio is Satellite radio sound signal circuit between AV control unit
Other audio sounds are normal.
not heard. and satellite radio tuner. K
It does not change to Satellite There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
radio mode. self-diagnosis result. Refer to AV-43, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
• Antenna amp. ON signal circuit. L
AM/FM radio is not received. Other audio sounds are normal.
• Antenna feeder.
RELATED TO iPod® M
Connect another iPod® and check if the symptom is reproduced or not. If the symptom is reproduced, diag-
nose the vehicle. If no malfunction is detected, replace the iPod harness. AV
NOTE:
It is unable to check that between iPod® and iPod harness.
O
• iPod sound signal circuit between AV control unit and
The sound of iPod® is not iPod adapter. P
heard. • iPod sound signal circuit between iPod® and iPod
adapter.
It does not change to iPod There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
mode. self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-43, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
“iPod is not connected” is dis-
iPod connection recognition signal circuit between iPod®
played when it comes to iPod Connected to iPod®.
mode. and iPod adapter.

iPod® cannot charge the bat- — iPod battery charge circuit between iPod® and iPod
tery. adapter.
The title of music file in the iP-
od® is not indicated.
— Communication circuit between iPod® and iPod adapter.
Accessing the iPod® is unavail-
able from the vehicle.
RELATED TO STEERING SWITCH

Symptoms Probable malfunction location
Steering switch signal GND circuit.
None of the steering switch operations work.
Only specified switch cannot be operated. Steering switch.
“SOURCE”, “MENU UP”, “MENU DOWN”, “ ” switches Steering switch signal A circuit.
of steering switch are not operated. Refer to AV-86, "Diagnosis Procedure".
”VOL UP“, “VOL DOWN”, “ ” switches of steering switch Steering switch signal B circuit.
are not operated. Refer to AV-88, "Diagnosis Procedure".
RELATED TO AUX
NOTE:
Check that there is no malfunction of AUX equipment main body before performing a diagnosis.
No voice sound is heard when Voice sound is heard when other modes AUX sound signal circuits malfunction between auxiliary
AUX mode is selected. are selected. input jacks and AV control unit.
• AUX image signal circuit malfunction between auxilia-
ry input jacks and AV control unit.
• Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal circuit malfunc-
tion between AV control unit and front display unit.
—
• Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit malfunction
between AV control unit and front display unit.
• RGB area (YS) signal circuit malfunction between AV
control unit and front display unit.
Image is not displayed when
AUX mode is selected. AUX image signal circuit malfunction between auxiliary
Camera image is normal (with rear view
input jacks and AV control unit.
monitor)
Camera image is not displayed. (with rear
view monitor)
• RGB area (YS) signal circuit malfunction between AV
It does not change from AUX Refer to AV-71, "Diagnosis Procedure".
—
mode to other modes. • Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal circuit malfunc-
RELATED TO REAR VIEW MONITOR

A
tion between AV control unit and front display unit. B
Camera image is not displayed
(displayed in black and nothing AUX image is not displayed.
can be displayed)
Refer to AV-71, "Diagnosis Procedure". C
• Camera image signal circuit between camera control
Camera image is not shown. unit and rear view camera.
—
(Guiding line is displayed.) • Rear view camera power supply circuit. D
There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III Perform detected DTC self-diagnosis.
E
Camera image signal circuit malfunction between cam-
AUX image is normal. era control unit and AV control unit.
Camera image is not displayed. Refer to AV-77, "Diagnosis Procedure".
(Only warning message under F
RGB area (YS) signal circuit malfunction between AV
area is displayed.) AUX image is not displayed. control unit and display unit.
Select “Camera Cont.” of “Confirmation/ G
Adjustment” mode, Reverse Sensor is not Reverse signal circuit (camera control unit).
turned ON at “Connection Confirmation”.
Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit malfunction be- H
Camera image is rolling. AUX image is also rolling. tween AV control unit and front display unit.
Malfunction of self-diagnosis result is indi- Camera connection recognition signal circuit I
cated. Refer to AV-43, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
Camera image does not switch.
Malfunction of self-diagnosis result is not
Reverse signal circuit (AV control unit).
indicated.
J
The predicted course line dis- There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III Perform detected DTC self-diagnosis.
play is malfunctioning. self-diagnosis result. Refer to AV-43, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
AV

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
Vehicle operation information, refer to Owner's Manual.

BASIC OPERATIONS
Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The brightness is at the lowest setting. Adjust the brightness of the display.
No image is displayed. The system is in the video mode. Press <DISC> to change the mode.
The display is turned off. Press <Day/Night> to turn on the display.
The screen is too dim. The move- Wait until the interior of the vehicle has
The temperature in the interior of the vehicle is low.
ment is slow. warmed up.
Some pixels in the display are dark- This condition is an inherent characteristic of liquid
This is not a malfunction.
er or brighter than others. crystal displays.
Some menu items cannot be se- Some menu items become unavailable while the ve- Park the vehicle in a safe location, and
lected. hicle is driven. then operate the multi AV system.
RELATED TO VOICE RECOGNITION

Related to telephone
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try
the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is
resolves.
Symptom Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at level appropriate to the ambient noise lev-
el in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster
System fails to interpret the com- on).
mand correctly. NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be
carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA)
mode” earlier in this section. Refer to “OWNER’S MANUAL”.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This
The system consistently selects can be confirmed by using the “List Names” command.
the wrong voicetag
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
RELATED TO AUDIO
• The majority of the audio malfunctions are the result of outside causes (bad CD/cassette, electromagnetic
interference, etc.). Check the symptoms below to diagnose the malfunction.
• The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and oper-
ation of each piece of electrical equipment, and then determine the cause.
NOTE:
• CD-R is not guaranteed to play because they can contain compressed audio (MP3, WMA) or could be incor-
rectly mastered by the customer on a computer.
• Check if the CDs carry the Compact Disc Logo. If not, the disc is not mastered to the “red book” Compact
Disc Standard and may not play.

Symptom Cause and Counter measure A

Check if the CD was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone
B
(about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal
temperature. C
Cannot play If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music
CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3”, or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, D
the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in com-
pliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format, This may occur depending on the E
variation or the setting of MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the CD is protected by copyright. F
Poor sound quality Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.
It takes a relatively long time before If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD, or if it is a multi session disc, some
the music starts playing. time may be required before the music starts playing. G
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing
Music cuts off or skips
depth, writing width might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
H
Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities if data such as for high bit rate data.
Move immediately to the next song When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3”, or “.wma”,
when playing or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song.
I
The songs do not play back in the The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the software, so the files might
desired order. not play in the desired order.
Noise resulting from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or external noise from trains and other
sources, is not a malfunction.
J
NOTE:
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to mountains or buildings blocking
the signal. K
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from a time difference between the broadcast waves directly from the station arriving at the
antenna and the waves reflected by mountains or buildings.
L
AV

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000004024552
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s)
with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly
causing serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000003838647
AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less.
• Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before
checking the circuit.
Precaution for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000003838648
• Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]
PKIA0306E

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
• Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of A
twisted line will be lost.)
PKIA0307E
AV

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000003838649
Tool name Description
Power tool Loosening screws
PBIC0191E

AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

AV CONTROL UNIT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000003928822
B
REMOVAL
C
JSNIA1483ZZ
F
1: AV control unit
DISASSEMBLY G
JSNIA1484ZZ
1. Unified meter and A/C amp. 2. Bracket LH 3. AV control unit M

4. Bracket RH
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003928823 AV
REMOVAL
1. Remove front display unit. Refer to AV-252, "Removal and Installation". O
2. Remove AV control unit with a unified meter and A/C amp. as a single unit from the body.
3. Remove bracket screws, and then remove AV control unit.
P
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Since AV control unit connector and unified meter and A/C amp. connector have the same form, be
careful not to insert them wrongly.

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
REMOVAL
JSNIA1451ZZ
1. Front display unit
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA1538ZZ
1. Bracket
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003928825
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove front display unit mounting screws.
3. Disconnect connector, and remove front display unit.
INSTALLATION

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
D
JSNIA1456ZZ
E
1. Front door speaker

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-11, "Removal and Installation". G
2. Remove front door speaker mounting bolts.
3. Disconnect connector and remove front door speaker.
INSTALLATION H
AV

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
JSNIA1457ZZ
1. Rear door speaker
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove rear door speaker mounting bolts.
3. Disconnect connector and remove rear door speaker.
INSTALLATION

FRONT SQUAWKER
FRONT SQUAWKER
A
D
JSNIA1458ZZ
E
1. Front squawker

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove speaker grille. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation". G
2. Remove front squawker mounting screws.
3. Disconnect connector and remove front squawker.
INSTALLATION H
AV

REAR SQUAWKER
REAR SQUAWKER
JSNIA1459ZZ
1. Rear squawker
REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage side finisher upper. Refer to INT-28, "Exploded View".
2. Remove rear squawker mounting screws.
3. Remove rear squawker.
INSTALLATION

CENTER SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
A
D
JSNIA1460ZZ
E
1. Center speaker

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove center speaker grille. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". G
2. Remove center speaker mounting screws, lift up the center speaker and disconnect connector.
3. Remove center speaker.
INSTALLATION H
AV

WOOFER
WOOFER
JSNIA1461ZZ
1. Woofer clamp
2. Woofer
REMOVAL
1. Pull up luggage finisher cover and hang the strap to upper body.
2. Remove woofer clamp.
3. Remove harness clip and connector.
4. Remove woofer.
INSTALLATION

BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP.
A
REMOVAL B
JSNIA1462ZZ E
1. BOSE amp.
DISASSEMBLY F
I
JSNIA1539ZZ
1. BOSE amp.
2. Bracket J
K
REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage floor spacer (LH). Refer to INT-28, "Exploded View".
2. Remove BOSE amp. mounting nuts. L
3. Disconnect connector and remove BOSE amp.
INSTALLATION M
AV

JPNIA0495ZZ
1. TEL adapter unit 2. Bracket (front) 3. Satellite radio tuner

4. Bracket (rear)
REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage floor spacer (RH). Refer to INT-28, "Exploded View".
2. Remove nuts, and then satellite radio tuner connector and TEL adapter unit connector.
3. Remove satellite radio tuner (1) with TEL adapter unit (2) as a
single unit from the body.
JSNIA1489ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

ANTENNA BASE
ANTENNA BASE
A
D
JSNIA1463ZZ
E
1. Antenna rod
2. Antenna base
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. F
G
REMOVAL
1. Remove headlining (rear). Keep a service area. Refer to INT-23, "Exploded View".
2. Remove antenna base mounting nut. H
3. Disconnect connector and remove antenna base.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal. I
Antenna base mounting nut : 6.5 N·m (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb)

J
CAUTION:
Be careful about tightening torque. Antenna sensitivity becomes poor, and when it is excessive, roof
panel may be deformed, when roof antenna mounting nut tightening torque is loose.
K
AV

REMOVAL
Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA1486ZZ
1. Cluster lid D
2. Multifunction switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
2. Remove multifunction switch mounting screws.
3. Disconnect connector and remove multifunction switch.
INSTALLATION

PRESET SWITCH
PRESET SWITCH
A
REMOVAL B
DISASSEMBLY
C
H
JSNIA1487ZZ
1. Clock 2. Cluster lid C 3. Preset switch I
J
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
2. Remove preset switch mounting screws. K
3. Remove preset switch.
1. Clock L
2. Preset switch
A. Screw
B. Screw M
C. Screw
AV
JSNIA1488ZZ
INSTALLATION
O
NOTE:
When installing preset switch, do not allow the print wire that connects preset switch and multifunction switch
to get caught in between AV control unit and preset switch. P

IPOD ADAPTER
IPOD ADAPTER
JSNIA1465ZZ
1. iPod adapter
REMOVAL
1. Remove front display unit with bracket. Refer to AV-252, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove front display from display bracket.
3. Remove iPod adapter mounting screws.
4. Disconnect connector and remove iPod adapter.
INSTALLATION

IPOD CONNECTOR
IPOD CONNECTOR
A
D
JSNIA1466ZZ
E
1. iPod connector

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove console box assembly. Refer to IP-22, "Exploded View". G
2. Press pawl from the back of console finisher to remove iPod connector.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. H
AV

AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
JSNIA1467ZZ
1. Auxiliary input jacks
REMOVAL
1. Remove console box assembly. Refer to IP-22, "Exploded View".
2. Remove auxiliary mounting screws.
3. Disconnect connector and remove auxiliary input jacks.
INSTALLATION

MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
A
REMOVAL B
Refer to INT-23, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY
C
JSNIA0132ZZ
F
1. Microphone
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003928853 G
REMOVAL
1. Remove map lamp assembly. Refer to INT-23, "Exploded View". H
2. Remove microphone (1), stretching pawls of map lamp assem-
bly.
I
K
JSNIA0132ZZ
INSTALLATION L
AV

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JPNIA0883ZZ
1. Camera control unit
REMOVAL
1. Remove front seat (LH side). Refer to SE-70, "Exploded View".
2. Remove floor carpet. Keep a service area.
3. Remove camera control unit mounting screws.
4. Disconnect connector and remove camera control unit.
INSTALLATION
1. Installation is the reverse order of removal.
2. Perform predicted course line center position adjustment. Refer to AV-16, "REAR VIEW MONITOR POS-
SIBLE ROUTE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Requirement".

REAR VIEW CAMERA
REAR VIEW CAMERA
A
JSNIA1470ZZ F
1. Rear view camera

G
REMOVAL
H
1. Remove back door outside finisher upper. Refer to EXT-49, "Exploded View".
2. Remove door handle cover. Refer to EXT-49, "Exploded View".
3. Remove rear view camera mounting screws and rear view camera harness connector. I
4. Remove rear view camera.
INSTALLATION
J
2. Adjust the guide line position if the guide line position is shifted after installing the rear view camera. Refer
to AV-270, "Adjustment".
K
AV

REAR VIEW CAMERA
Adjustment INFOID:0000000003959279
1. Draw lines on rearward area of the vehicle passing through the

following points: 250 mm (9.84 in) from both sides of the vehicle,
and 0.5 m (1.64 ft), 1.0 m (3.28 ft) from the rear end of the
bumper.
2. Set into “Adjust offset of rear view camera” mode of Confirma-
tion/Adjustment mode.
JPNIA0967GB
3. Rotate the center dial, and then select the guiding line pattern so
that its angle is aligned with the correction line of the rear of the
vehicle.
Selected pattern :7
4. Fine adjust the guiding line so that its position is aligned to the
correction line by pressing the up/down/left/right switches.
Pressing “ENTER” enable the camera control unit to memory
the adjusted guiding line position.
SKIB3689E
Up/Down adjustment range : −20 – 20
Left/Right adjustment range : −20 – 20
CAUTION:
Never operate other function such as pressing BACK while writing index data.
If Confirmation/Adjustment mode does not function in the above procedure, perform one of the
following service to adjust the index again.
• Remove battery for five min. Then reconnect battery.
• Remove camera control unit connector for five min. Then reconnect camera control unit connec-
tor.

TEL ADAPTER UNIT
TEL ADAPTER UNIT
A
G
JPNIA0495ZZ
1. TEL adapter unit 2. Bracket (front) 3. Satellite radio tuner

4. Bracket (rear)
H
I
REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage floor spacer (RH). Refer to INT-28, "Exploded View".
2. Remove nuts, and then remove TEL adapter unit connector and satellite radio tuner connector. J
3. Remove TEL adapter unit (1) with satellite radio tuner (2) as a
single unit from the body.
K
M
JSNIA1485ZZ
INSTALLATION AV

REMOVAL
Refer to SR-8, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA1480ZZ
1. Spiral cable
2. Steering angle sensor
REMOVAL
1. Remove spiral cable. Refer toSR-8, "Exploded View".
2. Remove steering angle sensor mounting screws.
3. Remove steering angle sensor.
INSTALLATION

ANTENNA FEEDER
ANTENNA FEEDER
A
Harness Layout INFOID:0000000003928860
AV
P
JSNIA1490GB

< BASIC INSPECTION > [NAVIGATION (SINGLE MONITOR)]
BASIC INSPECTION
Work Flow (Multi AV) INFOID:0000000003940609
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JSNIA0732GB

DETAILED FLOW
tion occurred).
YES >> GO TO 2.
tion (MULTI AV)". A
NOTE:
B
Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
C
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC Index. Refer to AV-442, "DTC Index". D
>> GO TO 5.
E
Table". F
>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR G
NOTE: H
3. Check that the symptom does not occur. I
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO >> INSPECTION END J
AV

Work Flow (Sonar) INFOID:0000000003940610
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JSNIA0732GB
• Reference 1··· Refer to AV-337, "CONSULT-III Function (SONAR)".

DETAILED FLOW
tion occurred).
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Connect CONSULT-III and perform a self-diagnosis for “SONAR”. Refer to AV-337, "CONSULT-III Func-
tion (SONAR)".
NOTE:
Skip to step 4 of the diagnosis procedure if “SONAR” is not displayed.

Is DTC displayed? A
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC B

2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC Index. Refer to AV-564, "DTC Index".
C
>> GO TO 5.
4.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS D
Table".
E
>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR F
2. Perform a self-diagnosis for “SONAR” with CONSULT-III.
NOTE: G
3. Check that the symptom does not occur.
H
YES >> GO TO 1.
I
AV

nal.

>> Refer to AV-278, "PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Special
Repair Requirement".
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description
INFOID:0000000003826536
When around view monitor control unit is replaced, the center position of predicted course line shall be cor-
rected.

Repair Requirement".
PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT
PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description
INFOID:0000000003826538
Adjust the center position of the predicted course line of the around view monitor if it is shifted.
PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair
Requirement INFOID:0000000003826539
1.STEERING OPERATION
Steer the steering wheel to the leftmost and rightmost ends.
>> GO TO 2.
2.DRIVING
>> END
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR)

CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Description
INFOID:0000000003826540 A
• Perform the calibration and perform the writing to the around view monitor control unit when removing and
replacing each camera, removing the camera mounting parts (front grille, door mirror, etc.) and replacing the
around view monitor control unit. B
• Align the white lines on the road near the vehicle at the boundary of each camera image by this camera cal-
ibration. The white lines far from the vehicle may not be aligned at the boundary of each camera image. The
farther the line, the greater the difference is. C
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Special Repair Re-
D
Calibration flowchart
Following the flowchart shown in the figure, perform the calibration.
E
L
JSNIA1342GB
NOTE:
In the un-match display, the un-match camera position is indicated
M
as “ ” on the birds-eye view.
AV
JSNIA1052GB
P
Calibration procedure
1.AROUND VIEW MONITOR SCREEN CONFIRMATION

Check that there is the un-match display in any camera.
Is the un-match display visible?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4.
JSNIA1052GB
2.CHECK THAT AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT IS REPLACED

Check that the around view monitor control unit is replaced.
Is the around view monitor control unit replaced?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 5.
3.RELEASE UN-MATCH DISPLAY (PERFORM ONLY WHEN THE AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL
UNIT IS REPLACED)
1. Select “Camera Cont.” of Confirmation/ Adjustment mode, and then set to “Calibrating Camera Image”
mode.
2. Press the“ENTER” switch of the multifunction switch on each
screen of “Rear Camera”, “Front Camera”, “Dr-Side Camera”,
“Pass-Side Camera”.
CAUTION:
• Do never operate the center dial and up/down/left/right
switches. Only press the “ENTER” switch.
• Never perform “Initialize Camera Image Calibration”.
3. Display the around view monitor screen, and check that there is
no malfunction such as a difference between each camera
image.
Is there a malfunction? JSNIA1053GB
YES >> Calibration end

NO >> GO TO 1.
4.PERFORM SIMPLIFIED CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT BY “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW”
1. Put target line 1 on the ground beside each axle using packing tape, etc.
2. Put target lines 2 equal to the vehicle total length + approximately 1.0 m (39.3 in) from the vehicle side
(right and left) at approximately 30 cm (11.8 in) away from the vehicle (make the line as parallel with the
vehicle as possible).
Preparation of simplified target line
JSNIA0927ZZ

1. Target lines 1 2. Target lines 2 A

A. Approx. 30 cm (11.8in) B. Approx. 1.0 m (39.3 in)
3. Select “Camera Cont.” of Confirmation/ Adjustment mode, and then set to “Fine Tuning of Birds-Eye View-
mode. B
4. Select left and right cameras by pressing the “CAMERA” switch, and perform the following confirmation.
- Check that target line 1 is aligned with the marker on the screen. Overlap the line aligned to the marker
with the upper/lower switches if necessary. C
- Check if there is a difference between target lines 2 between cameras. Adjust target lines 2 to be straight
lines by operating the center dial and left/right switches if necessary.
CAUTION:
• Never adjust the front camera and rear camera. Only adjust the right and left cameras. D
• Operate the center dial slowly because the changing of the screen takes approximately 1 sec-
ond.
Simplified target line adjustment method E
JSNIA0929ZZ
J
1. Target lines 1 2. Target lines 2 3. Marker for target line 1
Crosshairs cursor (mark indicated
4. Boundary between cameras 5.
the selected camera)
K
Adjustment method for target lines 1 Adjustment method for target lines 2
A. B.
(right) (right)
5. Adjust left and right cameras. Check that the difference between target line 1 and the marker on the L
screen, and between target lines 2 is solved.
NOTE:
• It can be initialized to the NISSAN factory default condition with “Initialize Camera Image Calibration” of
“Calibrating Camera Image”. M
• The adjustment value is cancelled on this mode by performing “Initialize Camera Image Calibration”.
Is the difference corrected?
AV
YES >> Finish the writing to around view monitor control unit by pressing “ENTER” switch.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE” O
Preparation of target line
1. Hang a string with a weight as shown in the figure. Put the points FM0, RM0 (mark) on the ground at the
center of the vehicle front end and rear end with white packing tape or a pen.
P
2. Route the vinyl string under the vehicle, and then pull and fix it on the point approximately 1.0 m (39.9 in)
to the front and rear of the vehicle through the points FM0 and RM0 using packing tape.

Target line preparation procedure 1
JSNIA1509ZZ
1. Thread 2. Weight 3. Point FM0 (mark)

4. Point RM0 (mark) 5. Packing tape (to fix the vinyl string) 6. Vinyl string
3. Put the points FM and RM (mark) 75 cm (29.5 in) from the points FM0 and RM0 individually.
4. Route the vinyl string through the points FM and RM using a triangle scale, and then fix it at approximately
1.5 m (59 in) on both sides with packing tape.
5. Put the points FL, FR, RL, and RR (mark) to both right and left [vehicle width / 2 + 30 cm (11.8 in)] from the
points FM and RM.
JSNIA0921ZZ
1. Point FM 2. Point RM 3. Triangle scale

4. Point FL (mark) 5. Point FR (mark) 6. Point RL (mark)
7. Point RR (mark)
30 cm (11.8 in)
A. 75 cm (29.5 in) B. Approx. 1.5 m (59 in) C. [Vehicle width/ 2 + 30 cm (11.8 in)
from the points FM and RM]
6. Draw the lines of the points FL – RL and FR – RR with vinyl string, and fix it with packing tape.
7. Put a mark on the center of each axle, draw vertical lines to the lines of the points FL – RL and FR – RR
from the marks on the center of the axle using a triangle scale, and then fix the lines using packing tape.

A
E
JSNIA0922ZZ
1. Point FL 2. Point FR 3. Point RL

F
4. Point RR 5. Center position of axle 6. Triangle scale
Perform “Calibrating Camera Image”

1. Select “Camera Cont.” of “Confirmation/ Adjustment” mode, and then set to “Calibrating Camera Image” G
mode.
2. Overlap the target lines drawn on the ground with the calibration
marker on the screen by operating the center dial and upper/
H
lower/left/right switches of multifunction switch on each screen
of “Rear Camera”, “Pass-Side Camera”, “Front Camera”, “Dr-
Side Camera”.
I
Adjustment range
Rotation direction (Center : 31 patterns (16 on the
dial) center) J
Upper/lower direction (up- : −99 – 99
JSNIA1053GB
per/lower switch)
K
Left/right direction (left/right : −99 – 99
switch)
3. “Writing...” is displayed by pressing the “ENTER” switch, and then the adjustment result is written to the L
around view monitor control unit.
CAUTION:
Check that “Writing...” is displayed. Do never perform other operations while “Writing...” is dis-
played. M
>> GO TO 6.
AV
6.PERFORM “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW”
This mode is designed to align the boundary between each camera image that could not be aligned in the
“Calibrating Camera Image” mode. O
1. Select “Camera Cont.” of “Confirmation/ Adjustment” mode, and then set to “Fine Tuning of Birds-Eye
View” mode.
P

2. Operate the center dial and upper/lower/left/right switch to over-
lap the marker on the screen and the target lines on the ground.
NOTE:
Move the “+”- mark on the camera position to adjustment by
pressing the “CAMERA” switch.
3. When the target line is overlapped on the marker, press the
“ENTER” switch to write the adjustment result to the around
view monitor control unit.
CAUTION:
Check that “Writing...” is displayed. Do never perform other
operations while “Writing...” is displayed.
JSNIA1055GB
NOTE:
“Calibrating Camera Image”.
>> Calibration end

MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [NAVIGATION (SINGLE MONITOR)]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
MULTI AV SYSTEM
B
G
JSNIA1388GB
NOTE:
SWITCH virtually. H
I
K
JSNIA1603GB

L
System name System explanation M

NAVIGATION SYSTEM AV-297, "System Description"
AV
AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM AV-302, "System Description"
CAMERA ASSISTANCE SONAR SYSTEM AV-312, "System Description"
• Status of audio, climate control system, fuel economy, mainte- O
VEHICLE INFORMATION SYSTEM ceiving data signal through CAN communication from ECM, uni-
fied meter and A/C amp. P
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM Refer to the following “HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM”.
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM Refer to the following “VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM”.
TOUCH PANEL SYSTEM Refer to the following “TOUCH PANEL SYSTEM”.

MULTI AV SYSTEM
• AV control unit function by transmitting/receiving data one by one with each unit (slave unit) that configures
them completely as a master unit by connecting between units that configure MULTI AV system with two AV
communication lines (H, L).
• Around view monitor control unit transmits/receives the data signal with sonar control unit and controls sonar
control unit. Around view monitor control unit transmits the information received from sonar control unit to AV
control unit.
• AV control unit is connected by CAN communication, and it receives data signals from ECM, unified meter
and A/C amp. It computes and displays fuel economy information value with the obtained information. The
transmitting/receiving of data signal is performed by BCM. In addition, it transmits the required signal of vehi-
cle setting and receives the response signal.
• AV control unit is connected with front display unit and serial communication, and it transmits the required
signal of display and display control and receives the response signal from front display unit.
NOTE:
• CONSULT-III self diagnosis: Refer to AV-330, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
• On board self diagnosis: Refer to AV-317, "Diagnosis Description".
• Hands-free communication can be operated by connecting using Bluetooth™ with cellular phone.
• Operation is performed by steering switch, and operating condition is indicated on display.
• Guide sound that is heard during operation is input from AV control unit to BOSE amp. and is output from
front speakers.
JSNIA1050GB
When a Call is Originated

Spoken voice sound output from the microphone (Mic. Signal) is input into AV control unit. AV control unit out-
puts to cellular phone with Bluetooth™ communication as a TEL voice signal. Voice sound is then heard by the
other party.
When Receiving a Call
Voice sound is input to one's own cellular phone from the other party. TEL voice signal is output to front speak-
ers, and the signal is input to BOSE amp. via AV control unit by establishing Bluetooth™ communication from
cellular phone.

MULTI AV SYSTEM
operation signal to AV control unit by AV communication. A
JSNIA1425GB
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM F

• Each operation of multi AV system can be performed by inputting sound to microphone.
• Start of sound recognition system can be performed by steering switch.
G
JSNIA1049GB
J
TOUCH PANEL SYSTEM
Each operation of multi AV system can be performed by directly touching a front display unit.
M
JSNIA0904GB
AV

MULTI AV SYSTEM
JSNIA1492ZZ
1. Front squawker RH 2. Center speaker 3. Corner sensor front RH

4. Front squawker LH 5. Front camera 6. Corner sensor front LH
7. Side camera LH 8. Front door speaker LH 9. Around view monitor control unit
10. Rear door speaker LH 11. Rear squawker LH 12. BOSE amp.

MULTI AV SYSTEM
13. Corner sensor rear LH 14. Woofer 15. Rear camera
16. Corner sensor rear RH 17. Buzzer 18. Rear squawker RH A
19. Antenna base (antenna amp. and 20. Rear door speaker RH 21. Side camera RH and infrared LED
satellite antenna) (auxiliary lighting)
22. Front door speaker RH 23. GPS antenna 24. Front display unit B
28. Sonar control unit (with around view 29. Auxiliary input jacks 30. iPod connector
monitor) C
31. AV control unit 32. Multifunction switch 33. iPod adapter
34. Microphone
A. Under front seat (LH side) B. Luggage floor (LH side) C. Luggage side RH D
D. Instrument panel rear side E. Spiral cable part F. Console pocket assembly removed
condition
G. Rear view of the front display unit E
F
• Integrates hard disk drive (HDD) allowing map data and music data to be
stored. G
• AV control unit includes the audio, hands-free phone, voice control, navigation, H
satellite radio, and vehicle information functions.
AV CONTROL UNIT to obtain necessary information for the vehicle information function.
I
trol. J
parking brake).
• Update of map data is performed with the CONSULT-III and the applicable ca-
ble. K
unit.
• RGB image signal is input from AV control unit (RGB, RGB area and RGB syn- L
chronizing).
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT • Auxiliary image signal is input from the auxiliary input jacks.
• Camera image signal input to around view monitor control unit.
• Synchronize signal (HP, VP) is output to AV control unit. M
• Touch panel function can be operated for each system by touching a display
directly.
AV
BOSE AMP.
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. O
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
• Outputs sound (mid and low range). P
FRONT SQUAWKER
REAR SQUAWKER
CENTER SPEAKER

MULTI AV SYSTEM
• Inputs power (amp. ON) and sound signal from BOSE amp.
WOOFER
• Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio, auxiliary
input and navigation operations are integrated.
• It supplies power to front camera, rear camera, and side camera. And then it
superimposes the images from each camera and outputs them to front display
unit.
• Superimpose the guiding line, predicted course line and sonar indicator to the
camera image that outputs to front display unit.
• It performs the reception/transmission of communication signal with each cam-
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT era.
dicted course line.
• It transmits the sonar operation signal from sonar control unit and receives the
sonar information from sonar control unit via AV communication.
• It transmits the information received/transmitted with sonar control unit via AV
communication to AV control unit.
• It inputs the power supply from around view monitor control unit and outputs
the image of the vehicle front to around view monitor control unit.
FRONT CAMERA
• It performs the reception/transmission of the communication signal with
the image of the vehicle rear to around view monitor control unit.
REAR CAMERA
the image of the vehicle LH to around view monitor control unit.
SIDE CAMERA LH
the image of the vehicle RH to around view monitor control unit.
SIDE CAMERA RH
• It illuminates around the front RH wheel by the power supply from around view
INFRARED LED (AUXILIARY LIGHTING) monitor control unit to improve nighttime visibility of Front-Side view.
• The infrared LED is an invisible light ray.
• Operations for audio, hands-free phone, audio response and navigation, etc.
STEERING SWITCH are possible.
Steering signal necessary for predicted course line control is transmitted to
• Used for hands-free phone operation and voice recognition.
MICROPHONE • Mic signal is transmitted to AV control unit.
• Power (Mic VCC) is supplied from AV control unit.
Image signal of auxiliary input is output to front display unit, and sound signal is
GPS ANTENNA GPS signal is received and transmitted to AV control unit.

MULTI AV SYSTEM
A
tenna is adopted.
ANTENNA AMP.
• Radio signal received by rod antenna is amplified and transmitted to AV control B
ANTENNA BASE
unit.
• Receives satellite radio waves and outputs it to AV control unit. C
trol unit.
iPod ADAPTER • Receiving/transmitting of iPod® operation signals are performed as follows: D
• It is connected with around view monitor control unit via AV communication and E
receives the sonar operation signal from around view monitor control unit.
• It transmits the sonar detection status to around view monitor control unit via
AV communication.
MONITOR) F
• It judges the warning level according to the signal from corner sensor and out-
puts the buzzer drive signal.
• Trouble diagnosis is supported with CONSULT-III (K-LINE).
CORNER SENSOR The obstacle distance is detected. The signal is transmitted to sonar control unit. G
BUZZER The warning buzzer outputs with the signal from sonar control unit.
AV

AUDIO SYSTEM
AUDIO SYSTEM
JSNIA1384GB
NOTE:
JSNIA1603GB
The audio system is equipped with the following functions. Each function is operated by multifunction switch,
preset switch, touch panel, steering switch or audio recognition. Operation status of AUDIO is indicated at dis-
play.
Function
AM/FM radio
Satellite radio
CD
Music Box (Hard Disk Drive)
CF (Compact Flash)
iPod connection
Operating Signal
Audio system operation can be performed with multifunction switch, preset switch, steering switch, touch
panel function or voice recognition function.
switch.
• Refer to AV-285, "System Description" for explanation of voice recognition function and touch panel function.
Screen Display

AUDIO SYSTEM
• The image signal that displays operating status is performed by the RGB image signal, RGB area signal and A
AM/FM Radio Mode
• AM/FM radio tuner is built into AV control unit. B
control unit. The FM sub antenna is installed on the back door window glass and AV control unit receives
audio signal. C
• Audio signal is input to BOSE amp. and BOSE amp. outputs to woofer and each speaker for AV control unit.
Satellite Radio Mode
• Satellite radio tuner is built into AV control unit. D
• Audio signal (satellite radio) is received by satellite antenna, and it is input to AV control unit. AV control unit
outputs audio signal to BOSE amp. The signal is also outputted from BOSE amp. to both woofer and each
speaker.
E
CD Mode
• CD function is built into AV control unit.
• AV control unit outputs audio signals to BOSE amp. and BOSE amp. outputs to woofer and each speaker
when CD is inserted to AV control unit. F
Music Box Mode

• Music CD data is stored on HDD that is built into AV control unit, and it can be played.
• AV control unit outputs music (audio signal) that is stored on HDD to BOSE amp., and BOSE amp. outputs to G
woofer and each speaker.
CF Mode
H
• AV control unit has built in CF replay function.
• Music (audio signal) that is stored in CF outputs to BOSE amp. and BOSE amp. outputs to woofer and each
speaker when CF is inserted into AV control unit.
I
iPod Connection
• Connect iPod® and iPod adapter with wire harness and iPod adapter inputs iPod sound signal from iPod®.
J
puts sound signal to BOSE amp., and BOSE amp. output sound signal to woofer and each speaker.
K
• The iPod® connection status can be recognized whether iPod adapter receives iPod connection recognition
signal.
L
• The iPod adapter can charge iPod®.
• Driver's Audio Stage controls the speaker's output characteristics by BOSE amp. so that the driver seat is M
the center of sound.
• ON/OFF signals of Driver's Audio Stage are transmitted from AV control unit to BOSE amp. using mode
change signal.
AV

AUDIO SYSTEM
JSNIA1492ZZ


AUDIO SYSTEM
monitor) C
34. Microphone
condition
F
• Receiving function of AM/FM/satellite radio, replaying function of CD, replay-
ing/saving functions of music box (HDD), replaying function of CF and voice G
AV CONTROL UNIT
recognition function are integrated.
• Audio signal is output to BOSE amp. from each function.
• Front display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control H
unit.
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT • RGB image signal (audio operation condition) is input from AV control unit.
• Touch panel function can be operated for each system by touching the display
directly. I
trol unit.
iPod ADAPTER • Receiving/transmitting of iPod® operation signals are performed as follows: J
• Inputs power (amp. ON) and sound signal from AV control unit, and outputs K
BOSE AMP.
L
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH • Connected with preset switch via cable, and operation signal is transmitted to
• Each audio operation can be operated. M
• Connected with multifunction switch via cable, and operation signal is transmit-
PRESET SWITCH
• The disk ejection operating signal is performed by hardwire. AV
STEERING SWITCH
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. O
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
P
FRONT SQUAWKER
REAR SQUAWKER
CENTER SPEAKER

AUDIO SYSTEM
• Inputs power (amp. ON) and sound signals from BOSE amp.
WOOFER
tenna is adopted.
ANTENNA AMP.
• Radio signal received by rod antenna is amplified and transmitted to AV control
ANTENNA BASE
unit.
• Receives satellite radio waves and outputs it to AV control unit.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
A
JSNIA1385GB
G
DESCRIPTION H
• AV control unit controls navigation function while GPS tuner has built-in map data, GYRO (angle speed sen-
sor), on the HDD (Hard Disk Drive).
• AV control unit inputs operation signals with communication signals, through display (touch panel), multi- I
function switch and steering switch.
• Guide sound is output to front speaker through BOSE amp. from AV control unit when operating navigation
system.
• The vehicle position is calculated through the GYRO (angle speed sensor), vehicle sensor, signal from GPS J
satellite and map data stored on HDD (Hard Disk Drive), and transmits the map image signal (RGB image,
RGB area, RGB synchronizing) to display.
K
POSITION DETECTION PRINCIPLE
The navigation system periodically calculates the current vehicle
position according to the following three types of signals.
• Travel distance of the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed L
sensor
• Vehicle turning angle determined by the gyroscope (angular speed
sensor) M
• The travel direction of the vehicle determined by the GPS antenna
(GPS information)
The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing the
calculated vehicle position with map data, which is stored in the HDD AV
(Hard Disk Drive) (map-matching), and indicated on the screen with
JSNIA0177GB
the current location mark. More accurate data is used by comparing
position detection results from GPS to map-matching. O
The current position is calculated by detecting the travel distance
from the previous calculation point, and its direction change.
• Travel distance
The travel distance is generated from the vehicle speed sensor P
input signal. The automatic distance correction function is adopted
for preventing a miss-detection of the travel distance because of
tire wear etc.
• Travel direction
The gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) and GPS antenna (GPS
information) detect a change in travel direction. Both have advan-
tages and disadvantages as per the following descriptions.
SEL684V

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Type Advantage Disadvantage

Gyroscope (angular velocity sen- Errors are accumulated when driving a long dis-
The turning angle is precisely detected.
sor) tance without stopping.
The travel direction (North/South/East/West) The travel direction is not precisely detected when
GPS antenna (GPS information)
is detected. driving slowly.
Input signals are prioritized in each situation. However, this order of priority may change in accordance with
more detailed travel conditions so that the travel direction is detected more accurately.
MAP-MATCHING
Map-matching repositions the vehicle on the road map when a new
location is judged to be more accurate. This is done by comparing
the current vehicle position (calculated by the normal position detec-
tion method) from the map data stored in the HDD (Hard Disk Drive).
SEL685V
There is a possibility that the vehicle position may not be corrected in the following case, or when vehicle is
driven over a certain distance or time in which GPS information is hard to receive. Manually correct the current
location mark on the screen.
• In map-matching, several alternative routes are prepared and pri-
oritized in addition to the road detected as currently being driven
on.
Therefore, due to errors in the distance and/or direction, an incor-
rect road may be prioritized, and the current location mark may be
repositioned to the incorrect road.
If two roads are running parallel, they are of the same priority.
Therefore, the current location mark may appear on either of them
alternately, depending on steering wheel movement and road con-
figuration, etc.
SEL686V
• Map-matching does not function correctly when road that the vehi-
cle is driving on new, etc, or not recorded in the map data. Also,
map-matching does not function correctly when road patterns
stored in the map data and the actual road pattern are different due
to repair, etc.
Therefore, the map-matching function judges an other road as cur-
rently being driven on road if the road is not on the map, and dis-
plays the current location mark on it. Later, the current location
mark may be repositioned if the correct road is detected.
• Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel direc-
tion calculated by the distance and direction with the road data is
JSNIA0180GB
limited. Therefore, correction by map-matching is not possible
when there is an excessive gap between current vehicle position and the position on the map.
GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
GPS (Global Positioning System) is developed for and is controlled
by the US Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS satel- A
lites (NAVSTAR), transmitting out radio waves while flying on an orbit
around the earth at an altitude of approximately 21,000 km (13,048
mile).
B
The receiver calculates the travel position in three dimensions (lati-
tude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the radio waves
that four or more GPS satellites transmit (three-dimensional position-
ing). The GPS receiver calculates the travel position in two dimen- C
sions (latitude/longitude) with the previous altitude data if the GPS
receiver receives only three radio waves (two-dimensional position-
SEL526V
ing). GPS position correction is not performed while the vehicle is D
stopped.
Accuracy of the GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions:

E
• In two-dimensional positioning, GPS accuracy will deteriorate when altitude of the vehicle position changes.
• The position of GPS satellite affects GPS detection precision. The position detection may not be precisely
performed.
• The position detection is not performed if GPS receiver does not receive radio waves from GPS satellites. F
(Inside a tunnel, parking in a building, under an elevated highway etc.) GPS receiver may not receive radio
waves from GPS satellites if any object is placed on the GPS antenna.
NOTE: G
• The detection result has an error of approximately 10 m (32.8 ft) even with a high-precision three dimen-
sional positioning.
• There may be cases when the accuracy is lowered and radio waves are stopped intentionally because the
GPS satellite signal is controlled by the US trace control center. H
AV

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
JSNIA1492ZZ


NAVIGATION SYSTEM
monitor) C
34. Microphone
condition
F
• It is the master unit that controls each operation of the Navigation system.
• The HDD (Hard Disk Drive) is built in, and the map data is stored in HDD. G
AV CONTROL UNIT
• The RGB image signal (map information) is output to front display unit.
• The voice guidance signal is output to BOSE amp.
• RGB image signal (map information) is input from AV control unit, and it is in- H
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT dicated on front display unit.
• Each operation of navigation can be performed by the touch panel function.
Voice guidance signal is input from AV control unit, and it is output to front LH/RH
BOSE AMP.
speakers.
I
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Voice guidance signal from BOSE amp. is output.
FRONT SQUAWKER J
• Each operation of navigation can be performed.
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH • Connected with preset switch via cables and operation signal is transmitted to
K
• Each operation of navigation, etc. can be performed.
STEERING SWITCH
• Switch operating signal is output to AV control unit.
GPS ANTENNA GPS signal is received and is output to AV control unit.
L
AV

AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
JSNIA1422GB
• This system is equipped with wide-angle high-resolution cameras on the front and rear of the vehicle and on
both right and left door mirrors. The images from front view, rear view, front-side view (RH side), and birds-
eye view that shows the view from the top of the vehicle are displayed to monitor the vehicle surroundings.
• Around view monitor control unit cuts out and expands the image received from each camera to create each
view.
• The sonar indicator is displayed on display (superimposed on the camera image) in combination with the
camera assistance sonar system to warm of the approach of an obstacle.
• In front view and rear view, the vehicle width, distance lines and predicted course lines are superimposed
and displayed. In front-side view, the vehicle distance guiding line and vehicle width guiding line are dis-
played.
• The Birds-Eye view converts the images from 4 cameras into the overhead view and displays the status of
the vehicle on display. The vehicle icon and sonar indicator that are displayed on the Birds-Eye view display
are rendered by around view monitor control unit.
AROUND VIEW MONITOR SCREEN
• Around view monitor combines and displays the travel direction view and “Birds-Eye view”, “Front-Side
view”, and then it displays the sonar indicator on the “Birds-Eye view”, “Front-Side view”.
• AV control unit renders the “Change View”, “BEEP” switch, view icon, warning message on display.

Screen constitution
A
JSNIA0769GB F
OPERATION DESCRIPTION
• Around view monitor operates by pressing the “CAMERA” switch of multifunction switch and shifting the
selector switch to the reverse position. G
• When the selector lever is in any position other than the reverse position, the screen is switched to the
around view monitor by pressing the “CAMERA” switch.
• The screen is switched to the around view monitor by shifting the selector lever to the reverse position. H
• In the around view monitor, Birds-Eye view and Front-side view can be switched by pressing the “CAMERA”
switch or the touch switch of display.
• The “Front-Side and Front screen” are displayed as a priority when turning “Default to Front-Side View” ON.
• The around view monitor is cancelled 3 minutes after pressing the “CAMERA” switch, and then the screen I
returns to the screen before displaying the around view monitor when selector lever is in a position other
than the “R” position.
• ON/OFF setting of sonar indicator display on the Front-Side view screen can be performed. J
• In the Birds-Eye view, the invisible area is displayed on the image to specify the boundary of the 4 cameras.
The invisible area is displayed in yellow in the Birds-Eye view after turning the ignition switch ON.
• The sonar (both of buzzer and indicator) operates only when the camera screen is displayed.
K
AV

Around view monitor screen transition
JSNIA0765GB
FRONT VIEW
• The front view image is from the front camera.
• When the selector lever is in any position other than the reverse position, the front view is displayed by
pressing the “CAMERA” switch. It improves the visibility of obstacles in front of the vehicle and helps driving
by the images displayed from Birds-Eye view and Front-Side view.
• Display the vehicle width guiding line and vehicle distance guiding line in front view and display the predicted
course line according to the steering angle.
• If the steering angle is within approximately 90 degrees, the predicted course lines on the left/right side are
displayed. If the steering angle is exceeding approximately 90 degrees, only the predicted course line on the
outside (in the opposite side of steering direction) is displayed.
• Around view monitor control unit controls the direction and distance of the predicted course line according to
the sensor signal from steering angle sensor.

Front view guiding lines
A
JSNIA0770GB F
REAR VIEW
• The rear view image is from the rear camera.
• When the selector lever is in the reverse position, the rear view is displayed. Backing and parking are G
improved by the images from Birds-Eye view and Front-Side view.
• Display the vehicle width guiding line and vehicle distance guiding line in Rear view and display the pre-
dicted course line according to the steering angle. H
• The predicted course line is not displayed at the steering neutral position. The predicted course line is dis-
played and the vehicle width guiding line is not displayed by turning the steering wheel.
• Around view monitor control unit controls the direction and distance of predicted course line according to the
sensor signal from steering angle sensor. I
Rear view guiding lines
J
AV
JSNIA1541GB
O
FRONT-SIDE VIEW
• The front-side view image is from the side camera RH.
• In Front-Side view, display the vehicle distance guiding line and vehicle width guiding line.
• The infrared LED illumination is installed on the door mirror RH to illuminate around the front wheels. P

Front-side view area and guiding line
JSNIA0771GB
BIRDS-EYE VIEW
• The image from the 4 cameras is cut out and converted into the overhead view, and the surroundings of the
vehicle is displayed in birds-eye view.
• In Birds-Eye view, the invisible area is displayed on the image to specify the boundary of the 4 cameras.
• The invisible area is displayed in yellow in the Birds-Eye view after turning the ignition switch ON as an infor-
mation for the user. (OFF setting can be performed)
Birds-Eye view display image
JSNIA1441GB

Birds-Eye view display area
A
H
JSNIA0775GB
CAMERA IMAGE OPERATION PRINCIPLE

• If the information writing to around view monitor control unit and the information from the camera are not I
matched, the applicable camera position is indicated as an error on the Birds-Eye view display. (Calibration
operation is necessary when replacing each camera or when replacing around view monitor control unit.)
• Around view monitor control unit receives the camera switch signal from AV control unit via AV communica-
tion by pressing the “CAMERA” switch of multifunction switch. J
• Around view monitor control unit that receives the camera switch signal supplies the power to each camera
and inputs the camera image from each camera.
• When the selector lever is in the reverse position, around view monitor control unit receives the reverse sig- K
nal from AV control unit via AV communication, supplies the power to each camera, and inputs the camera
image from each camera.
• Around view monitor control unit that receives the camera image signal from each camera cuts out the
L
required screen for each view, superimposes the camera image, vehicle icon, guiding lines, sonar indicator,
and outputs them to the display unit.
PREDICTED COURSE LINE OPERATION PRINCIPLE M
Detection of steering rotation direction
Around view monitor control unit detects the rotation direction of steering according to the phase difference of
two pairs of pulse signals (sensor signal 1 and sensor signal 2) input from steering angle sensor. AV
Detection of steering neutral position
The sensor signal 3 input from the steering angle sensor is generated at 1 pulse per 1 rotation of the steering
wheel. Around view monitor control unit detects the steering neutral position from this pulse. O

JSNIA0708GB
Correction of steering neutral position

Around view monitor control unit corrects the steering neutral position during driving according to the vehicle
speed signal and steering angle sensor signal.

AV
P
JSNIA1492ZZ


16. Corner sensor rear RH 17. Buzzer 18. Rear squawker RH
22. Front door speaker RH 23. GPS antenna 24. Front display unit
monitor)
34. Microphone
A. Under front seat (LH side) B. Luggage floor (LH side) C. Luggage side RH
condition
G. Rear view of the front display unit

• Image on display is switched to around view monitor by serial communication
AV CONTROL UNIT between AV control unit and front display unit.
• Warning displayed in around view monitor image is illustrated.
• Camera image signal is transmitted from around view monitor control unit, and
RGB image signal for warning display is transmitted from AV control unit.
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
• Around view monitor image is switched by serial communication between AV
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH It transmits the CAMERA switch signal via AV communication to AV control unit.
• It supplies power to front camera, rear camera, and side camera, superimpos-
es the images from each camera, and then outputs them to front display unit.
• It receives the CAMERA switch signal and reverse signal from AV control unit
via AV communication.
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
era.
• Input the sensor signal from steering angle sensor, and then control the pre-
dicted course line.
FRONT CAMERA
REAR CAMERA
SIDE CAMERA LH
SIDE CAMERA RH
It illuminates around the front RH wheel by the power supply from around view
INFRARED LED (AUXILIARY LIGHTING)
monitor control unit to improve nighttime visibility of Front-Side view.

A
• It is connected with around view monitor control unit via AV communication and
SONAR CONTROL UNIT
AV communication. B
C
AV

CAMERA ASSISTANCE SONAR SYSTEM
JSNIA1422GB
DESCRIPTION
• Install the corner sensor on the front bumper and rear bumper. It detects the obstacles around the vehicle
when the around view monitor is displayed. It warns of the approach to the obstacles with the buzzer and
indicator in the display linked with the around view monitor system.
• It displays the distance between the bumper and obstacle with the color of sonar indicator in the display and
the blinking cycle of indicator in 3 stages.
• The buzzer warns of the distance to the obstacles with the cycle in 3 stages.
SYSTEM OPERATION DESCRIPTION
• Around view monitor control unit transmits the sonar operation signal via AV communication to sonar control
unit to control the operation of sonar indicator and sonar buzzer.
• Sonar control unit that receives the sonar operation signal from around view monitor control unit transmits
the detection signal and detection distance signal according to the signal from corner sensor via AV commu-
nication to around view monitor control unit. around view monitor control unit operates the applicable sonar
indicator.
• Sonar control unit that receives the sonar operation signal from around view monitor control unit outputs the
buzzer signal to other buzzers based on the detection distance signal from corner sensor to operate the
buzzer.
• Sonar control unit has the diagnosis function. It can detect the corner sensor malfunction or sensor harness
open circuit. It transmits the diagnosis results to around view monitor control unit and always displays the
sonar indicator in red to inform the user.
OBSTACLE DETECTION DISTANCE
• Sonar control unit changes the outputs of the sonar indicator and warning buzzer in 3 stages according to
the obstacle detection distance from the corner sensor.
• The sonar control unit can change the setting of obstacle detection distance in 4 stages.

Obstacle detection image
A
H
JSNIA1430ZZ
A. Approx. 50 cm (19.6 in) B. Approx. 15 cm (5.9 in)

I
Detection distance
Sensitivity level 1 Sensitivity level 2 Sensitivity level 3 Sensitivity level 4
Warning item
(Faster warning) (Default value) (Slower warning) (Slowest warning)
First stage
J
70 – 80 cm (27.5 – 31.4 in) 60 – 70 cm (23.6 – 27.5 in) 50 – 60 cm (29.6 – 23.6 in) 40 – 50 cm (15.7 – 19.6 in)
warning
Second stage
warning K
Third stage
Less than 50 cm (19.6 in) Less than 40 cm (15.7 in) Less than 30 cm (11.8 in) Less than 30 cm (11.8 in)
warning
L
SONAR INDICATOR DISPLAY
• Around view monitor control unit that receives the detection signal and detection distance signal from sonar
control unit displays the sonar indicator on display.
• Around view monitor control unit changes the color or blinking cycle of the indicator according to the detec- M
tion distance.
AV

Color and blinking cycle of sonar indicator
JSNIA1100GB
SONAR BUZZER OPERATION

• Sonar control unit outputs the buzzer signal to other buzzers and operates the buzzer when the detection
signal is input from the corner sensor.
• It changes the buzzer cycle in 3 stages according to the detection distance.
Sonar buzzer cycle
JSNIA1101GB

AV
P
JSNIA1492ZZ


22. Front door speaker RH 23. GPS antenna 24. Front display unit
monitor)
34. Microphone
condition
G. Rear view of the front display unit

unit.
• Superimposes the guiding line, predicted course line and sonar indicator to the
• Inputs the sensor signal from the steering angle sensor, and then controls the
predicted course line.
• It transmits the sonar operation signal from sonar control unit and receives the
sonar information from the sonar control unit via AV communication.
• It transmits the information received/transmitted with the sonar control unit via
AV communication to AV control unit.
AV communication.
MONITOR)
CORNER SENSOR The obstacle distance is detected. The signal is transmitted to sonar control unit.

A
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH AND PRESET SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B

The ON/OFF operation (continuity) of each switch in multifunction switch and preset switch can be checked.
Self-diagnosis mode
• Press the “BACK” switch and the “UP” switch of the 8-direction C
OFF to ACC and hold them for 3 seconds or more. Then the
buzzer sounds, all indicators of the preset switch illuminate, and D
the self-diagnosis mode starts.
pressing the switch. The buzzer sounds if the switch is normal.
NOTE: E
JSNIA1392GB
F

Self-diagnosis mode is canceled when turning the ignition switch OFF.
G
• AV control unit diagnosis function starts up with multifunction switch operation and AV control unit performs a
diagnosis for each unit in the system during the on board diagnosis. H
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS I
Description
• The trouble diagnosis function has a self-diagnosis mode for conducting trouble diagnosis automatically and
a confirmation/adjustment mode for operating manually. J
• The self-diagnosis mode performs diagnoses on AV control unit, connections between system components,
AV control unit and GPS antenna and between AV control unit and satellite radio antenna. Then it displays
the diagnosis results on display. K
modifying or adjusting generally require human intervention and judgment (the system cannot make a judg-
ment automatically). L
Mode Description M
• Diagnoses the connections across system components, between AV
Self Diagnosis
control unit and GPS antenna and between AV control unit and satel- AV
lite radio antenna.

Mode Description
The following check functions are available: color tone check by color
Display Diagnosis bar display, light and shade check by gray scale display and touch panel
calibration response check.
Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, parking brake,
Vehicle Signals
Climate Control Start auto air conditioner system self-diagnosis.
Steering Angle Ad- When there is a difference between the actual turning angle and the ve-
justment hicle mark turning angle, it can be adjusted.
When there is a difference between the current location mark and the ac-
Navigation Speed Calibration
tual location, it can be adjusted.
XM SAT Subscrip-
The XM NavTraffic subscription status can be checked.
tion Status
Confirmation/ place that the selected malfunction last occurred are displayed.
Adjustment Vehicle CAN Diagnosis The transmitting/receiving of CAN communication can be monitored.
AV COMM Diagnosis
monitored.
The received volume adjustment of hands-free phone, microphone
Handsfree Phone
speaker check, and erase memory can be performed.
It can perform the confirmation of a signal connection to around view
monitor control unit, the calibration of each camera, Correct Draw Line
Camera Cont.
of Camera Image, and Fine Tuning of Birds-Eye View. Refer to AV-334,
"Diagnosis Description".
Bluetooth The passkey and the device name can be checked and changed.
Any necessary channels required to receive traffic information from the
Change Channel
satellite radio system can be set.
SAT Change Application Any application IDs required to receive traffic information from the satel-
ID lite radio system can be set.
Diag Not used.
Delete Unit Connection Log Erase the connection history of unit and error history.
STARTING PROCEDURE
2. Turn the audio system OFF.
the self-diagnosis mode is starts, a short beep will sound.)
• Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed
by pressing the “BACK” button.
JSNIA1393GB

items of “Self Diagnosis” and “Confirmation/Adjustment” can be A
selected.
JSNIA0061GB
D
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
1. Start the self-diagnosis function and select “Self Diagnosis”.
- Self-diagnosis subdivision screen is displayed, and the self-
diagnosis mode starts. E
sion screen indicates progress of the trouble diagnosis.
F
JSNIA0062GB
H
2. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self-diagnosis is completed. The unit names and the connection
lines are color-coded according to the diagnostic results.
I
K
JSNIA1394GB
Con- L
Diagnosis results Unit nection
line
Normal Green Green M
Connection malfunction Gray Yellow
Unit malfunction Note Red Green AV
NOTE:
• Replace AV control unit if “Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit malfunction” is indicated. The symptom is an AV O
- If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined accord-
P

component in the diagnosis result screen.
JSNIA0064GB
Detection Range of Self-diagnosis Mode

between AV control unit and each unit and the internal operation of AV control unit.
• Because the start condition of diagnosis function is switch operated, the on board diagnosis function cannot
be started up if any malfunction is detected in the communication circuit between AV control unit and multi-
function switch.
Check the applicable display in the following table, and then repair the malfunctioning parts.

Area with yellow connection lines Detection logic
to take

items are detected:
• AV control unit power supply and
ground circuits.
• When there is no malfunction, AV
tected.
control unit is malfunctioning.
• AV control unit malfunction is de-
tected.
JSNIA1410GB
NOTE:
When a control unit malfunction is detected (red in unit
display), connection malfunction with other connection
unit may be displayed.
malfunction”

to take A
GPS antenna connection malfunction

GPS antenna. C
is detected.
D
JSNIA0597GB
F
Poor connection is detected in satel- • Satellite radio antenna feeder.
lite radio antenna. • Satellite radio antenna.
JSNIA0598GB H
When either one of the following I

items are detected:
• communication circuit between AV
control unit and front display unit Communication circuits between AV
are malfunctioning. control unit and front display unit. J
• communication signal between AV
control unit and front display unit
are malfunctioning.
K
JSNIA0599GB
When either one of the following L

items are detected:
• iPod adapter power supply and M
tected.
ground circuits.
AV control unit and iPod adapter
AV control unit and iPod adapter.
are malfunctioning.
• AV communication signal between
AV
are malfunctioning.
JSNIA1411GB
O

to take
items are detected:
• around view monitor control unit
power supply and ground circuits
are malfunctioning. • Around view monitor control unit
• AV communication circuits between power supply and ground circuits
AV control unit and around view • AV communication circuits between
monitor control unit are malfunc- AV control unit and around view
tioning. monitor control unit.
AV control unit and around view
monitor control unit are malfunc-
JSNIA1102GB tioning.
items are detected:
• sonar control unit power supply and
tected. • Sonar control unit power supply
• AV communication circuits between and ground circuits.
around view monitor control unit • AV communication circuits between
and sonar control unit are malfunc- around view monitor control unit
tioning. and sonar control unit.
around view monitor control unit
and sonar control unit are malfunc-
1. Start the diagnosis function and select “Confirmation/Adjustment”. The confirmation/adjustment mode
the “BACK” switch to return to the initial Confirmation/Adjust-
ment Mode screen.
JSNIA0617GB

Display Diagnosis
A
JSNIA0689GB
K
L
M
Vehicle Signals
A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and AV
JSNIA0075GB


ON Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Vehicle speed
OFF Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Parking brake
ON Light switch ON
Lights —
Ignition —
OFF Ignition switch in THE ACC position
Shift the selector lever to the “R”
ON
position
OFF
other than the “R” position
Speaker Test
NOTE:
Tweeter* : 3 kHz
JSNIA0076GB
*: Squawker
Climate Control
Navigation
STEERING ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
The steering angle output value detected with the gyroscope is
adjusted.
JSNIA0077GB
SPEED CALIBRATION

During normal driving, distance error caused by tire wear and tire
pressure change is automatically adjusted for by the automatic dis- A
tance correction function. This function, on the other hand, is for
immediate adjustment, in cases such as driving with tire chains fitted
on tires.
B
JSNIA0078GB
D
XM SAT SUBSCRIPTION STATUS
E
JSNIA0089GB
H
Error History
However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition SW is turned ON I
and then no error has occurred until the self-diagnosis start. Check the “Error Record” to detect any error that
may have occurred before the self-diagnosis start because of this condition.
The error record displays the time and place of the most recent occurrence of that error. However, take note of J
the following points.
• If there is a malfunction with the GPS antenna circuit board in AV control unit, the correct date and time of
occurrence may not be displayed.
• Place of the error occurrence is represented by the position of the current location mark at the time an error K
occurred. If current location mark has deviated from the correct position, then the place of the error occur-
rence cannot be located correctly.
• The frequency of occurrence is displayed in a count up manner. The actual count up method differs depend- L
ing on the error item.
Count up method A
• The counter resets to 0 if an error occurs when IGN switch is turned ON. The counter increases by 1 if the
condition is normal at a next IGN ON cycle. M
Count up method B AV
• The counter increases by 1 if an error occurs when IGN switch is ON. The counter will not decrease even if
the condition is normal at the next IGN ON cycle.
record display) with the “Delete log” switch or CONSULT-III. O
Display type of occur-

rence frequency P
Count up method B Other than the above

JSNIA0079GB
Error item
Some error items may be displayed simultaneously according to the cause. If some error items are displayed
simultaneously, the detection of the cause can be performed by the combination of display items.
Error item Detection logic Possible malfunction factor/Action to take

then repair the malfunctioning parts accord-
CAN COMM CIRCUIT ing to the diagnosis results.
ed.
(MULTI AV)".
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
ed.
CONTROL UNIT (AV)
FLASH-ROM Error Of Control Unit
Connection Of Gyro
XM SERIAL COMM Error
Bluetooth Module Connection Error Replace AV control unit.
HDD CONN Error

HDD READ Error
HDD WRITE Error
HDD COMM Error
HDD ACCESS Error
DSP CONN Error
DSP COMM Error
• AV control unit power supply and ground
are detected:
circuits.
Internal Communication Error • malfunction is detected in AV control unit
• When there is no malfunction, AV control
power supply and ground circuits.
unit is malfunctioning.
• AV control unit malfunction is detected.
GPS Communication Error An intermittent error caused by strong radio
interference may be detected unless any
GPS ROM Error
symptom (GPS reception error, etc.) oc-
GPS malfunction is detected.
GPS RAM Error curs.
Replace AV control unit if the malfunction
GPS RTC Error occurs constantly.

A
are detected:
ground circuits malfunction are detected. • Front display unit power supply and B
• malfunction is detected in the communi- C
front display unit.
GPS antenna connection malfunction is de- D
GPS Antenna Error GPS antenna.
tected.
Poor connection is detected in satellite ra- • Satellite radio antenna feeder.
XM Antenna Connection Error
dio antenna. • Satellite radio antenna.
E
are detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT circuits.
• Internal Communication Error • When there is no malfunction, AV control
circuits malfunction are detected.
F
are detected: G
• Switches Connection Error munication circuits between AV control • AV communication circuits between AV H
unit and multifunction switch. I
are detected:
• iPod adapter power supply and ground J
unit and iPod adapter. control unit and iPod adapter. K
L
are detected:
• around view monitor control unit power
supply and ground circuits malfunction • Around view monitor control unit power M
are detected. supply and ground circuits.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
• malfunction is detected in the AV com- • AV communication circuits between AV
• AVM Connection Error
munication circuits between AV control control unit and around view monitor
unit and around view monitor control unit. control unit. AV
unit and around view monitor control unit.
O

are detected:
• sonar control unit power supply or
• Sonar control unit power supply and
ground circuits.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT munication circuits between around view
• AVM Sonar Connection Error monitor control unit and sonar control
around view monitor control unit and so-
unit.
nar control unit.
munication signal between around view
monitor control unit and sonar control
unit.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
Malfunction is detected in the AV communi- AV communication circuits between AV
• Switches Connection Error
cation circuits between AV control unit and control unit and around view monitor con-
• iPod Connection Error
around view monitor control unit. trol unit.

• The error counter displays “OK” if any malfunction was not
• The error counter is erased if “Reset” is pressed.
Malfunction counter
(Past)
Tx(HVAC) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
JSNIA1408GB
Rx(ECM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
Rx(Cluster) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
Rx(BCM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
Rx(HVAC) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
Rx(USM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
Rx(TPMS) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
AV COMM Diagnosis
ter unit) and each unit.
Status Counter
Items
(Current) (Past)
JSNIA1426GB
C Tx(ITM–PrimarySW) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(PrimarySW–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(STRG SW–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(Audio–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(Amp–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(XM–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(iPod–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C RX(AVM–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39

Status Counter
Items
(Current) (Past) A
C Rx(Amp–Audio) — —
C Rx(iPod–Audio) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
B
C Rx(Sonar–AVM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Tx(Audio–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
NOTE: C
• “Audio” and “Amp” indicate the same status because “Amp” indicates the status of the amplifier integrated in AV control unit.
• “STRG SW”, “Amp” and “XM” indicate the same status as “Audio”.
Hands-Free Phone D
The hands-free phone reception volume adjustment, microphone
and speaker test, and memory erase functions are also available.
E
G
JSNIA0083GB
Camera Cont.
H
Refer to AV-334, "Diagnosis Description".
Bluetooth
Confirm / Change Passkey I
• The passkey of Bluetooth can be confirmed and changed.
• The passkey can be changed by four digits within 0 to 9.
J
L
JSNIA0086GB
Confirm / Change Device Name M

• The device name of Bluetooth can be confirmed and changed.
• The device name can be changed by sixteen digits within A to Z
(small character can be used) and - (hyphen).
AV
P
JSNIA0087GB
SAT

• Change Channel
- Any necessary channels required to receive traffic information from
the satellite radio system can be set.
JSNIA0092GB
• Change Application ID
- Any application IDs required to receive traffic information from the
JSNIA0093GB

trol unit memory. (Clear the records of the unit that has been
removed.)
JSNIA0088GB
Initialize Settings
Deletes data stored in HDD.
JSNIA0095GB
CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV) INFOID:0000000003826571
CONSULT-III FUNCTIONS
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via the communication with AV control unit.

Diagnosis mode Description A

Ecu Identification The part number of AV control unit can be checked.
of the Multi AV system, and displays the current and past malfunctions collectively. B
Data Monitor The diagnosis of vehicle signal that is input to AV control unit can be performed.
AV COMMUNICATION C
When “AV communication” of “CAN Diag Support Monitor” is selected, the following function will be performed.
AV&NAVI C/U D
AV communication counter.
AUDIO Displays AV control unit communication status and the error counter.
ECU IDENTIFICATION E
The part number of AV control unit is displayed.
• In CONSULT-III self-diagnosis, self-diagnosis results and error history are displayed simultaneously. F
• The timing is displayed as “0” if any of the error codes [U1000], [U1010], [U1300] or [U1310] are detected.
Self-diagnosis results display item G

H
CAN COMM CIRCUIT[U1000] Refer to AV-339, "Diagnosis Procedure".
ed.
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010] I
ed.
CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310]
J
Gyro NO CONN [U1201]
CAN CONT [U1216]
K
BLUETOOTH CONN [U1217]
HDD CONN [U1218] Replace AV control unit.
HDD READ [U1219] L

XM SERIAL COMM [U1220]
HDD WRITE [U121A]
M
HDD COMM [U121B]
HDD ACCESS [U121C]
DSP CONN [U121D] AV
DSP COMM [U121E]
• AV control unit power supply and ground O
are detected:
circuits.
INTERNAL COMM [U121F] • malfunction is detected in AV control unit
supply and ground circuit.
• AV control unit malfunction are detected.
P
GPS COMM [U1204] An intermittent error caused by strong radio
GPS ROM [U1205]
GPS RAM [U1206] curs.
GPS RTC [U1207] occurs constantly.

are detected:
front display unit.
GPS antenna connection malfunction is de-
GPS ANTENNA CONN [U1244] GPS antenna.
tected.
XM ANTENNA CONN [U1258]
are detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] circuits.
• INTERNAL COMM [U121F] • When there is no malfunction, AV control
are detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] • malfunction is detected in the AV com- ground circuits.
• SWITCH CONN [U1240] munication circuits between AV control • AV communication circuits between AV
are detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] • malfunction is detected in the AV com- circuits.
• IPod CONN [U1254] munication circuits between AV control • AV communication circuits between AV
are detected:
supply and ground circuits malfunction • Around view monitor control unit power
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300]
• AROUND CAMERA CONN [U125B]
unit and around view monitor control unit. control unit.

A
are detected:
ground circuit malfunction are detected. B
ground circuits.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] munication circuits between around view
• SONAR CONN [U125C] monitor control unit and sonar control
unit.
nar control unit.
C
unit. D
• SWITCH CONN [U1240]
• IPod CONN [U1254] E
DATA MONITOR
F
ALL SIGNALS
G

H
On Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
VHCL SPD SIG
Off Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Changes in indication may be delayed. This is
On Parking brake is applied. normal. I
PKB SIG
Off Parking brake is released.
Block the light beam from the auto
On light optical sensor when the light J
SW is ON.
ILLUM SIG
Expose the auto light optical sensor
Off to light when the light SW is OFF or —
K
ON.
IGN SIG
Off Ignition switch in the ACC position L
On
sition Changes in indication may be delayed. This is
REV SIG
Shift the selector lever to a position normal. M
Off
SELECTION FROM MENU

Allows the technician to select which vehicle signals should be displayed and displays the status of the AV
selected vehicle signals.
Item to be selected Description O

VHCL SPD SIG
PKB SIG
The same as when “ALL SIGNALS” P
ILLUM SIG
is selected.
IGN SIG
REV SIG

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
The diagnosis function of around view monitor control unit is displayed when selecting “Camera Cont.” of Con-
firmation/Adjustment mode in the multi AV system.
Around view monitor control unit diagnosis item
AV control unit Confirmation/Adjustment mode Function
The status of signals input to around view monitor control unit
Connection Confirmation
can be checked.
Rear Camera Performs the calibration of rear camera.
Pass-Side Camera Performs the calibration of side camera LH.
Calibrating Cam- Front Camera Performs the calibration of front camera.
era Image Dr-Side Camera Performs the calibration of side camera.
Initialize Camera Image The calibration can be initialized to NISSAN factory shipment
Camera Cont. Calibration* condition.
Rear View The position of rear view guiding line can be changed.
Correct Draw Line
Front-Side View The position of Front-Side view guiding line can be changed.
of Camera Image
Front View The position of front view guiding line can be changed.
• The confirmation and adjustment of the difference between
each camera can be performed.
Fine Tuning of Birds-Eye View
• The system changes to the ZOOM function by the operation
of shift and the ZOOM ratio of each camera can be changed.
CAUTION:
*: Never perform other operations for approximately 10 seconds after performing "Initialize Camera Image Calibration".
The status of signals inputted to around view monitor control unit can
be checked.
JSNIA1057GB
Connection Confirmation item list

Diagnosis item Display Description
• Input status of steering angle sensor is displayed by ON/OFF.
Steer. Angle Sensor ON/OFF • When all of steering signals 1, 2, and 3 are input, it is turned ON. It remains
ON until connection confirmation mode is stopped.
Input status of reverse signal inputted to around view monitor control unit is dis-
Reverse Sensor ON/OFF
played by ON/OFF in real time.
• Input status of vehicle speed signal inputted to around view monitor control
unit is displayed by ON/OFF.
Vehicle Speed Sensor ON/OFF
• When the vehicle speed signal is input, it is turned ON. It remains ON until con-
nection confirmation mode is stopped.
• The status of camera switch signal received via AV communication from AV
control unit is displayed by ON/OFF.
Camera Switch ON/OFF
• When the camera switch signal is received once, it is turned ON. It remains
Input status of ignition signal inputted to around view monitor control unit is dis-
IGN ON/OFF

A
The input type of steering angle sensor is displayed. (“Relative” is displayed on
Type of Steer. Angle Sensor Relative
this model.)
Type of Steer. Gear ratio 1 The type of steering gear ratio is displayed. (“1” is displayed on this model.)
B
Left or Right Steer. Left The steering position is displayed. (“Left” is displayed on this model.)
Rear Camera Image Output signal OK / NG The input status of rear camera image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time.
Rear Camera COMM Status OK / NG The communication status with rear camera is displayed by OK/NG in real time. C
The status of communication line with rear camera is displayed by OK/NG in real
Rear Camera COMM Line OK / NG
time.
Front Camera Image Output signal OK / NG The input status of front camera image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time. D
Front Camera COMM Status OK / NG The communication status with front camera is displayed by OK/NG in real time.
The status of communication line with front camera is displayed by OK/NG in real
Front Camera COMM Line OK / NG E
time.
Pass-Side Camera Image Output sig- The input status of side camera RH image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real
OK / NG
nal time.
The communication status with side camera RH is displayed by OK/NG in real F
Pass-Side Camera COMM Status OK / NG
time.
The status of communication line with side camera RH is displayed by OK/NG in
Pass-Side Camera COMM Line OK / NG
real time. G
The input status of side camera LH image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real
Dr-Side Camera Image Output signal OK / NG
time.
The communication status with side camera LH is displayed by OK/NG in real H
Dr-Side Camera COMM Status OK / NG
time.
The status of communication line with side camera LH is displayed by OK/NG in
Dr-Side Camera COMM Line OK / NG
real time. I
Calibrating Camera Image
• Perform the calibration of camera image caused by the incorrect
mounting position of each camera, etc. Always perform calibration J
after performing the following work.
- When each camera or each camera mount (door mirror, front grille,
etc.) is removed K
- When replacing around view monitor control unit
• When performing the calibration initialization, it can be set to the
NISSAN factory shipment condition.
Refer to AV-279, "CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW L
MONITOR) : Special Repair Requirement" for the calibration proce-
dure.
JSNIA1053GB
M
Adjustment range
Rotating direction : 31 patterns (16 on the
center) AV
Upper/lower direction : −99 – 99
Left/right direction : −99 – 99
O
Calibrating Camera Image item
Items Description
Rear Camera Performs the calibration of rear camera. P
Pass-Side Camera Performs the calibration of side camera RH.
Front Camera Performs the calibration of front camera.
Dr-Side Camera Performs the calibration of side camera LH.
Initialize Camera Image Calibration* The calibration can be initialized to the factory shipment setting.
CAUTION:

Correct Draw Line of Camera Image
The display position of guiding lines when displayed on the rear
view, front view, and front-side view can be changed.
Adjustment range
Rotating direction : 31 patterns
JSNIA1058GB
Correct Draw Line of Camera Image item

Items Description
Front View The position of Front view guiding line can be changed.

• The fine adjustment function of camera calibration can check and
adjust the difference between each camera.
• Fine adjustments can be performed for each camera. Move the
“+”-mark to select the camera by pressing the “CAMERA” switch.
• Perform the adjustment with the center dial and upper/lower/left/
right switches.
CAUTION:
Operate the center dial slowly because the changing of the
screen takes approximately 1 second.
NOTE:
• It can be initialized to the NISSAN factory shipment setting with
JSNIA1055GB
“Initialize Camera Image Calibration” of “Calibrating Camera
Image”.
• The adjustment value is cancelled in this mode by performing “Initialize Camera Image Calibration”.
Adjustment range
center)
Left/right direction : −99 − 99
ZOOM function
• The ZOOM ratio of camera can be changed when calibrating the
camera.
• It shifts to ZOOM function mode by shifting the selector lever to a
position other than the “R” position → “R” position → other than “R”
position in the “Fine Tuning of Birds-Eye View” mode.
• The changing of ZOOM ratio can be performed for each camera.
Move the “+”-mark to select the camera by pressing “CAMERA”
switch and press the left/right switch to change the ZOOM ratio.
NOTE:
• When the position is not correct in “Fine Tuning of Birds-Eye View”
mode, use this "ZOOM" function to adjust it.
JSNIA1059GB
• If this function is used, always adjust the upper/lower/left/right posi-
tion again on the “Fine Tuning of Birds-Eye View” screen.

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [SONAR CONTROL UNIT (WITH AROUND VIEW MONI-
TOR)]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [SONAR CONTROL UNIT (WITH AROUND VIEW
A
MONITOR)]
CONSULT-III Function (SONAR) INFOID:0000000003826573
B
DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown as follows:
C
Test mode Function
Ecu Identification Sonar control unit part number can be read.
D
Self Diagnostic Result Sonar control unit checks the conditions and displays memorized error.
Data Monitor Sonar control unit input/output data in real time.
Active Test Gives a drive signal to a load to check the operation. E
Work support Changes setting of each function.
ECU IDENTIFICATION F
Displays the part number of sonar control unit.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
For details, refer to AV-564, "DTC Index". G
DATA MONITOR
H
Monitor Item Display Description
On Around view monitor is ON. (sonar system is ON)
SONAR OPE
Off Around view monitor is OFF. (sonar system is OFF) I
On Buzzer is output condition.
BUZZER OUTPUT
Off Buzzer is not output condition.
J
ERROR When a sensor is abnormal.
LV.0 When a sensor is not detection.
CR SEN [FL]
The distance between the corner sensor and an obstacle is 60 cm (23.6 in) or more and K
CR SEN [FR] LV.2
less then 70 cm (27.5 in).
CR SEN [RL]
CR SEN [RR] The distance between the corner sensor and an obstacle is 40 cm (15.7 in) or more and
LV.3
less then 60 cm (23.6 in). L
LV.4 The distance between corner sensor and an obstacle less than 40 cm (15.7 in).
ACTIVE TEST M
Active test item Function

BUZZER This test is able to check buzzer operation. AV
SONAR SENSOR This test is able to check each sonar sensor operation.
WORK SUPPORT
O
Work support item Function
CORNER SEN DISTANCE SET Corner sensor warning buzzer distance is adjustable to 4 phases.
P
CORNER SEN DISTANCE SET
Corner sensor warning buzzer distance can be set to 4 phases as follows.
Warning item FARTHER FAR NORMAL NEAR

Second warning 70 – 80 cm (27.5 – 31.4 in) 60 – 70 cm (23.6 – 27.5 in) 50 – 60 cm (19.6 – 23.6 in) 40 – 50 cm (15.7 – 19.6 in)

TOR)]
Third warning 50 – 70 cm (19.6 – 27.5 in) 40 – 60 cm (15.7 – 23.6 in) 30 – 50 cm (11.8 – 19.6 in) 30 – 40 cm (11.8 – 15.7 in)
Fourth warning Less than 50 cm (19.6 in) Less than 40 cm (15.7 in) Less than 30 cm (11.8 in) Less than 30 cm (11.8 in)
The default of this model is “FAR”.

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [NAVIGATION (SINGLE MONITOR)]
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
B
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other C
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. D
E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of CON- F

SULT-III
When AV control unit is not transmitting or re-
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ceiving CAN communication signal for 2 sec- CAN communication system G
onds or more.

H
1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC
I
YES >> Refer to “LAN system”. Refer to LAN-22, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart". J
AV

Initial diagnosis of AV control unit.

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

SULT-III
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected AV control unit

When DTC U1010 is detected, replace AV control unit.
>> INSPECTION END

A
Replace the AV control unit if this DTC is displayed. Refer to AV-579, "Removal and Installation". B

• Integrates hard disk drive (HDD) allowing map data and music data to be C
stored.
signals from AV control unit. D
• AV control unit includes the audio, hands-free phone, voice control, navigation,
AV CONTROL UNIT to obtain necessary information for the vehicle information function. E
trol. F
parking brake).
ble.
G
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
I
U1310 Replace AV control unit
[U1310] circuit.
AV

Replace the AV control unit if this DTC is displayed. Refer to AV-579, "Removal and Installation".

stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
Cont Unit
U1200 FLASH- ROM Replace AV control unit
(FLASH-ROM).
[U1200]

A

stored.
trol. F
parking brake).
ble.
G
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
I
GYRO NO CONN Internal malfunction of AV control unit (gyrocompass dis-
[U1201] connection) is detected.
AV


stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
[U1216] detected.

A

stored.
trol. F
parking brake).
ble.
G
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
I
BLUETOOTH MODULE
Internal malfunction of AV control unit (Bluetooth module
U1217 CONN Replace AV control unit
connection malfunction) is detected.
[U1217]
J
AV


stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
HDD-CONN Internal malfunction of AV control unit (HDD connection
[U1218] malfunction) is detected.

A

stored.
trol. F
parking brake).
ble.
G
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
I
HDD-READ Internal malfunction of AV control unit (HDD read malfunc-
[U1219] tion) is detected.
AV


stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
XM SERIAL COMM Internal malfunction of AV control unit (satellite radio tuner
[U1220] communication error) is detected.

U121A AV CONTROL UNIT
A

stored.
trol. F
parking brake).
ble.
G
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
I
HDD-WRITE Internal malfunction of AV control unit (HDD write mal-
U121A Replace AV control unit
[U121A] function) is detected.
AV

U121B AV CONTROL UNIT

stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
HDD-COMM Internal malfunction of AV control unit (HDD communica-
U121B Replace AV control unit
[U121B] tion error) is detected.

U121C AV CONTROL UNIT
A

stored.
trol. F
parking brake).
ble.
G
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
I
HDD-ACCESS Internal malfunction of AV control unit (HDD access error)
U121C Replace AV control unit
[U121C] is detected.
AV

U121D AV CONTROL UNIT

stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
DSP CONN Internal malfunction of AV control unit (DSP connection
U121D Replace AV control unit
[U121D] error) is detected.

U121E AV CONTROL UNIT
A

stored.
trol. F
parking brake).
ble.
G
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
I
DSP COMM Internal malfunction of AV control unit (DSP communica-
U121E Replace AV control unit
[U121E] tion error) is detected.
AV

U121F AV CONTROL UNIT

stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
INTERNAL COMM Internal malfunction of AV control unit (internal communi- AV control unit power supply and
U121F
[U121F] cation error) is detected. ground circuit
1.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check AV control unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-372, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis
Procedure".

U1204 GPS
U1204 GPS
A
An intermittent error caused by strong radio interference may be detected unless any symptoms (GPS recep- B
tion error, etc.) occur. Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction occurs constantly. Refer to AV-579,
"Removal and Installation".
Part name Description C

stored.
• It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and is connected to each control D
satellite radio, and vehicle information functions. E
F
trol.
• It inputs the signals for driving status recognition (vehicle speed, reverse and G
parking brake).
ble.
H
I
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
GPS CONN Internal malfunction of AV control unit (GPS malfunction)
U1204
[U1204] is detected.
Replace AV control unit J
K
1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS
1. Delete the self-diagnosis results. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform the self-diagnosis again. L
3. Check that the DTC is detected again.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Replace AV control unit. M
NO >> The intermittent malfunction caused by strong radio interference can be detected.
AV

U1205 GPS
U1205 GPS
An intermittent error caused by strong radio interference may be detected unless any symptoms (GPS recep-

stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
GPS ROM Internal malfunction of AV control unit (GPS malfunction)

2. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform the self-diagnosis again.

U1206 GPS
U1206 GPS
A

stored.
F
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
H
I
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
GPS RAM Internal malfunction of AV control unit (GPS malfunction)
U1206
K
AV

U1207 GPS
U1207 GPS

stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
GPS RTC Internal malfunction of AV control unit (GPS malfunction)


A
B
unit.
C
chronizing).
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT • Auxiliary image signal is input from the auxiliary input jacks.
• Camera image signal input to around view monitor control unit. D
directly.
E
F
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
When either one of the following items is detected.
• front display unit power supply and ground circuit mal- • Front display unit power supply and
G
function is detected. ground circuit.
FRONT DISP CONN
[U1243]
tween front display unit and AV control unit. front display unit and AV control H
tween front display unit and AV control unit.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003826623 I
1.CHECK FRONT DISPLAY UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUITS

Check front display unit power supply and ground circuits. Refer to AV-372, "FRONT DISPLAY UNIT : Diagno- J
sis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 2. K
2.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS
L
M
Continuity
AV
11 70
M75 M88 Existed
22 71
4. Check continuity between front display unit harness connector and ground. O
Front display unit

Continuity P
Connector Terminals
Ground
11
M75 Not existed
22
YES >> GO TO 3.


(+)
Connector Terminal
When adjusting display bright-

M75 11 Ground
ness.
PKIB5039J

YES >> GO TO 4.
Check signal between front display unit harness connector and ground.
(+)
Connector Terminal

M75 22 Ground
ness.
PKIB5039J


U1244 GPS ANTENNA
U1244 GPS ANTENNA
A
B
GPS ANTENNA GPS signal is received and sent to AV control unit.
C
Display contents of D
CONSULT-III
GPS ANTENNA CONN
U1244 GPS antenna connection malfunction is detected. GPS antenna disconnection
[U1244] E
1.GPS ANTENNA CHECK F
Visually check GPS antenna and antenna feeder.

Is inspection result normal? G
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE H
1. Disconnect GPS antenna connector.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit terminal and ground. I
(+)
Voltage J
(Approx.)
Terminal
110 Ground 5.0 V K
NO >> Replace AV control unit. L
AV

U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA

SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA Satellite radio signal is received and sent to AV control unit.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
XM ANTENNA CONN Satellite radio antenna connection malfunction is detect-
U1258 Satellite radio antenna disconnection
[U1258] ed.
1.SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA CHECK

Visually check satellite radio antenna and antenna feeder.
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect satellite radio antenna connector.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit terminal and ground.
(+)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Terminal
108 Ground 5.0 V

A
U1300 is indicated when malfunction occurs in communication signal of multi AV system. Indicated simulta- B
Self-diagnosis results display item C
Display contents of Possible malfunction factor/Action to

DTC Description
CONSULT-III take
D
• AV COMM CIRCUIT When either one of the following items are detected: • AV control unit power supply and
U1300 [U1300] • AV control unit power supply and ground circuits mal- ground circuits.
U121F • INTERNAL COMM function are detected. • When there is no malfunction, AV
[U121F] • AV control unit malfunction are detected. control unit is malfunctioning. E
When either one of the following items are detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
malfunction are detected. and ground circuits. F
U1300 [U1300]
• malfunction is detected in the AV communication cir- • AV communication circuits be-
cuits between AV control unit and multifunction switch. tween AV control unit and multi-
[U1240]
• malfunction is detected in the AV communication signal function switch.
between AV control unit and multifunction switch. G
• AV COMM CIRCUIT tion are detected. ground circuits. H
U1300
[U1300] • malfunction is detected in the AV communication cir- • AV communication circuits be-
U1254
• IPOD CONN [U1254] cuits between AV control unit and iPod adapter. tween AV control unit and iPod
• malfunction is detected in the AV communication signal adapter.
between AV control unit and iPod adapter. I
• around view monitor control unit power supply and
ground circuits malfunction are detected. • Around view monitor control unit J
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
• malfunction is detected in the AV communication cir- power supply and ground circuits.
U1300 [U1300]
cuits between AV control unit and around view monitor • AV communication circuits be-
U125B • AROUND CAMERA
control unit. tween AV control unit and around
CONN [U125B]
• malfunction is detected in the AV communication signal view monitor control unit. K
between AV control unit and around view monitor con-
trol unit.
L
• sonar control unit power supply and ground circuit mal-
function are detected. • Sonar control unit power supply
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
• malfunction is detected in the AV communication cir- and ground circuits.
U1300 [U1300]
cuits between around view monitor control unit and so- • AV communication circuits be- M
U125C • SONAR CONN
nar control unit. tween around view monitor control
[U125C]
• malfunction is detected in the AV communication signal unit and sonar control unit.
between around view monitor control unit and sonar
control unit. AV
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
[U1300]
U1300
• SWITCH CONN Malfunction is detected in the AV communication circuits AV communication circuits between O
U1240
[U1240] between AV control unit and around view monitor control AV control unit and around view mon-
U1254
• IPod CONN [U1254] unit. itor control unit.
U125B
• AROUND CAMERA
CONN [U125B] P

B2700 CORNER SENSOR [FL]
Component Description
CORNER SENSOR The obstacle distance is detected. The signal is transmitted to the sonar control unit.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No. CONSULT-III indication DTC detection condition Troubleshooting

CORNER SENSOR [FL]
B2700 Corner sensor front left is malfunctioning. Replace corner sensor front LH
[B2700]

B2701 SENSOR HARNESS OPEN [CR-FL]
A
B
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC D

SENSOR HARNESS E
B2701 Corner sensor front LH harness circuit is open. Check corner sensor front LH circuit
OPEN [CR-FL] [B2701]

F
1.CHECK HARNESS CORNER SENSOR FRONT LH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
G
2. Disconnect sonar control unit connector and corner sensor connector.
3. Check continuity between sonar control unit harness connector and corner sensor (FL) harness connec-
tor.
H
Sonar control unit Corner sensor (FL)
Continuity
I
M44 3 E154 1 Existed
4. Check continuity between sonar control unit harness connector and ground.
J
Sonar control unit
Continuity
K
M44 3 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2. L
2.CHECK HARNESS CORNER SENSOR FRONT LH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between sonar control unit harness connector and corner sensor (FL) harness connector. M

Continuity AV
P

B2702 CORNER SENSOR [FR]
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CORNER SENSOR [FR]
B2702 Corner sensor front right is malfunctioning. Replace corner sensor front RH
[B2702]

B2703 SENSOR HARNESS OPEN [CR-FR]
A
B
C

SENSOR HARNESS E
B2703 Corner sensor front right harness circuit is open. Check corner sensor front RH circuit
OPEN [CR-FR] [B2703]

F
1.CHECK HARNESS CORNER SENSOR FRONT RH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
G
3. Check continuity between sonar control unit harness connector and corner sensor (FR) harness connec-
tor.
H
Sonar control unit Corner sensor (FR)
Continuity
I
J
Sonar control unit
Continuity
K
M44 4 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2. L
2.CHECK HARNESS CORNER SENSOR FRONT RH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between sonar control unit harness connector and corner sensor (FR) harness connector. M

Continuity AV
P

B2704 CORNER SENSOR [RL]
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CORNER SENSOR [RL]
B2704 Corner sensor rear left is malfunctioning. Replace corner sensor rear LH
[B2704]

B2705 SENSOR HARNESS OPEN [CR-RL]
A
B
C

SENSOR HARNESS E
B2705 Corner sensor rear left harness circuit is open. Check corner sensor rear LH circuit
OPEN [CR-RL] [B2705]

F
1.CHECK HARNESS CORNER SENSOR REAR LH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
G
3. Check continuity between sonar control unit harness connector and corner sensor (RL) harness connec-
tor.
H
Sonar control unit Corner sensor (RL)
Continuity
I
J
Sonar control unit
Continuity
K
M44 5 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2. L
2.CHECK HARNESS CORNER SENSOR REAR LH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between sonar control unit harness connector and corner sensor (RL) harness connector. M

Continuity AV
P

B2706 CORNER SENSOR [RR]
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CORNER SENSOR [RR]
B2706 Corner sensor rear right is malfunctioning. Replace corner sensor rear RH
[B2706]

B2707 SENSOR HARNESS OPEN [CR-RR]
A
B
C

SENSOR HARNESS E
B2707 Corner sensor rear right harness circuit is open. Check corner sensor rear RH circuit
OPEN [CR-RR] [B2707]

F
1.CHECK HARNESS CORNER SENSOR REAR RH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
G
3. Check continuity between sonar control unit harness connector and corner sensor (RR) harness connec-
tor.
H
Sonar control unit Corner sensor (RR)
Continuity
I
J
Sonar control unit
Continuity
K
M44 6 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2. L
2.CHECK HARNESS CORNER SENSOR REAR RH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between sonar control unit harness connector and corner sensor (RR) harness connector. M

Continuity AV
P

AV CONTROL UNIT
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 34
YES >> GO TO 2.
M80 19
Battery power supply 22 OFF Battery voltage
M87
24
M80 7
ACC power supply ACC Battery voltage
M87 25
YES >> GO TO 3.
21
Ground M87 OFF Existed
23
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 34

YES >> GO TO 2. A
B
Check voltage between front display unit harness connector and ground.
C
Is inspection result normal? D
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between front display unit and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT E

1 G
13
Is inspection result normal? H
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH I
1.CHECK FUSE J

K
Is the inspection result normal? L
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT M

AV
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT P
2. Disconnect multifunction switch connector.

BOSE AMP.
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 8
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
2. Disconnect BOSE amp. connector.
iPod ADAPTER
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 34
YES >> GO TO 2.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.) A
B
C
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003826668
D
1.CHECK FUSE
E
Battery 34
F
Ignition switch ACC 19
Ignition switch ON 4
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS H
Check voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground.
I
ACC power supply B46 4 ACC Battery voltage J
Ignition power supply B46 3 ON Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 3. K
NO >> Check harness between around view monitor control unit and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT L
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground.
M
AV
NO >> Repair harness or connector. O
SONAR CONTROL UNIT (WITH AROUND VIEW MONITOR)
SONAR CONTROL UNIT (WITH AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000003826669
P
1.CHECK FUSE


YES >> GO TO 2.
2. Check voltage between sonar control unit harness connector and ground.
Sonar control unit Voltage

Connector Terminal Ground (Approx.)
M44 13 Battery voltage

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace sonar control unit power supply harness.
2. Disconnect sonar control unit connector.
Sonar control unit

Continuity
M44 24 Existed
NO >> Repair or replace sonar control unit ground harness.

A
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT C


Continuity E
Front display unit

Continuity
M75 17 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL I
(+)
Connector Terminal
L
play color bar by
M75 17 Ground
selecting “Color Spec- M
trum Bar” on DISPLAY
DIAGNOSIS screen.
JSNIA1029ZZ
AV



Continuity
Front display unit

Continuity
M75 6 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Connector Terminal
play color bar by
M75 6 Ground
selecting “Color Spec-
DIAGNOSIS screen.
JSNIA1030ZZ


A
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT C


Continuity E
Front display unit

Continuity
M75 18 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL I
(+)
Connector Terminal
L
play color bar by
M75 18 Ground
selecting “Color Spec- M
DIAGNOSIS screen.
JSNIA1031ZZ
AV



Continuity
Front display unit

Continuity
M75 19 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Connector Terminal
M75 19 Ground
SKIB3603E


A
Transmits the display area of RGB image displayed by AV control unit with RGB area (YS) signal to front dis- B
play unit.
C
2. Disconnect front display unit connector and AV control unit connector. D
Front display unit AV control unit E

Continuity
F
Front display unit G

Continuity
M75 9 Not existed
H
YES >> GO TO 2.
I
2. Turn ignition switch ON. J
(+) K
Reference value
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
L
At RGB image displayed 5.0 V
M
M75 9 Ground
At AUX image displayed
AV
PKIB4948J
Is inspection result normal? O

P

In composite image (DVD image, AUX image, camera image), transmit the vertical synchronizing (VP) signal
and horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal from front display unit to AV control unit so as to synchronize the
RGB images displayed with AV control unit such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc.


Continuity
Front display unit

Continuity
M75 8 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Connector Terminal
M75 8 Ground
SKIB3603E


A
In composite image (DVD image, AUX image, camera image), transmit the vertical synchronizing (VP) signal B
1.CHECK CONTINUITY VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

E
Continuity
G
Front display unit
Continuity
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL

1. Connect front display unit connector and AV control unit connector. J
K
(+)
M
M75 20 Ground
AV
SKIB3598E

O
P

Transmits the image signal of external device from auxiliary input jacks to front display unit.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect auxiliary input jacks connector and front display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between auxiliary input jacks harness connector and front display unit harness connec-
tor.
Auxiliary input jacks Front display unit

Continuity

Continuity
M154 7 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AUX IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect auxiliary input jacks connector and front display unit connector.
(+)
Connector Terminal
M154 7 Ground At AUX image displayed
SKIB2251J


A
• AV control unit transmits the mode change signal to BOSE amp. B


E
Continuity

G
BOSE amp.
Continuity
YES >> GO TO 2.

1. Connect BOSE amp. connector. J
3. Check voltage between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.
K
(+)
Voltage
BOSE amp. (−)
(Approx.)
B41 17 Ground 8.5 V
M
AV

The eject signal is output to AV control unit when the eject switch of multifunction switch is pressed.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CD EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

3. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.

Continuity
Continuity
M72 14 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M89 85 Ground 3.3 V

A
Supply power from AV control unit to microphone. The microphone transmits the sound voice to the AV control B
unit.
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN AV CONTROL UNIT AND MICROPHONE CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and microphone connector. D
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and microphone harness connector.
AV control unit Microphone E

Continuity
26 4
F
M87 27 R17 2 Existed
28 1
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground. G
AV control unit
Continuity H
Connector Terminals
Ground
26
M87 Not existed
28 I
YES >> GO TO 2.
K
L
(+) (−)
Voltage
AV control unit AV control unit
(Approx.)
M87 26 M87 27 5.0 V
YES >> GO TO 3. AV
3.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL O
4. Check signal between AV control unit harness connector. P

(+) (−)
AV control unit AV control unit Condition Reference value
M87 28 M87 27 Give a voice.
PKIB5037J


CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
• Around view monitor control unit supplies to the front camera, rear camera and side camera. And then it B
superimpose the images from each camera and outputs then to the front display unit.
• Superimpose the guiding lines, predicted course line and sonar indicator to the camera image that outputs to
the front display unit.
• Around view monitor control unit performs the reception/transmission of communication signal with each C
camera.
D
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector and front display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and front display unit har-
ness connector.
F
Around view monitor control
Front display unit
unit Continuity
G
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground. H

unit Continuity I
Ground
Connector Terminal
B46 27 Not existed
J
YES >> GO TO 2.
K
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector and front display unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. L
3. Check signal between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground.
(+) M
(−) Condition Reference value
unit

At camera image display
JSNIA0834GB
B46 27 Ground
Other than camera im-

age display
JSNIA0835GB

NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit.

STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
• Steering angle sensor signal 1, 2 detects the turning direction and quantity of the steering and transmits it to B
the around view monitor control unit.
• Steering angle sensor signal 3 detects the neutral position of the steering and transmits it to around view
monitor control unit.
• Around view monitor control unit performs the correction of neutral position with sensor signal 1, 2, 3 and C
vehicle speed signal.
D
1.CHECK CONTINUITY STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector and steering angle sensor connector.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and steering angle sensor
harness connector.
F
Steering angle sensor
unit Continuity
G
14 3
B46 15 M37 4 Existed H
16 5
I
unit Continuity
Connector Terminals
J
Ground
14
B46 15 Not existed
K
16
YES >> GO TO 2. L
2.CHECK SIGNAL SENSOR SIGNAL
M
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector.
3. Check voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground.
AV
(+)
Around view monitor control Voltage
O
unit (−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminals
14 P
B46 15 Ground 5.0 V
16
YES >> GO TO 3.


2. Connect steering angle sensor connector.
(+)
unit
Connector Terminals
Turn the steering to the right
SKIB3827E
A: Sensor signal 1
B: Sensor signal 2
14, 15 Ground
B46 Turn the steering to the left
SKIB3828E
A: Sensor signal 1
B: Sensor signal 2
Turn the steering around the

16 Ground
neutral position
SKIB3829E
A: Sensor signal 3
B: Sensor signal 1
NO >> Replace steering angle sensor.

A
Transmits the steering switch signal to AV control unit. B

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT C

D
Continuity
E
F
AV control unit
Continuity
G
M80 6 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2. H
Check spiral cable. I
YES >> GO TO 3.
J
1. Connect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector. K
L
(+) (−)
Voltage
(Approx.)
M80 6 M80 15 5.0 V
Is inspection result normal? AV
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH O

JSNIA0112GB

Condition
ENTER switch ON 2003 – 2043

14 MENU DOWN switch ON 318 – 324
M303 M303 17 SOURCE switch ON 0

15
VOL UP switch ON 120 – 122

A

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT C

D
Continuity
E
F
AV control unit
Continuity
G
M80 16 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2. H
Check spiral cable. I
YES >> GO TO 3.
J
1. Connect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector. K
L
(+) (−)
Voltage
(Approx.)
M80 16 M80 15 5.0 V
Is inspection result normal? AV
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH O

JSNIA0112GB

Condition


15

A

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT C

D
Continuity
E
YES >> GO TO 2. F
G
Check spiral cable.
YES >> GO TO 3. H
1. Connect AV control unit connector. I
AV control unit J
Continuity
M80 15 Not existed
K
YES >> GO TO 4.
2. Check steering switch. Refer to AV-397, "Component Inspection". M
NO >> Replace steering switch. AV
O
JSNIA0112GB


Condition


15

FRONT CAMERA COMMUNICATION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
camera.
D
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector and front camera connector.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and front camera harness
connector.
F
Front camera
unit Continuity
G
B45 45 E155 6 Existed

unit Continuity I
Ground
Connector Terminal
B45 45 Not existed
J
YES >> GO TO 2.
K
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector and front camera connector.
(+) M
unit
O
“CAMERA” switch is ON or shift
B45 45 Ground
position is “R”.
P
JSNIA0836GB

YES >> Replace around view monitor control unit.
NO >> Replace front camera.

FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
• Around view monitor control unit supplies to the front camera, rear camera and side camera. And then it
• Around view monitor control unit performs the reception/transmission of communication signal with each
camera.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY FRONT CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

connector.

Front camera
unit Continuity
44 2
B45 E155 Existed
46 1

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminal
B45 46 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE FRONT CAMERA POWER SUPPLY
3. Check voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector.
(+)
(−) Condition
unit (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
“CAMERA” switch is ON or
B45 46 Ground 6.0 V
shift position is “R”.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CONTINUITY FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
connector.

Around view monitor control A

Front camera
unit Continuity
41 3 B
B45 E155 Existed
42 4
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground. C

unit Continuity D
Ground
Connector Terminals
B45 41, 42 Not existed
Is inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL F
3. Check signal between around view monitor control unit harness connector.
(+) (−) H
Around view monitor control Around view monitor control
Condition Reference value
unit unit
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal I
J
B45 41 B45 42
K
JSNIA0834GB

L
AV

REAR CAMERA COMMUNICATION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
camera.

2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector and rear camera connector.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and rear camera harness
connector.

Rear camera
unit Continuity

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminal
B46 35 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector and rear camera connector.
(+)
unit
Connector Terminal

B46 35 Ground
JSNIA0836GB

NO >> Replace rear camera.

REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
camera.
D
1.CHECK CONTINUITY REAR CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector terminals 36, 38 and rear
camera harness connector terminals 8, 7.
F
Rear camera
unit Continuity
G
36 8
B46 D111 Existed
38 7 H
Around view monitor control I

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminal
B46 36 Not existed
J

YES >> GO TO 2. K
2.CHECK VOLTAGE REAR CAMERA POWER SUPPLY
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector and rear camera connector. L
M
(+)
(−) Condition
unit (Approx.) AV
Connector Terminal
B46 36 Ground 6.0 V O
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. P
3.CHECK CONTINUITY REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

connector.


Rear camera
unit Continuity
39 5
B46 D111 Existed
40 1

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminals
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
(+) (−)
unit unit
B46 39 B46 40
JSNIA0834GB


SIDE CAMERA LH COMMUNICATION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
camera.
D
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector and door mirror (driver side) connector.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and door mirror (driver
side) harness connector.
F
Around view monitor control Door mirror
unit (driver side) Continuity
G
B45 47 D3 3 Existed

unit Continuity I
Ground
Connector Terminal
B45 47 Not existed
J
YES >> GO TO 2.
K
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector and door mirror (driver side) connector.
(+) M
unit
O
B45 47 Ground
P
JSNIA0836GB

NO >> Replace side camera LH.

SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
camera.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY SIDE CAMERA LH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT


Door mirror (driver side)
unit Continuity
48 6
B45 D3 Existed
50 18

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminal
B45 48 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE SIDE CAMERA LH POWER SUPPLY
(+)
(−) Condition
unit (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B45 48 Ground 6.0 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CONTINUITY SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT


unit Continuity
51 5 B
B45 D3 Existed
52 17

unit Continuity D
Ground
Connector Terminals
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL F
(+) (−) H
unit unit
J
B45 51 B45 52
K
JSNIA0834GB

L
AV

SIDE CAMERA RH COMMUNICATION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
camera.

2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector and door mirror (passenger side) connector.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and door mirror (passenger

unit (passenger side) Continuity

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminal
B46 33 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector and door mirror (passenger side) connector.
(+)
unit
Connector Terminal

B46 33 Ground
JSNIA0836GB

NO >> Replace side camera RH.

SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
camera.
D
1.CHECK CONTINUITY SIDE CAMERA RH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect control unit connector and door mirror (passenger side) connector.
F
G
32 18
B46 D33 Existed
34 6 H

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminal
B46 34 Not existed
J

YES >> GO TO 2. K
2.CHECK VOLTAGE SIDE CAMERA RH POWER SUPPLY
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector and door mirror (passenger side) connector. L
M
(+)
(−) Condition
unit (Approx.) AV
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CONTINUITY SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT



29 5
B46 D33 Existed
30 17
around view monitor control

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminals
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL
(+) (−)
unit unit
B46 29 B46 30
JSNIA0834GB


BUZZER CIRCUIT
BUZZER CIRCUIT
A
The sonar control unit outputs the buzzer signal when the rear sonar detects the obstacle. B
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000003826728
1.SONAR CONTROL UNIT ACTIVE TEST C

1. Select “BUZZER” of sonar control unit active test item.
2. Check the buzzer operation.
D
BUZZER
Test item Condition
On : Buzzer is operation. E
Off : Buzzer is not operation.
>> INSPECTION END F
G
1.CHECK BUZZER POWER SUPPLY
2. Check voltage between buzzer harness connector and ground. H
(+)
Voltage
Buzzer (−) I
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B231 1 Ground Battery voltage
J
YES >> GO TO 2.
K
2.CHECK HARNESS BUZZER SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect sonar control unit connector and buzzer connector. L
3. Check continuity between sonar control unit harness connector and buzzer harness connector.
Sonar control unit Buzzer M

Continuity
AV
Sonar control unit O

Continuity
M44 23 Not existed
P
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SIGNAL SONAR CONTROL UNIT
1. Connect sonar control unit connector and buzzer connector.
2. Check signal between sonar control unit harness connector and ground.

BUZZER CIRCUIT
(+)
Sonar control unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal
NOTE:
Waveform period changes due to
the distance to an obstacle.
M44 23 Ground When buzzer operation
SKIB8943E

NO >> Replace sonar control unit.

AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [NAVIGATION (SINGLE MONITOR)]
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A

AV CONTROL UNIT
B

CONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM C

VHCL SPD SIG D

PKB SIG
E
ILLUM SIG
Ignition switch F
— On
ON
IGN SIG
Ignition switch
— Off
ACC G
REV SIG
H
TERMINAL LAYOUT
K
JPNIA0004ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
L
Terminal
Description
Condition M
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1 AV
(V)
ON
O
Ignition
2 3
(P) (L)
ON P
SKIB3609E

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
4 5
Sound signal rear LH Output switch Audio output
(V) (LG)
ON
SKIB3609E

0V
switch.
Keep pressing MENU UP
1.0 V
switch.
Ignition Keep pressing MENU
6 15 2.0 V
Steering switch signal A Input switch DOWN switch.
(P) (B)
ON
Keep pressing switch 3.0 V
Keep pressing ENTER

4.0 V
switch.
Ignition
7
(V)
ACC

Ground Illumination signal Input OFF
10 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
11 12
Sound signal front RH Output switch Audio output
(R) (G)
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
13 14
(BR) (Y)
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
15 Steering switch signal
(B) ground
ON
Keep pressing VOL DOWN
0V
switch.
Keep pressing VOL UP
Ignition 1.0 V
16 15 switch.
Steering switch signal B Input switch
(L) (B) 2.0 V
ON Keep pressing switch.

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition B
19
(Y)
OFF
Ignition C
21
(B)
ON
Ignition D
22
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
23 E
(B)
ON
Ignition
24
(Y)
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage F
OFF
Ignition
25
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — Battery voltage G
(V)
ACC
Ignition
26
(G) H
ON
27 Ground Microphone ground — ON — 0V
Ignition
28
(R) J
ON
PKIB5037J
K
Ignition
35
(G)
ON
L
Parking brake ON 0V
Ignition
M
36
ON
AV
JSNIA0007GB
Ignition R position 12.0 V O

37
ON

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
NOTE:
(destination unit).
Ignition
Ground Input switch
(R) (8-pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25MPH)
ON
JSNIA0012GB
Ignition
41
Ground Control signal 1 — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
Ignition
42
(B)
ON
Ignition
43
(B)
ON
44
(SB) Driver's Audio Stage OFF 8.5 V
ON
— — — —
(G) (H) Output
— — — —
(R) (L) Output
— — — —
(LG) (H) Output
— — — —
(V) (L) Output
52 Input/
— CAN–H — — —
(L) Output
53 Input/
— CAN–L — — —
(P) Output
Ignition
(B) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
JSNIA1029ZZ
Ignition
(W) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
JSNIA1030ZZ

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
63 play color bar by selecting C
(R) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
JSNIA1031ZZ D
64 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
65
(G) F
ON
SKIB3603E
G
66 — Shield — — — —
H
Ignition
67
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Output switch At camera image or AUX
(B) I
ON image display.
PKIB4948J J
K
Ignition
(R) (HP) signal
ON
L
SKIB3601E
Ignition
(W) signal AV
ON
SKIB3598E
O
Ignition P
(BR) (CONT→DISP) brightness.
ON
PKIB5039J

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
Ground Input switch
(Y) (DISP→CONT) brightness.
ON
PKIB5039J
72 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
(R) (G) ed.
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(BR) (Y) ed.
ON
SKIB3609E
81 — Shield — — — —
85 Pressing the eject switch 0V

86 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
(R) (W) ed.
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
102
Ground SW ground — switch — 0V
(BR)
ON
Ignition
(B) (W) ed.
ON
SKIB3609E

Ignition
ACC

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition B
Not connected to satellite
108 Ground Satellite antenna signal Input switch 5.0 V
antenna connector.
ACC
109 — Shield — — — — C
Ignition
Not connected to GPS an-
110 Ground GPS antenna signal Input switch 5.0 V
tenna connector.
ACC D
111 — Shield — — — —
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION (SINGLE MONITOR) - E

INFOID:0000000003826733
NOTE:
F
AV

AV CONTROL UNIT
SWITCH virtually.
JCNWM1033GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1034GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1035GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1036GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1037GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1038GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1039GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1040GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1041GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1042GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1043GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1044GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1045GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1046GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1047GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1048GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1049GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1050GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1051GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1052GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1053GB
Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000003826734
When the ambiance temperature becomes extremely low or extremely high, or when HDD is malfunctioning,
AV control unit displays the message and limits the AV control unit function.
FAIL-SAFE CONDITIONS
• When the ambiance temperature is −20°C (-4°F) or lower, or when it is 70°C (158°F) or higher
• when HDD is malfunctioning

AV CONTROL UNIT
Display
The messages displayed on fail-safe conditions are as shown below: A
JPNIA0414GB D
Fail-safe mode Display (display of the fail-safe condition) E

HDD system is experiencing problems due to extreme low temperature.
When HDD temperature is low
Normal operation will resume when temperature rises.
HDD system is experiencing problems due to extreme high temperature. F
When HDD temperature is high
Normal operation will resume when temperature drops.
HDD system is not functioning.
When HDD is malfunctioning
Please contact your dealer for assistance. G
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS
Function When Fail-safe Function is activated

H
Operation Only multifunction switch (preset switch) can be operated.

Air conditioner • LED of multifunction switch (preset switch) illuminates.
Display I
• Aimed temperature, blow angle, and flow rate are displayed in simplified mode.
Operation Only ON/OFF and volume control operations by multifunction switch (preset switch) are possible.
Audio
Display No display (“Fail-safe mode” is displayed) J
Operation Image tone cannot be controlled.
Camera
Display Cannot be superimposed. (warning display, tone control display)
Hands-free phone Operation Cannot be operated. K
Navigation Operation Cannot be operated.
Self diagnosis The display in simplified mode of fail-safe condition L
CONSULT-III diagnosis Cannot be operated.
Ability Operation Mode

There is an ability operation mode for Fail-safes due to low or high ambiance temperature. M
If HDD data can be read, fail-safe is shown, then normal displays are displayed only for functions which can be
operated.
AV
RELEASE CONDITIONS OF FAIL-SAFE
Fail-safe is released on following conditions and normal mode is restored.
When the temperature of HDD is low or high O
If the ambient temperature becomes out of fail-safe condition range, normal mode is restored.
If the malfunction disappears, normal mode is restored. P
NOTE:
• If fail-safe mode due to HDD malfunction is seen continuously, replace AV control unit.
• If fail-safe mode due to HDD malfunction is seen temporarily, check the “Error History” of Confirmation/
Adjustment mode. If this is normal, then continue the normal operation, observing the function. (It might be a
temporary malfunction of HDD.)

AV CONTROL UNIT
Self-diagnosis results display item

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010] AV-340, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1201 Gyro NO CONN [U1201] AV-343, "DTC Logic"
U1217 BLUETOOTH CONN [U1217] AV-345, "DTC Logic"
U1218 HDD CONN [U1218] AV-346, "DTC Logic"
U1219 HDD READ [U1219] AV-347, "DTC Logic"
U1220 XM SERIAL COMM [U1220] AV-348, "DTC Logic"
U121A HDD WRITE [U121A] AV-349, "DTC Logic"
U121B HDD COMM [U121B] AV-350, "DTC Logic"
U121C HDD ACCESS [U121C] AV-351, "DTC Logic"
U121D DSP CONN [U121D] AV-352, "DTC Logic"
U121E DSP COMM [U121E] AV-353, "DTC Logic"
U121F INTERNAL COMM [U121F] AV-354, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1204 GPS COMM [U1204] AV-355, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1205 GPS ROM [U1205] AV-356, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1206 GPS RAM [U1206] AV-357, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1207 GPS RTC [U1207] AV-358, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1244 GPS ANTENNA CONN [U1244] AV-361, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1258 XM ANTENNA CONN [U1258] AV-362, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U121F • INTERNAL COMM [U121F]
U1254 • IPod CONN [U1254]
U125B • AROUND CAMERA CONN [U125B]
U125C • SONAR CONN [U125C]

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
JPNIA0006ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.) G
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
Ground Ground — switch — 0V H
(B)
ON
Ignition
2
(P) I
OFF
Ignition
3
(L) J
ACC
4 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
5 K
Ground AUX image ground — switch — 0V
(R)
ON
Start confirmation/adjust- L
Ignition
Ground RGB signal (G: green) Input switch
ON M
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
JSNIA1030ZZ
AV
7 — Shield — — — —
O
Ignition
(R) (HP) signal
ON
P
SKIB3601E

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
9
(B) At camera image display
ON
PKIB4948J
Ignition
Ground Input switch
ON
PKIB5039J
Ignition
(W) display
ON
SKIB2251J
Ignition
13
(B)
ON
14 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
15
Ground AUX image signal Input switch AUX image display
(G)
ON
SKIB2251J
Ignition
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
JSNIA1029ZZ
Ignition
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
JSNIA1031ZZ

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
19 C
(G)
ON
SKIB3603E D
E
Ignition
(W) signal
ON
F
SKIB3598E
21 — Shield — — — —
G
Ignition H
ON
I
PKIB5039J
23 — Shield — — — —
J
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION (SINGLE MONITOR) -
INFOID:0000000003826880
NOTE: K
AV

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
SWITCH virtually.
JCNWM1033GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1034GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1035GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1036GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1037GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1038GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1039GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1040GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1041GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1042GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1043GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1044GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1045GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1046GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1047GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1048GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1049GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1050GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1051GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1052GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1053GB

BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP.
A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
JSNIA1223ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name G
Output
H
Ignition
(Y) (G) speaker LH
ON
I
SKIB3609E
Ignition
Output switch Audio output K
(SB) (V) speaker RH
ON
SKIB3609E L
Ignition M
(L) (P) speaker LH
ON
AV
SKIB3609E
O
Ignition
(O) (W) er LH
ON P
SKIB3609E

BOSE AMP.
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
(LG) (Y) speaker RH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
11
(GR)
OFF
Ignition
12
(B)
ON
Ignition
(Y) (G) er
ON
SKIB3609E

17
ON
Ignition
18 32
Sound signal front LH Input switch Audio output
(P) (L)
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
19 20
(R) (G)
ON
SKIB3609E

BOSE AMP.
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
21 22 C
(V) (SB)
ON
SKIB3609E D
E
Ignition
23 33
(BR) (Y)
ON
F
SKIB3609E
Ignition
25 G
(L)
ACC
H
Ignition
(V) (LG) er RH
ON I
SKIB3609E
J
Ignition
31
(GR)
ACC
K
INFOID:0000000003826887
NOTE: L
AV

BOSE AMP.
SWITCH virtually.
JCNWM1033GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1034GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1035GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1036GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1037GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1038GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1039GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1040GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1041GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1042GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1043GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1044GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1045GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1046GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1047GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1048GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1049GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1050GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1051GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1052GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1053GB

IPOD ADAPTER
IPOD ADAPTER
A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
JSNIA0618ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.) G
+ – Signal name
Output
H
Ignition
(R) (G) ed.
ON I
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(BR) (Y) ed.
ON
SKIB3609E
L
Ignition
3
(O)
ACC M
— — — —
(V) (L) Output
Ignition AV
5
(Y)
OFF
Ignition O
8
(W)
ON

IPOD ADAPTER
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

9
JPNIA0462GB
NOTE:

10
JPNIA0462GB
Ignition
11
(L)
ON
Ignition
(R) (W) ed.
ON
SKIB3609E
15 — Shield — — — —
— — — —
(LG) (H) Output
Ignition
17
(B)
ON
19 — Shield — — — —
Ground Input switch
(SB) tion signal
Ignition
22
(W)
ON
Ignition
(B) (W) ed.
ON
SKIB3609E

IPOD ADAPTER
INFOID:0000000003826889 A
NOTE:
SWITCH virtually. B
AV
JCNWM1033GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1034GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1035GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1036GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1037GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1038GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1039GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1040GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1041GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1042GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1043GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1044GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1045GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1046GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1047GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1048GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1049GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1050GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1051GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1052GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1053GB

TERMINAL LAYOUT
JSNIA0833ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
(B)
ON
Ignition
2
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
3
(G)
ON
Ignition
4
(LG)
ACC
Ignition Lighting switch is OFF. 0V
5
Ground Illumination signal Input switch
OFF
NOTE:
(destination unit).
Ignition
Ground Input switch
(V) (8-pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25 MPH)
ON
SKIA6649J

7
ON
Ignition
13
(B)
ON

Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
C
SKIB3827E D
A: Sensor signal 1
Ignition B: Sensor signal 2
14
Ground Sensor signal 1 Input switch
(GR) E
ON
F
Turn the steering to the left
SKIB3828E G
A: Sensor signal 1
B: Sensor signal 2
I
SKIB3827E
J
A: Sensor signal 1
15
(SB)
ON
K
Turn the steering to the left L
SKIB3828E
A: Sensor signal 1 M
B: Sensor signal 2
AV
Ignition
16 Turn the steering around the
(L)
neutral position
O
ON
SKIB3829E
A: Sensor signal 3 P
B: Sensor signal 1
17 Input/
— AV communication signal (H) — — —
(W) Output
18 Input/
— AV communication signal (L) — — —
(P) Output

Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
21 Input/
(O) Output
22 Input/
(V) Output
Ignition
23 24 Auxiliary infrared LED power “CAMERA” switch is ON or
Output switch 5.5 V
(LG) (G) supply shift position is “R”.
ON
Ignition JSNIA0834GB
27
(W)
ON
Other than camera image

display
JSNIA0835GB
28 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
29 30 Side camera passenger side “CAMERA” switch is ON or
Input switch
(R) (Y) image signal shift position is “R”.
ON
JSNIA0834GB
31 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
32 Side camera passenger side
(W) ground
ON
Ignition
33 Side camera passenger side Input/ “CAMERA” switch is ON or
Ground switch
(BR) communication signal Output shift position is “R”.
ON
JSNIA0836GB
Ignition
34 Side camera passenger side “CAMERA” switch is ON or
Ground Output switch 6.0 V
(L) power supply shift position is “R”.
ON

Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
35 Rear camera communication Input/ “CAMERA” switch is ON or C
Ground switch
(W) signal Output shift position is “R”.
ON
JSNIA0836GB D
Ignition
36 “CAMERA” switch is ON or
Ground Rear camera power supply Output switch 6.0 V
(G) shift position is “R”.
ON E
37 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
38
Ground Rear camera ground — switch — 0V F
(L)
ON
G
Ignition
39 40 “CAMERA” switch is ON or
Rear camera image signal Input switch
(Y) (BR) shift position is “R”.
ON H
JSNIA0834GB
Ignition
41 42 “CAMERA” switch is ON or J
Front camera image signal Input switch
(L) (BR) shift position is “R”.
ON
JSNIA0834GB K
43 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
44
Ground Front camera ground — switch — 0V
L
(Y)
ON
M
Ignition
45 Front camera communication Input/ “CAMERA” switch is ON or
Ground switch
(W) signal Output shift position is “R”. AV
ON
JSNIA0836GB
O
Ignition
Ground Front camera power supply Output switch 6.0 V
ON
P
Ignition
47 Side camera driver side com- Input/ “CAMERA” switch is ON or
Ground switch
(BR) munication signal Output shift position is “R”.
ON
JSNIA0836GB

Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
48 Side camera driver side power “CAMERA” switch is ON or
(L) supply shift position is “R”.
ON
49 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
50 Side camera driver side
(W) ground
ON
Ignition
51 52 Side camera driver side image “CAMERA” switch is ON or
Input switch
(R) (Y) signal shift position is “R”.
ON
JSNIA0834GB

INFOID:0000000003826897
NOTE:

SWITCH virtually. A
AV
JCNWM1033GB P

JCNWM1034GB

AV
JCNWM1035GB

JCNWM1036GB

AV
JCNWM1037GB

JCNWM1038GB

AV
JCNWM1039GB

JCNWM1040GB

AV
JCNWM1041GB

JCNWM1042GB

AV
JCNWM1043GB

JCNWM1044GB

AV
JCNWM1045GB

JCNWM1046GB

AV
JCNWM1047GB

JCNWM1048GB

AV
JCNWM1049GB

JCNWM1050GB

AV
JCNWM1051GB

JCNWM1052GB

AV
JCNWM1053GB


Around view monitor operating (sonar operating). On
Ignition switch
SONAR OPE Around view monitor non-operating (sonar non-operat-
ON Off
ing).
Ignition switch Buzzer is output condition. On

BUZZER OUTPUT
ON Buzzer is not output condition. Off
When a sensor is abnormal. ERROR
When a sensor is not detection. LV.0
The distance between the corner sensor and an obstacle
LV.2
Ignition switch is 50 cm (19.6 in) or more and less then 60 cm (23.6 in).
CR SEN [FL]
ON
LV.3
is 30 cm (11.8 in) or more and less then 50 cm (19.6 in).
The distance between corner sensor and an obstacle
LV.4
less than 30 cm (11.8 in).
LV.2
CR SEN [FR]
ON
LV.3
LV.4
LV.2
CR SEN [RL]
ON
LV.3
LV.4
LV.2
CR SEN [RR]
ON
LV.3
LV.4

TERMINAL LAYOUT
A
JSNIA0303ZZ
D
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal No. E
Description
(Wire color) Value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output F
Ignition
G
3 12 Corner sensor signal front “CAMERA” switch is ON or
Input switch
(W) (B) LH shift position is “R”.
ON
H
JSNIA0837GB
Ignition
Input switch
(R) (B) RH shift position is “R”. J
ON
JSNIA0837GB
K
Ignition L
5 12 Corner sensor signal rear “CAMERA” switch is ON or
Input switch
(L) (B) LH shift position is “R”.
ON
M
JSNIA0837GB
AV
Ignition
Input switch
(Y) (B) RH shift position is “R”.
ON
O
JSNIA0837GB
Ignition P
12
Ground Sensor ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
Ignition
13
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — 12.0 V
(V)
ACC
18
— K-line (CONSULT-III) — — — —
(P)

Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
19 Input/
— AV communication (H) — — —
(G) Output
20 Input/
— AV communication (L) — — —
(R) Output
NOTE:
Ignition
23
Ground Buzzer drive signal Output switch When buzzer operation
(GR)
ON
SKIB8943E
Ignition
24
(B)
ON

INFOID:0000000003826898
NOTE:

SWITCH virtually. A
AV
JCNWM1033GB P

JCNWM1034GB

AV
JCNWM1035GB

JCNWM1036GB

AV
JCNWM1037GB

JCNWM1038GB

AV
JCNWM1039GB

JCNWM1040GB

AV
JCNWM1041GB

JCNWM1042GB

AV
JCNWM1043GB

JCNWM1044GB

AV
JCNWM1045GB

JCNWM1046GB

AV
JCNWM1047GB

JCNWM1048GB

AV
JCNWM1049GB

JCNWM1050GB

AV
JCNWM1051GB

JCNWM1052GB

AV
JCNWM1053GB
P
• Sonar control unit has diagnosis function which can detect corner sensor malfunction and sensor harness
disconnection.
• It transmits the malfunction status to around view monitor control unit and informs the malfunction to the user
by displaying continuously red sonar indicator.

DTC Display item Malfunction is detected when... Reference

CORNER SENSOR [FL]
B2700 Corner sensor front left is malfunctioning. AV-364, "DTC Logic"
[B2700]
SENSOR HARNESS OPEN [CR-FL]
B2701 Corner sensor front left harness circuit is open. AV-365, "Diagnosis Procedure"
[B2701]
CORNER SENSOR [FR]
B2702 Corner sensor front right is malfunctioning. AV-366, "DTC Logic"
[B2072]
SENSOR HARNESS OPEN [CR-
B2703 FR] Corner sensor front right harness circuit is open. AV-367, "Diagnosis Procedure"
[B2703]
CORNER SENSOR [RL]
B2704 Corner sensor rear left is malfunctioning. AV-368, "DTC Logic"
[B2704]
SENSOR HARNESS OPEN [CR-RL]
B2705 Corner sensor rear left harness circuit is open. AV-369, "Diagnosis Procedure"
[B2705]
CORNER SENSOR [RR]
B2706 Corner sensor rear right is malfunctioning. AV-370, "DTC Logic"
[B2706]
B2707 RR] Corner sensor rear right harness circuit is open. AV-371, "Diagnosis Procedure"
[B2707]
NOTE:
“TIME” means the following.
• 0: Means detected malfunction at present. (From malfunction detection to turning ignition switch OFF)
• 1–39: Means detected malfunction in past.

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [NAVIGATION (SINGLE MONITOR)]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
B
RELATED TO NAVIGATION
C
• “MULTI AV” is displayed on system D
Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-330,
"CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
• All switches cannot be operated. E
Procedure".
SULT-III is initialized.
F
Multifunction switch or preset switch malfunction.
Only specified switch cannot be operat- Perform multifunction switch and preset switch self-di-
ed. agnosis function. Refer to AV-317, "Diagnosis Descrip-
tion". G
There is malfunction in the CONSULT- Perform detected DTC self-diagnosis.
III self-diagnosis result. Refer to AV-330, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
Fuel economy display, vehicle set-
Ignition signal circuit malfunction (AV control unit). H
ting operation is abnormal. There is no malfunction in the self-diag-
Refer to AV-372, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Pro-
nosis results.
cedure".
On the setting display select “system AV control unit malfunction. I
Guide sound is not heard. sound (guide sound volume, etc.),” and Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-579, "Exploded
confirm that guide sound is ON. View".
RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE J

• Check that the cellular phone is corresponding type (Bluetooth™
correspond) when the hands-free related
• There is a case that malfunction occurs due to the version change of the phone type, etc. even though it is a K
cellular phone. L
™
Simple Check for Bluetooth Communication
If cellular phone and AV control unit cannot be connected with Bluetooth™ communication, following proce-
dure allows the technician to judge which device has malfunction. M

2. Start CONSULT-III, then start Windows®. AV
if CONSULT-III* would be displayed on the device name. O
NOTE: P
Repair the cellular phone first, then perform diagnosis.
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom


AV control unit malfunction.
phone connection. (no connec-
Repeat the registration of cellular phone. Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-579, "Exploded
tion is displayed on the display
View".
at the guide.)
• Hands-free phone operation can be
made, but the communication cannot
be established. AV control unit malfunction.
Hands-free phone cannot be
• Hands-free phone operation can be Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-579, "Exploded
established.
performed, however, voice between View".
each other cannot be heard during the
conversation.
The other party's voice cannot
— Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-579, "Exploded
be heard by hands-free phone.
View".
Originating sound is not heard Sound operation function is normal. Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-579, "Exploded
by the other party with hands- View".
free phone communication. Microphone signal circuit malfunction.
RELATED TO AROUND VIEW MONITOR
Probable malfunction location / Action to

Symptoms Check items
take
Ignition signal circuit (around view monitor
control unit).
“Camera Cont.” of “Confirmation/Adjustment” can be
Refer to AV-375, "AROUND VIEW MONI-
selected.
TOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Proce-
It does not switch to camera im- dure".
age even when the “CAMERA” • Around view monitor control unit power
switch is pressed or the selec- supply and ground circuits.
tor lever is in the reverse posi- Refer to AV-375, "AROUND VIEW MONI-
tion. “Camera Cont.” of “Confirmation/Adjustment” cannot TOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Proce-
be selected. dure".
• AV communication circuits.
(MULTI AV)".
• Camera image signal circuit.
Only superimposing is displayed.
(Only the image displayed by AV control unit is dis-
• RGB (YS) area signal circuit.
played)
The screen switches when Refer to AV-381, "Diagnosis Procedure".
pressing the “CAMERA” switch • Communication circuit between AV control
or shifting the selector lever to unit and front display unit.
the reverse position, however, Refer to AV-330, "CONSULT-III Function
all views are not displayed. Superimposing is not displayed. (MULTI AV)".
• Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal cir-
cuit malfunction.
Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit
malfunction between AV control unit and
Camera image is rolling. AUX image is rolling
front display unit.
It cannot be switched to rear
view monitor even when the se-
The front view is displayed normally. Reverse signal circuit. (AV control unit)
lector lever is in the reverse po-
sition.
The predicted course line dis-
The “Steer. Angle Sensor” is not turned ON at “Con- Steering angle sensor signal circuits. Refer
play in front view and rear view
nection Confirmation” of “Camera Cont.” to AV-391, "Diagnosis Procedure".
is malfunctioning.

take A
• Front camera image signal circuit.
• Image Output Signal: NG
• Front camera power supply and ground
• The front view screen is not Check the item Front • COMM Status: NG
circuits. B
displayed. Camera in “Connection • COMM Line: NG
Refer to AV-400, "Diagnosis Procedure"
• The front of Birds-Eye view Confirmation” mode of
screen is not displayed. “Camera Cont.” • Image Output Signal: OK
Front camera communication signal circuit.
• COMM Status: NG
• COMM Line: NG
Refer to AV-399, "Diagnosis Procedure". C
• Rear camera image signal circuit.
• Rear camera power supply and ground
• The rear view screen is not Check the item Rear • COMM Status: NG D
circuits.
• The rear of Birds-Eye view Confirmation” mode of
screen is not displayed. “Camera Cont.” • Image Output Signal: OK Rear camera communication signal
• COMM Status: NG circuits. Refer to AV-402, "Diagnosis Proce- E
• COMM Line: NG dure".
• Side camera RH image signal circuit.
Check the item Pass- • Side camera RH power supply and ground
• The front-side screen is not • COMM Status: NG
circuits.
F
Side Camera in “Con- • COMM Line: NG
displayed. Refer to AV-409, "Diagnosis Procedure".
nection Confirmation”
• The side RH of Birds-Eye
mode of “Camera • Image Output Signal: OK
view screen is not displayed. Side camera RH communication circuit. Re-
Cont.” • COMM Status: NG G
fer to AV-408, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• COMM Line: NG
• Side camera LH image signal circuit.
• COMM Status: NG
• Side camera LH power supply and ground H
Check the item Dr-Side circuits.
The side LH of Birds-eye view Camera at “Connection • COMM Line: NG
screen is not displayed. Confirmation” mode of
“Camera Cont.” • Image Output Signal: OK
Side camera LH communication circuit. Re- I
• COMM Status: NG
• COMM Line: NG
When shift position is other
than “R” the front-side and front J
screen or the Birds-Eye view Vehicle speed signal (around view monitor
—
and front screen remain dis- control unit).
playing even if the vehicle
speed increases.
K
Around view monitor does not Certain States restrict the operation so that
start other than shift position — around view monitor does not start other
“R” than at shift position "R". L
RELATED TO CAMERA ASSISTANCE SONAR

M
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location / Action to take
• Corner sensor malfunction in corresponding area
The malfunction is detected in only 1 in-
• Corner sensor harness circuit in corresponding area
dicator AV
Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis of sonar system.
(Always displayed in red)
Refer to AV-337, "CONSULT-III Function (SONAR)".
The malfunction is detected in • Corner sensor ground circuit.
the sonar indicator Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis of sonar system. O
(Always displayed in red) Refer to AV-337, "CONSULT-III Function (SONAR)".
The malfunction is detected in all 4 indi-
• Sonar control unit power supply and ground circuits.
cators (Always displayed in red)
Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis of multi AV system.
P
The buzzer is turned ON when perform- Replace sonar control unit. Refer to AV-603, "Exploded
ing “Buzzer” in “Active test” of “Sonar”. View"
The sonar indicator is normal,
but the buzzer does not sound The buzzer is not turned ON when per-
forming “Buzzer” in “Active test” of “So- Replace buzzer. Refer to AV-606, "Exploded View".
nar”.


• All RGB images are not shown.
• “MULTI AV” is displayed on system se- Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
lection screen when the CONSULT-III Refer to AV-330, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
is started.
RGB image is not shown.
AV control unit power supply and ground circuit.
• “MULTI AV” is not displayed on system
selection screen when the CONSULT-
dure".
III is started.
RGB signal (R: red) circuit malfunction.
Light blue (Cyan) tint.
Color of RGB image is not RGB signal (G: green) circuit malfunction.
Purple (Magenta) tint.
proper. Refer to AV-378, "Diagnosis Procedure".
RGB signal (B: blue) circuit malfunction.
Screen looks yellowish.
RGB synchronizing signal circuit malfunction.
RGB screen is rolling. —
RELATED TO VOICE CONTROL

Voice sounds at “Voice Microphone Test”
Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-579, "Exploded
The voice cannot be controlled of Confirmation/Adjustment mode.
View".
even if the voice control screen
is displayed. Voice does not sound at “Voice Micro-
Microphone circuit malfunction.
phone Test” of Confirmation/Adjustment
mode.
Steering switch “SOURCE”, “MENU UP”,
Steering switch malfunction.
“MENU DOWN” operates, but “ ” does Replace steering switch.
not operate.
The voice cannot be controlled
Steering switch's “SOURCE”, “MENU
(Voice control screen is not dis- Steering switch signal A circuit malfunction.
played). UP”, “MENU DOWN”, “ ” does not oper- Refer to AV-393, "Diagnosis Procedure".
ate.
Steering switch signal GND circuit malfunction.
All steering switches do not work.
Refer toAV-397, "Diagnosis Procedure".
RELATED TO AUDIO

Disk eject signal circuit malfunction.
The disk cannot be removed. —
• Amp. ON signal circuit.
No sound from all speakers. • BOSE amp. power supply and ground circuits.
Refer to AV-374, "BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure".
• Woofer power supply and ground circuits.
Audio sound is not heard. Sound is not heard from woofer. • Sound signal (woofer) circuits.
• Woofer amp. ON signal circuit.
Sound is not heard from center speaker. Sound signals center speaker circuit.
Sound is heard only from specific places. Sound signal circuits of suspect system.
—

A
1. Check satellite radio antenna (antenna base) B
mounting nut for looseness.
Satellite radio is not received. NOTE:
There is no malfunction in the CON- Tightening torque: 6.5 N·m (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb)
SULT-III self-diagnosis result. 2. Visually check for satellite radio antenna feeder.
C
3. Replace the satellite radio antenna (antenna base).
4. Replace the AV control unit. D
• Antenna amp. ON signal circuit.
• Antenna feeder.
E
®
RELATED TO iPod
nose the vehicle. If no malfunction is detected, replace the iPod harness. F
NOTE:
G
• iPod sound signal circuits between AV control unit and
The sound of iPod® is not iPod adapter. H
heard. • iPod sound signal circuits between iPod® and iPod
adapter.
It does not change to iPod There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. I
played when it comes to iPod Connected to iPod®. iPod connection recognition signal circuit.
J
mode.
tery. adapter.
K
Accessing the iPod® is unavail- L

M
None of the steering switch operations work. AV
Only specified switch cannot be operated.
Replace steering switch.
Steering switch's “SOURCE”, “MENU UP”, “MENU DOWN” O
Steering switch signal A circuit malfunction.
and “ ” switches do not work. Refer to AV-393, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Steering switch's “VOL UP”, “VOL DOWN”, “ ” and “ ” Steering switch signal B circuit malfunction.
P
switches do not work. Refer to AV-395, "Diagnosis Procedure".
RELATED TO AUXILIARY INPUT

NOTE:

No vocal sound is heard when Vocal sound is heard when other modes AUX sound signal circuit malfunction between auxiliary
AUX mode is selected. are selected. input jacks and AV control unit.
Image is not displayed when AUX image signal circuit malfunction.
Camera image is displayed.
AUX mode is selected. Refer to AV-384, "Diagnosis Procedure".

A
• For Navigation system operation information, refer to Navigation system Owner's Manual. B
• Vehicle operation information, refer to Owner's Manual.
BASIC OPERATIONS
C
No image is displayed. The system in the video mode. Press <DISC-AUX> to change the mode. D
The volume is not set correctly, or it is turned off. Adjust the volume of voice guidance.
No voice guidance is available. Or E
The volume is too high or too low. Voice guidance is not provided for certain streets
(roads displayed in gray).
No map is displayed on the screen. A screen other than map screen is displayed. Press <MAP>.
F
Some pixels in the display are dark- This condition is an inherent characteristic of liquid G
lected. hicle is driven. then operate the navigation system.
H
NOTE:
Locations stored in the Address Book and other memory functions may be lost if the vehicle's battery is dis-
connected or becomes discharged. If this occurs, service the vehicle's battery as necessary and re-enter the
I
information in the Address Book.
Related to basic operation J

The interior of the vehicle is too noisy. Close the windows or have other occupants quiet. K
The volume of your voice is too low. Speak louder
The volume if your voice is too loud. Speak softer
L
Your pronunciation is unclear Speak clearly
You are speaking before the voice recognition made is Press and release “ ” switch on the steering
The system does not switch, and speak a command after the tone M
ready
recognize your com- sounds
mand.
or Make sure to speak a command within 8 seconds
8 seconds or more have passed after you pressed and
The system recognizes
released “ ” switch on the steering switch.
after you press and release “ ” switch on the AV
your command incor- steering switch.
rectly
Only a limited range of voice commands is usable for Use a correct voice command appropriate for the
each screen. current screen O
If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fan speed
is automatically lowered and voice commands
The second of the fan od the air conditioner is too loud. can be recognized more easily.
Lower the fan speed as necessary or set the air P
conditioner to “Auto”.
Related to item choice

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, fol-
low the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error.
Where the solutions are listed b number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem
is resolved.

Symptom/ error message Solution

1. Ensure that the command format is valid.
2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise
level.
Displays “COMMAND NOT REC-
OGNIZED” or the system fails to in- 3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.
terpret the command correctly. NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then command should be tried with these
in place.
1.Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed
The system consistently selects by giving the Addressbook Directory or Phone Directory command.
the wrong voicetag
2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.
resolves.
Symptom Solution
el in the vehicle.
4.Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster
System fails to interpret the com- on),
1.Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can
The system consistently selects be confirmed by using the “List Names” command.
the wrong voicetag
RELATED TO AUDIO
NOTE:


Check if the CD/CF was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.
B
temperature. C
Check if the CD/CF is protected by copyright. F
Poor sound quality Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.
It takes a relatively long time before If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD/CF, or if it is a multi session disc, some
H
I
J
NOTE:
the signal. K
L
RELATED TO VEHICLE ICON

M
This is because the quantity of the displayed in-
formation is reduced so that the screen does
Names of roads differ between Plan not become too crowded. There is also a
chance that names of the roads may be dis- This is not a malfunction. AV
View and Birdview™. played multiple times, and the names appear-
ing on the screen may be different because of
a processing procedure.
The vehicle was transported after the ignition
O
Drive the vehicle for a while on a road where
switch was pressed off, for example, by a ferry
GPS signals can be received.
or car transporter.
The vehicle icon is not displayed in
the correct position. The position and direction of the vehicle icon P
This is not a malfunction. Drive the vehicle for
may be incorrect depending on the driving en-
a while to automatically correct the position
vironments and the levels of positioning accu-
and direction of the vehicle icon.
racy of the navigation system.
When the vehicle is traveling on a Because the new road is not stored in the map
Updated road information will be included in
new road, the vehicle icon is located data, the system automatically places the vehi-
the next version of the map data.
on another road nearby. cle icon on the nearest road available.

The screen does not switch to the
The daytime screen was set the last time the Set the screen to the night screen mode using
night screen even after turning on
headlights were turned on. <Day/Night> when you turn on the headlights.
the headlights.
The map does not scroll even when The current location map screen is not dis-
Press <MAP>.
the vehicle is moving. played.
The current location map screen is not dis-
The vehicle icon is not displayed. Press <MAP>.
played.
Drive the vehicle for a while (at approximately
When using tire chains or replacing the tires, 19 MPH for about 30 minutes) to automatical-
speed calculations based on the speed sensor ly correct the vehicle icon position.
The location of the vehicle icon is may be incorrect. If this does not correct the vehicle icon posi-
misaligned from the actual position. tion, contact an INFINITI dealer.
The map data has a mistake or is incomplete
(the vehicle icon position is always misaligned
in the same area).
RELATED TO ROUTE CALCULATION AND VISUAL GUIDANCE

Waypoints are not included in Waypoints that you have already passed are not included in If you want to go to that waypoint
the auto reroute calculation. the auto reroute calculation. again, you need to edit the route.
Set the destination and perform route
Route calculation has not yet been performed.
calculation.
Route information is not dis- You are not driving on the suggested route. Drive on the suggested route.
played. Route guidance is set to off. Turn on route guidance.
Route information is not provided for certain types of roads
The auto reroute calculation (or
detour calculation) suggests Route calculations took priority conditions into consider-
the same route as the one pre- ation, but the same route was calculated.
viously suggested.
A maximum of 5 waypoints can be set
Five waypoints are already set on the route, including ones on the route. If you want to go to 6 or
A waypoint cannot be added.
that you have already passed. more waypoints, perform route calcu-
lations multiple times as necessary.
Reset the destination to a main or or-
Roads near the destination cannot be calculated.
dinary road, and recalculate the route.
The starting point and destination are too close. Set a more distant destination.
The suggested route is not dis- Divide your trip by selecting one or two
played. The starting point and destination are too far away. intermediate destinations, and per-
form route calculations multiple times.
There are time restricted roads (by the day of the week, by Set [Use Time Restricted Roads] to
time) near the current vehicle location or destination. off.
A route is managed by sections between waypoints. If you
The part of the route that you passed the first waypoint, the section between the starting
have already passed is deleted. point and the waypoint is deleted. (It may not be deleted de-
pending on the area.)
If there are restrictions (such as one-way streets) on roads
Adjust the location of the starting of
close to the starting point or destination, the system may
the starting point or destination.
suggest an indirect route.
An indirect route is suggested.
The system may suggest an indirect route because route
calculation does not take into consideration some areas
such as narrow streets (gray roads.)

A
The landmark information does
Updated information will be included
not correspond to the actual in- This may be caused by insufficient or incorrect map data.
in the next version of the data.
formation.
The suggested route does not B
Set the starting point, waypoints and
exactly connect to the starting There is no data for route calculation closes to these loca-
destination on a main road, and per-
point, waypoints, or destinations.
form route calculation.
tion.
C
RELATED TO VOICE GUIDANCE
Symptom Possible cause Possible solution D

Voice guidance is only available at certain intersections
marked with? In some case, voice guidance is not avail- This is not a malfunction.
able even when the vehicle should make a turn. E
Voice guidance is not available Go back to the suggested route or request
The vehicle has deviated from the suggested route.
route calculation again
Voice guide is set to off. Turn on voice guidance. F
Route guidance is set to off. Turn on voice guidance.
The guidance contact does not
The contact of voice guidance may vary, depending on
correspond to the actual condi-
the types of intersections at which turn are made.
Follow all traffic rules and regulations. G
tion.
RELATED TO TRAFFIC INFORMATION

H
The traffic information is not set to on. Set the traffic information to on.
I
You are in an area where traffic information is not avail- Scroll to an area where traffic information is avail-
able able
The traffic information is
not displayed You have not subscribed to XM NavTraffic or, your sub-
Check your subscription status of XM NavTraffic. J
scription to XM NavTraffic has expired.
The map scale is set at a level where the display of icons Check that the map scale is set at a level in which
is impossible. the display of icons is possible.
K
With the automatic de- The automatic detour search is not intended for
tour route search ON, There is no faster route compared to the current route, avoiding traffic jams. It searches for the fasted
no detour route is set to based on the road network and traffic information. rote taking into consideration such things as traffic
avoid congested areas. jams. L
The route does not Observe the actual road condition and follow the
avoid road section with The navigation system is designed not to avoid this instructions on road for detour when necessary. If
traffic information stat- event because the actual period of closure may differ the road closure is for certain, use detour function
ing it is closed due to from the declared roadwork period. and set the detour distance to avoid the closed M
road construction. road section.
Traffic information dis-
Observe the actual road conditions and regula- AV
played differs from in-
Other media may use different information sources. tions. Always observe safe driving practices and
formation from other
follow all traffic regulations.
media (e.g. radio).

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [NAVIGATION (SINGLE MONITOR)]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Service Manual.
WARNING:
ness connectors.
WARNING:
PKIA0306E

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [NAVIGATION (SINGLE MONITOR)]
PKIA0307E
AV

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [NAVIGATION (SINGLE MONITOR)]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
PBIC0191E

AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [NAVIGATION (SINGLE MONITOR)]

AV CONTROL UNIT
B
REMOVAL
C
JSNIA1450ZZ
F
1: AV control unit
DISASSEMBLY G
JSNIA1500ZZ

4. Bracket RH
REMOVAL
P
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
REMOVAL
JSNIA1451ZZ
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA1538ZZ
1. Bracket
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
D
JSNIA1456ZZ
E

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-11, "Removal and Installation". G
INSTALLATION H
AV

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
JSNIA1457ZZ
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION

FRONT SQUAWKER
FRONT SQUAWKER
A
D
JSNIA1458ZZ
E
1. Front squawker

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove speaker grille. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation". G
INSTALLATION H
AV

REAR SQUAWKER
REAR SQUAWKER
JSNIA1459ZZ
1. Rear squawker
REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage side finisher upper. Refer to INT-28, "Exploded View".
INSTALLATION

CENTER SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
A
D
JSNIA1460ZZ
E
1. Center speaker

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove center speaker grille. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". G
INSTALLATION H
AV

WOOFER
WOOFER
JSNIA1461ZZ
1. Woofer clamp
2. Woofer
REMOVAL
3. Remove harness clip and connector.
4. Remove woofer.
INSTALLATION

BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP.
A
REMOVAL B
JSNIA1462ZZ E
1. BOSE amp.
DISASSEMBLY F
I
JSNIA1539ZZ
1. BOSE amp.
2. Bracket J
K
REMOVAL
2. Remove BOSE amp. mounting nuts. L
INSTALLATION M
AV

ANTENNA BASE
ANTENNA BASE
JSNIA1463ZZ
1. Antenna rod
2. Antenna base
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
REMOVAL
2. Remove antenna base mounting nut.
INSTALLATION

CAUTION:

A
REMOVAL B
DISASSEMBLY
C
JSNIA1464ZZ
F
1. Cluster lid D
G
REMOVAL H
3. Disconnect connector and remove multifunction switch. I
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal. J
AV

PRESET SWITCH
PRESET SWITCH
REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA1102ZZ
1. Clock 2. Cluster lid C 3. Preset switch
REMOVAL
2. Remove preset switch mounting screws.
3. Disconnect connector and remove preset switch.
1. Clock
2. Preset switch
A. Screw
B. Screw
C. Screw
JSNIA1481ZZ
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
to get caught in between AV control unit and preset switch.

IPOD ADAPTER
IPOD ADAPTER
A
D
JSNIA1465ZZ
E
1. iPod adapter

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove front display unit with bracket. Refer to AV-580, "Removal and Installation". G
4. Disconnect connector and remove iPod adapter. H
INSTALLATION
I
AV

IPOD CONNECTOR
IPOD CONNECTOR
JSNIA1466ZZ
1. iPod connector
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

A
D
JSNIA1467ZZ
E

F
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION H
AV

MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA0132ZZ
1. Microphone
REMOVAL
1. Remove map lamp assembly. Refer to INT-23, "Exploded View".
bly.
JSNIA0132ZZ
INSTALLATION

GPS ANTENNA
GPS ANTENNA
A
Harness Layout INFOID:0000000003928783 B
AV
JSNIA1468GB

GPS ANTENNA
REMOVAL
1. Remove instrument panel. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
2. Remove GPS antenna mounting screw.
3. Remove GPS antenna (1).
JSNIA1482ZZ
INSTALLATION

A
D
JPNIA0898ZZ
E
1. Around view monitor control unit

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove front seat (LH side). Refer to MIR-91, "DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Exploded View". G
3. Remove around view monitor control unit mounting screws.
4. Disconnect connector and remove around view monitor control unit. H
INSTALLATION
I
2. Perform camera image calibration. Refer to AV-279, "CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW
MONITOR) : Special Repair Requirement".
3. Perform predicted course line center position adjustment. Refer to AV-278, "PREDICTED COURSE LINE J
CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Requirement".
CAUTION:
Perform the calibration and perform the writing to the around view monitor control unit when remov-
ing and replacing each camera, removing the camera mounting parts (front grille, door mirror, etc.) K
and replacing the around view monitor control unit.
AV

FRONT CAMERA
FRONT CAMERA
JSNIA1469ZZ
1. Front camera
2. Rivet
3. Front camera finisher
Refer to GI-3, "Contents" for symbols in the figure.
REMOVAL
1. Remove front camera finisher.
2. Remove front camera mounting rivet.
3. Remove front camera.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ing and replacing each camera, removing the camera mounting parts (front grille, door mirror, etc.)

REAR CAMERA
REAR CAMERA
A
JSNIA1470ZZ F
1. Rear camera

G
REMOVAL
H
3. Remove rear camera mounting screws and rear camera harness connector. I
4. Remove rear camera.
INSTALLATION
J
K
CAUTION:
and replacing the around view monitor control unit. L
AV

SIDE CAMERA LH
SIDE CAMERA LH
JPNIA0900ZZ
1. Side camera (LH)

2. Side camera finisher assembly
REMOVAL
1. Remove glass mirror (driver side). Refer to MIR-91, "DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Exploded View".
2. Remove screws (A), and actuator connector, and then actuator
(1).
JSNIA1471ZZ
3. Remove door mirror cover. Refer to MIR-91, "DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Exploded View".
4. Remove screws (A) and connector (1), and then remove side
camera finisher assembly (LH).
JSNIA1472ZZ
5. Remove side camera (LH) mounting screws

6. Remove side camera (LH).
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

SIDE CAMERA RH
SIDE CAMERA RH
A
D
JPNIA0902ZZ
E
Side camera finisher assembly
1.
[infrared LED (auxiliary lighting)]
2. Side camera (RH)
F
REMOVAL G
1. Remove glass mirror (passenger side). Refer to MIR-91, "DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Exploded View".
2. Remove screws (A) and actuator connector, and then actuator H
(1).
JSNIA1473ZZ
K
4. Remove screws (A) and connector (1), and then remove Side
L
camera finisher assembly (RH).
AV
JSNIA1474ZZ
O
5. Remove side camera (RH) screws.
6. Remove side camera (RH).
P
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

SIDE CAMERA RH

A
D
JSNIA1475ZZ
E
1. Sonar control unit

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove AV control unit. Refer to AV-579, "Removal and Installation". G
2. Remove screws and connector, and then sonar control unit.
INSTALLATION
AV

SONAR SENSOR
SONAR SENSOR
FRONT
FRONT : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003928797
JSNIA1476ZZ
1. Sonar sensor (front)
FRONT : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003928798
REMOVAL
1. Remove fender protector. Keep a service area. Refer to EXT-25, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Exploded
View".
2. Remove sonar sensor connector.
3. Press the sonar sensor (1) outside the front bumper, pressing
the metal clips on the back to the direction of black arrows.
JSNIA1477ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install the bumper when the pawl engages.
CAUTION:
The connector direction is within ±10° from the horizontal posi-
tion when assembling the bumper.
A : Horizontal position
a : 10°
JSNIA0325ZZ
REAR

SONAR SENSOR
REAR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003928799
JSNIA1478ZZ
D
1. Sonar sensor (rear)

E
REAR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003928800
REMOVAL F
the metal clips on the back to the direction of black arrows. G
JSNIA1477ZZ
J
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
The connector direction is within ±10° from the horizontal posi- K
A : Horizontal position L
a : 10°
JSNIA0325ZZ
AV

BUZZER
BUZZER
JSNIA1479ZZ
1. Buzzer
REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage side lower finisher (RH). Refer to INT-28, "Exploded View".
2. Remove buzzer mounting bolt.
3. Disconnect connector and remove buzzer.
INSTALLATION

A
REMOVAL B
DISASSEMBLY
C
JSNIA1480ZZ
F
1. Spiral cable
G
REMOVAL H
3. Remove steering angle sensor. I
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal. J
AV

ANTENNA FEEDER
ANTENNA FEEDER
JSNIA1468GB

< BASIC INSPECTION > [NAVIGATION (TWIN MONITOR)]
BASIC INSPECTION A
Work Flow (Multi AV) INFOID:0000000003940607
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
JSNIA0732GB M

• Reference 2··· Refer to AV-801, "DTC Index". AV
DETAILED FLOW
O
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc- P
tion occurred).
YES >> GO TO 2.
tion (MULTI AV)".
NOTE:
Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
>> GO TO 5.
Table".
>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR
NOTE:
YES >> GO TO 1.

Work Flow (Sonar) INFOID:0000000003940608
A
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JSNIA0732GB
L
• Reference 1··· Refer to AV-678, "CONSULT-III Function (SONAR)".

• Reference 3··· Refer to AV-1028, "Symptom Table". M
DETAILED FLOW
1.INTERVIEW AND SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION AV
tion occurred). O
YES >> GO TO 2. P
1. Connect CONSULT-III and perform a self-diagnosis for “SONAR”. Refer to AV-678, "CONSULT-III Func-
tion (SONAR)".
NOTE:
Skip to step 4 of the diagnosis procedure if “SONAR” is not displayed.

Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
>> GO TO 5.
Table".
>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR
2. Perform a self-diagnosis for “SONAR” with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
YES >> GO TO 1.

A
B
nal. C

D

Refer to the following for details. E
Repair Requirement". F
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description G
INFOID:0000000003825409
When around view monitor control unit is replaced, the center position of predicted course line shall be cor-
rected. H
I
Refer to the following for details. J
Repair Requirement". K
PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT
PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description L
INFOID:0000000003825411
Adjust the center position of the predicted course line of the around view monitor if it is shifted.
M
PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair
Requirement INFOID:0000000003825412
AV
1.STEERING OPERATION
Steer the steering wheel to the leftmost and rightmost ends.
O
>> GO TO 2.
2.DRIVING
P
>> END
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR)

CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Description
INFOID:0000000003825413
• Perform the calibration and perform the writing to the around view monitor control unit when removing and
replacing each camera, removing the camera mounting parts (front grille, door mirror, etc.) and replacing the
• Align the white lines on the road near the vehicle at the boundary of each camera image by this camera cal-
ibration. The white lines far from the vehicle may not be aligned at the boundary of each camera image. The
farther the line, the greater the difference is.
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Special Repair Re-
Calibration flowchart
Following the flowchart shown in the figure, perform the calibration.
JSNIA1342GB
NOTE:
In the un-match display, the un-match camera position is indicated
as “ ” on the birds-eye view.
JSNIA1052GB
Calibration procedure
1.AROUND VIEW MONITOR SCREEN CONFIRMATION

Check that there is the un-match display in any camera.
Is the un-match display visible? A
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4.
B
JSNIA1052GB
2.CHECK THAT AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT IS REPLACED D
Check that the around view monitor control unit is replaced.

Is the around view monitor control unit replaced? E
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 5.
3.RELEASE UN-MATCH DISPLAY (PERFORM ONLY WHEN THE AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL F
UNIT IS REPLACED)
1. Select “Camera Cont.” of Confirmation/ Adjustment mode, and then set to “Calibrating Camera Image”
mode. G
2. Press the“ENTER” switch of the multifunction switch on each
screen of “Rear Camera”, “Front Camera”, “Dr-Side Camera”,
“Pass-Side Camera”. H
CAUTION:
• Do never operate the center dial and up/down/left/right
switches. Only press the “ENTER” switch.
• Never perform “Initialize Camera Image Calibration”. I
3. Display the around view monitor screen, and check that there is
no malfunction such as a difference between each camera
image. J
Is there a malfunction? JSNIA1053GB
YES >> Calibration end

NO >> GO TO 1. K
4.PERFORM SIMPLIFIED CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT BY “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW”
1. Put target line 1 on the ground beside each axle using packing tape, etc.
L
2. Put target lines 2 equal to the vehicle total length + approximately 1.0 m (39.3 in) from the vehicle side
(right and left) at approximately 30 cm (11.8 in) away from the vehicle (make the line as parallel with the
vehicle as possible).
M
Preparation of simplified target line
AV
JSNIA0927ZZ

1. Target lines 1 2. Target lines 2

A. Approx. 30 cm (11.8in) B. Approx. 1.0 m (39.3 in)
3. Select “Camera Cont.” of Confirmation/ Adjustment mode, and then set to “Fine Tuning of Birds-Eye View-
mode.
4. Select left and right cameras by pressing the “CAMERA” switch, and perform the following confirmation.
- Check that target line 1 is aligned with the marker on the screen. Overlap the line aligned to the marker
with the upper/lower switches if necessary.
- Check if there is a difference between target lines 2 between cameras. Adjust target lines 2 to be straight
lines by operating the center dial and left/right switches if necessary.
CAUTION:
• Never adjust the front camera and rear camera. Only adjust the right and left cameras.
• Operate the center dial slowly because the changing of the screen takes approximately 1 sec-
ond.
Simplified target line adjustment method
JSNIA0929ZZ
1. Target lines 1 2. Target lines 2 3. Marker for target line 1

Crosshairs cursor (mark indicated
4. Boundary between cameras 5.
the selected camera)
Adjustment method for target lines 1 Adjustment method for target lines 2
A. B.
(right) (right)
5. Adjust left and right cameras. Check that the difference between target line 1 and the marker on the
screen, and between target lines 2 is solved.
NOTE:
Is the difference corrected?
YES >> Finish the writing to around view monitor control unit by pressing “ENTER” switch.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE”
Preparation of target line
1. Hang a string with a weight as shown in the figure. Put the points FM0, RM0 (mark) on the ground at the
center of the vehicle front end and rear end with white packing tape or a pen.
2. Route the vinyl string under the vehicle, and then pull and fix it on the point approximately 1.0 m (39.9 in)
to the front and rear of the vehicle through the points FM0 and RM0 using packing tape.

A
E
JSNIA1509ZZ
1. Thread 2. Weight 3. Point FM0 (mark)

F
4. Point RM0 (mark) 5. Packing tape (to fix the vinyl string) 6. Vinyl string
3. Put the points FM and RM (mark) 75 cm (29.5 in) from the points FM0 and RM0 individually.
4. Route the vinyl string through the points FM and RM using a triangle scale, and then fix it at approximately G
1.5 m (59 in) on both sides with packing tape.
5. Put the points FL, FR, RL, and RR (mark) to both right and left [vehicle width / 2 + 30 cm (11.8 in)] from the
points FM and RM.
H
JSNIA0921ZZ M
1. Point FM 2. Point RM 3. Triangle scale
4. Point FL (mark) 5. Point FR (mark) 6. Point RL (mark)
AV
7. Point RR (mark)
30 cm (11.8 in)
A. 75 cm (29.5 in) B. Approx. 1.5 m (59 in) C. [Vehicle width/ 2 + 30 cm (11.8 in)
from the points FM and RM] O
6. Draw the lines of the points FL – RL and FR – RR with vinyl string, and fix it with packing tape.
7. Put a mark on the center of each axle, draw vertical lines to the lines of the points FL – RL and FR – RR
from the marks on the center of the axle using a triangle scale, and then fix the lines using packing tape. P

JSNIA0922ZZ
1. Point FL 2. Point FR 3. Point RL

4. Point RR 5. Center position of axle 6. Triangle scale
Perform “Calibrating Camera Image”

1. Select “Camera Cont.” of “Confirmation/ Adjustment” mode, and then set to “Calibrating Camera Image”
mode.
2. Overlap the target lines drawn on the ground with the calibration
marker on the screen by operating the center dial and upper/
lower/left/right switches of multifunction switch on each screen
of “Rear Camera”, “Pass-Side Camera”, “Front Camera”, “Dr-
Side Camera”.
Adjustment range
Rotation direction (Center : 31 patterns (16 on the
dial) center)
Upper/lower direction (up- : −99 – 99
JSNIA1053GB
per/lower switch)
Left/right direction (left/right : −99 – 99
switch)
3. “Writing...” is displayed by pressing the “ENTER” switch, and then the adjustment result is written to the
CAUTION:
Check that “Writing...” is displayed. Do never perform other operations while “Writing...” is dis-
played.
>> GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW”
This mode is designed to align the boundary between each camera image that could not be aligned in the
“Calibrating Camera Image” mode.
1. Select “Camera Cont.” of “Confirmation/ Adjustment” mode, and then set to “Fine Tuning of Birds-Eye
View” mode.

2. Operate the center dial and upper/lower/left/right switch to over-
lap the marker on the screen and the target lines on the ground. A
NOTE:
Move the “+”- mark on the camera position to adjustment by
pressing the “CAMERA” switch.
B
3. When the target line is overlapped on the marker, press the
“ENTER” switch to write the adjustment result to the around
view monitor control unit.
CAUTION: C
Check that “Writing...” is displayed. Do never perform other
operations while “Writing...” is displayed.
JSNIA1055GB
NOTE: D
E
>> Calibration end
AV

MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [NAVIGATION (TWIN MONITOR)]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
MULTI AV SYSTEM
JSNIA1383GB
NOTE:
SWITCH virtually.
JSNIA1603GB
System name System explanation

NAVIGATION SYSTEM AV-632, "System Description"
MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM AV-637, "System Description"
AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM AV-641, "System Description"
CAMERA ASSISTANCE SONAR SYSTEM AV-651, "System Description"

MULTI AV SYSTEM
System name System explanation
A
• Status of audio, climate control system, fuel economy, mainte-
VEHICLE INFORMATION SYSTEM ceiving data signal through CAN communication from ECM, uni- B
fied meter and A/C amp.
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM Refer to the following “HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM”.
C
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM Refer to the following “VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM”. D
TOUCH PANEL SYSTEM Refer to the following “TOUCH PANEL SYSTEM”.
• AV control unit function by transmitting/receiving data one by one with each unit (slave unit) that configures
them completely as a master unit by connecting between units that configure MULTI AV system with two AV E
communication lines (H, L).
• Around view monitor control unit transmits/receives the data signal with sonar control unit and controls sonar
control unit. Around view monitor control unit transmits the information received from sonar control unit to AV
F
control unit.
• AV control unit is connected by CAN communication, and it receives data signals from ECM, unified meter
and A/C amp. It computes and displays fuel economy information value with the obtained information. The G
transmitting/receiving of data signal is performed by BCM. In addition, it transmits the required signal of vehi-
cle setting and receives the response signal.
• AV control unit is connected with front display unit and serial communication, and it transmits the required H
signal of display and display control and receives the response signal from front display unit.
NOTE:
• CONSULT-III self diagnosis: Refer to AV-671, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)". I
• On board self diagnosis: Refer to AV-656, "Diagnosis Description".
J
• Hands-free communication can be operated by connecting using Bluetooth™ with cellular phone.
• Operation is performed by steering switch, and operating condition is indicated on display.
• Guide sound that is heard during operation is input from AV control unit to BOSE amp. and is output from
front speakers. K
JSNIA1050GB AV
When a Call is Originated
Spoken voice sound output from the microphone (Mic. Signal) is input into AV control unit. AV control unit out-
O
puts to cellular phone with Bluetooth™ communication as a TEL voice signal. Voice sound is then heard by the
other party.
When Receiving a Call
P
Voice sound is input to one's own cellular phone from the other party. TEL voice signal is output to front speak-
ers, and the signal is input to BOSE amp. via AV control unit by establishing Bluetooth™ communication from
cellular phone.

MULTI AV SYSTEM
operation signal to AV control unit by AV communication.
JSNIA1424GB
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM

• Each operation of multi AV system can be performed by inputting sound to microphone.
• Start of sound recognition system can be performed by steering switch.
JSNIA1049GB
TOUCH PANEL SYSTEM

Each operation of multi AV system can be performed by directly touching a front display unit.
JSNIA0904GB

MULTI AV SYSTEM
AV
P
JSNIA1493ZZ


MULTI AV SYSTEM
19. Antenna base (antenna amp. and 20. Rear door speaker RH 21. Rear display unit
satellite antenna)
22. Side camera RH and infrared LED 23. Front door speaker RH 24. GPS antenna
(auxiliary lighting)
25. Front display unit 26. Steering angle sensor 27. Steering switch
28. Preset switch 29. Sonar control unit (with around view 30. iPod connector
monitor)
31. Auxiliary input jacks 32. DVD player 33. AV control unit
34. Video distributor 35. Multifunction switch 36. iPod adapter
37. Microphone
condition
G. In center console H. Instrument panel assembly removed I. Rear view of the front display unit
condition

stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
unit.
chronizing).
• Composite image signal (DVD and auxiliary images) is input from the video
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
distributor.
directly.
• Rear display image is controlled by the serial communication from video dis-
tributor.
• RGB image signal is input from video distributor (RGB image and RGB area).
REAR DISPLAY UNIT distributor.
• Synchronize signal (HP, VP) is output to video distributor.
• It receives the DVD/AUX sound signal from the DVD player, and then transmits
it to the headphones.
• It operates by receiving the headphone ON signal from the video distributor.
• It receives the image signal from the DVD player, and auxiliary input jack, and
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR then transmits it to the front display unit and rear display unit.
• It transmits headphone ON signal to rear display unit.

MULTI AV SYSTEM
A
• It transmits the playback DVD image signal to the video distributor. It also
DVD PLAYER
transmits the input AUX sound signal to the AV control unit.
sound signal to woofer and each speaker. B
BOSE AMP.
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. C
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
• Outputs sound (mid and low range). D
FRONT SQUAWKER
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. E
REAR SQUAWKER
CENTER SPEAKER
F
WOOFER
G
• Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio and air H
I
unit. J
K
dicted course line.
• It transmits the sonar operation signal from sonar control unit and receives the L
sonar information from sonar control unit via AV communication.
• It inputs the power supply from around view monitor control unit and outputs M
FRONT CAMERA
AV
REAR CAMERA
around view monitor control unit. O
SIDE CAMERA LH
• It performs the reception/transmission of the communication signal with P
SIDE CAMERA RH

MULTI AV SYSTEM
• It illuminates around the front RH wheel by the power supply from around view
INFRARED LED (AUXILIARY LIGHTING) monitor control unit to improve nighttime visibility of Front-Side view.
• The infrared LED is an invisible light ray.
• Operations for audio, hands-free phone, audio response and navigation, etc.
STEERING SWITCH are possible.
Steering signal necessary for predicted course line control is transmitted to cam-
era control unit or around view monitor control unit.
• Used for hands-free phone operation and voice recognition.
MICROPHONE • Mic signal is transmitted to AV control unit.
• Power (Mic VCC) is supplied from AV control unit.
Image signal of auxiliary input is output to video distributor, and sound signal is
output to DVD player.
GPS ANTENNA GPS signal is received and transmitted to AV control unit.
tenna is adopted.
ANTENNA AMP.
ANTENNA BASE
unit.
trol unit.
SONAR CONTROL UNIT AV communication.

AUDIO SYSTEM
AUDIO SYSTEM
A
JSNIA1384GB F
NOTE:
G
JSNIA1603GB

J
The audio system is equipped with the following functions. Each function is operated by multifunction switch,
preset switch, touch panel, steering switch or audio recognition. Operation status of AUDIO is indicated at dis- K
play.
Function L
AM/FM radio
Satellite radio
CD
M
Music Box (Hard Disk Drive)
CF (Compact Flash) AV
iPod connection
O
Operating Signal
Audio system operation can be performed with multifunction switch, preset switch, steering switch, touch P
panel function or voice recognition function.
switch.
• Refer to AV-620, "System Description" for explanation of voice recognition function and touch panel function.
Screen Display

AUDIO SYSTEM
• The image signal that displays operating status is performed by the RGB image signal, RGB area signal and
AM/FM Radio Mode
• AM/FM radio tuner is built into AV control unit.
control unit. The FM sub antenna is installed on the back door window glass and AV control unit receives
audio signal.
• Audio signal is input to BOSE amp. and BOSE amp. outputs to woofer and each speaker for AV control unit.
Satellite Radio Mode
• Satellite radio tuner is built into AV control unit.
• Audio signal (satellite radio) is received by satellite antenna, and it is input to AV control unit. AV control unit
outputs audio signal to BOSE amp. The signal is also outputted from BOSE amp. to both woofer and each
speaker.
CD Mode
• CD function is built into AV control unit.
• AV control unit outputs audio signals to BOSE amp. and BOSE amp. outputs to woofer and each speaker
when CD is inserted to AV control unit.
Music Box Mode
• Music CD data is stored on HDD that is built into AV control unit, and it can be played.
• AV control unit outputs music (audio signal) that is stored on HDD to BOSE amp., and BOSE amp. outputs to
woofer and each speaker.
CF Mode
• AV control unit has built in CF replay function.
• Music (audio signal) that is stored in CF outputs to BOSE amp. and BOSE amp. outputs to woofer and each
speaker when CF is inserted into AV control unit.
iPod Connection
• Connect iPod® and iPod adapter with wire harness and iPod adapter inputs iPod sound signal from iPod®.
puts sound signal to BOSE amp., and BOSE amp. output sound signal to woofer and each speaker.
• The iPod® connection status can be recognized whether iPod adapter receives iPod connection recognition
signal.
• The iPod adapter can charge iPod®.
• Driver's Audio Stage controls the speaker's output characteristics by BOSE amp. so that the driver seat is
the center of sound.
• ON/OFF signals of Driver's Audio Stage are transmitted from AV control unit to BOSE amp. using mode
change signal.

AUDIO SYSTEM
AV
P
JSNIA1493ZZ


AUDIO SYSTEM
satellite antenna)
monitor)
37. Microphone
condition
condition

• Receiving function of AM/FM/satellite radio, replaying function of CD, replay-
ing/saving functions of music box (HDD), replaying function of CF and voice
AV CONTROL UNIT
recognition function are integrated.
• Audio signal is output to BOSE amp. from each function.
unit.
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT • RGB image signal (audio operation condition) is input from AV control unit.
• Touch panel function can be operated for each system by touching the display
directly.
trol unit.
BOSE AMP.
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH • Connected with preset switch via cable, and operation signal is transmitted to
• Connected with multifunction switch via cable, and operation signal is transmit-
PRESET SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT SQUAWKER
REAR SQUAWKER

AUDIO SYSTEM
A
CENTER SPEAKER
• Inputs power (amp. ON) and sound signals from BOSE amp.
WOOFER B
tenna is adopted.
ANTENNA AMP. C
ANTENNA BASE
unit.
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA D
AV

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
JSNIA1385GB
DESCRIPTION
• AV control unit controls navigation function while GPS tuner has built-in map data, GYRO (angle speed sen-
sor), on the HDD (Hard Disk Drive).
• AV control unit inputs operation signals with communication signals, through display (touch panel), multi-
function switch and steering switch.
• Guide sound is output to front speaker through BOSE amp. from AV control unit when operating navigation
system.
• The vehicle position is calculated through the GYRO (angle speed sensor), vehicle sensor, signal from GPS
satellite and map data stored on HDD (Hard Disk Drive), and transmits the map image signal (RGB image,
RGB area, RGB synchronizing) to display.
POSITION DETECTION PRINCIPLE
The navigation system periodically calculates the current vehicle
position according to the following three types of signals.
• Travel distance of the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed
sensor
• Vehicle turning angle determined by the gyroscope (angular speed
sensor)
• The travel direction of the vehicle determined by the GPS antenna
(GPS information)
The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing the
calculated vehicle position with map data, which is stored in the HDD
(Hard Disk Drive) (map-matching), and indicated on the screen with
JSNIA0177GB
the current location mark. More accurate data is used by comparing
position detection results from GPS to map-matching.
The current position is calculated by detecting the travel distance
from the previous calculation point, and its direction change.
• Travel distance
The travel distance is generated from the vehicle speed sensor
input signal. The automatic distance correction function is adopted
for preventing a miss-detection of the travel distance because of
tire wear etc.
• Travel direction
The gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) and GPS antenna (GPS
information) detect a change in travel direction. Both have advan-
tages and disadvantages as per the following descriptions.
SEL684V

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
A
Type Advantage Disadvantage
Gyroscope (angular velocity sen- Errors are accumulated when driving a long dis-
The turning angle is precisely detected.
sor) tance without stopping.
B
The travel direction (North/South/East/West) The travel direction is not precisely detected when
GPS antenna (GPS information)
is detected. driving slowly.
Input signals are prioritized in each situation. However, this order of priority may change in accordance with C
more detailed travel conditions so that the travel direction is detected more accurately.
MAP-MATCHING
Map-matching repositions the vehicle on the road map when a new D
location is judged to be more accurate. This is done by comparing
the current vehicle position (calculated by the normal position detec-
tion method) from the map data stored in the HDD (Hard Disk Drive).
E
SEL685V G
There is a possibility that the vehicle position may not be corrected in the following case, or when vehicle is
driven over a certain distance or time in which GPS information is hard to receive. Manually correct the current H
location mark on the screen.
• In map-matching, several alternative routes are prepared and pri-
oritized in addition to the road detected as currently being driven
on. I
Therefore, due to errors in the distance and/or direction, an incor-
rect road may be prioritized, and the current location mark may be
repositioned to the incorrect road. J
If two roads are running parallel, they are of the same priority.
Therefore, the current location mark may appear on either of them
alternately, depending on steering wheel movement and road con-
K
figuration, etc.
SEL686V
L
• Map-matching does not function correctly when road that the vehi-
cle is driving on new, etc, or not recorded in the map data. Also,
map-matching does not function correctly when road patterns
stored in the map data and the actual road pattern are different due M
to repair, etc.
Therefore, the map-matching function judges an other road as cur-
rently being driven on road if the road is not on the map, and dis- AV
plays the current location mark on it. Later, the current location
mark may be repositioned if the correct road is detected.
• Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel direc-
O
tion calculated by the distance and direction with the road data is
JSNIA0180GB
limited. Therefore, correction by map-matching is not possible
when there is an excessive gap between current vehicle position and the position on the map.
P
GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
GPS (Global Positioning System) is developed for and is controlled
by the US Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS satel-
lites (NAVSTAR), transmitting out radio waves while flying on an orbit
around the earth at an altitude of approximately 21,000 km (13,048
mile).
The receiver calculates the travel position in three dimensions (lati-
tude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the radio waves
that four or more GPS satellites transmit (three-dimensional position-
ing). The GPS receiver calculates the travel position in two dimen-
sions (latitude/longitude) with the previous altitude data if the GPS
receiver receives only three radio waves (two-dimensional position-
SEL526V
ing). GPS position correction is not performed while the vehicle is
stopped.
Accuracy of the GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions:

• In two-dimensional positioning, GPS accuracy will deteriorate when altitude of the vehicle position changes.
• The position of GPS satellite affects GPS detection precision. The position detection may not be precisely
performed.
• The position detection is not performed if GPS receiver does not receive radio waves from GPS satellites.
(Inside a tunnel, parking in a building, under an elevated highway etc.) GPS receiver may not receive radio
waves from GPS satellites if any object is placed on the GPS antenna.
NOTE:
• The detection result has an error of approximately 10 m (32.8 ft) even with a high-precision three dimen-
sional positioning.
• There may be cases when the accuracy is lowered and radio waves are stopped intentionally because the
GPS satellite signal is controlled by the US trace control center.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
AV
P
JSNIA1493ZZ


NAVIGATION SYSTEM
satellite antenna)
monitor)
37. Microphone
condition
condition

• It is the master unit that controls each operation of the Navigation system.
• The HDD (Hard Disk Drive) is built in, and the map data is stored in HDD.
AV CONTROL UNIT
• The RGB image signal (map information) is output to front display unit.
• The voice guidance signal is output to BOSE amp.
• RGB image signal (map information) is input from AV control unit, and it is in-
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT dicated on front display unit.
• Each operation of navigation can be performed by the touch panel function.
Voice guidance signal is input from AV control unit, and it is output to front LH/RH
BOSE AMP.
speakers.
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Voice guidance signal from BOSE amp. is output.
FRONT SQUAWKER
• Each operation of navigation can be performed.
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH • Connected with preset switch via cables and operation signal is transmitted to
• Each operation of navigation, etc. can be performed.
STEERING SWITCH
• Switch operating signal is output to AV control unit.
GPS ANTENNA GPS signal is received and is output to AV control unit.

MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
A
JSNIA1386GB
I
J
The passengers can enjoy watching DVD in the rear seat with the rear display unit. They can also listen to a
DVD and AUX in the rear seat independently by cordless headphones.
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION K
Operating Signal
The mobile entertainment system can be controlled by the rear seat remote controller.
It receives the operation signal of the rear seat remote controller by the remote control receiver and rear dis- L
play unit, and then transmits it to the video distributor.
Screen Rear Display
• Switching of display is performed with serial communication between rear display unit and video distributor. M
• The rear display unit receives the DVD/AUX image signal and RGB image signal from the video distributor.
Screen Front Display
• Switching of display is performed with serial communication between front display unit and AV control unit. AV
• The front display unit receives the DVD/AUX image signal from the video distributor.
• The front display unit receives the RGB image signal from the AV control unit.
DVD Mode O
• The DVD player is connected to the AV control unit via AV communication and controlled by the AV control
unit.
• The DVD player sound signal is output to the AV control unit. The AV control unit outputs DVD player sound P
signal to BOSE amp. The BOSE amp. outputs it to each speaker.
• The DVD image signal is output to the video distributor. The video distributor outputs it to front display unit
and rear display unit.
AUX Mode
Refer to AV-620, "System Description".

JSNIA1493ZZ


satellite antenna)
22. Side camera RH and infrared LED 23. Front door speaker RH 24. GPS antenna B
28. Preset switch 29. Sonar control unit (with around view 30. iPod connector C
monitor)
34. Video distributor 35. Multifunction switch 36. iPod adapter D
37. Microphone
D. Instrument panel rear side E. Spiral cable part F. Console pocket assembly removed E
condition
condition
F
G
stored.
H
• AV control unit includes the audio, hands-free phone, voice control, navigation, I
• It is connected to BCM via CAN communication transmitting/receiving for the J
trol.
• It inputs the signals for driving status recognition (vehicle speed, reverse and K
parking brake).
ble.
L
unit.
chronizing). M
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
distributor.
• Synchronize signal (HP, VP) is output to AV control unit. AV
directly.
• Rear display image is controlled by the serial communication from video dis- O
tributor.
• RGB image signal is input from video distributor (RGB image and RGB area).
REAR DISPLAY UNIT distributor. P
• It receives the DVD/AUX sound signal from the DVD player, and then transmits
it to the headphones.
• It operates by receiving the headphone ON signal from the video distributor.
• It receives the image signal from the DVD player, and auxiliary input jack, and
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR then transmits it to the front display unit and rear display unit.
• It transmits headphone ON signal to rear display unit.

• It transmits the playback DVD image signal to the video distributor. It also
DVD PLAYER
transmits the input AUX sound signal to the AV control unit.
BOSE AMP.
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT SQUAWKER
REAR SQUAWKER
CENTER SPEAKER
WOOFER
Image signal of auxiliary input is output to video distributor, and sound signal is
output to DVD player.

A
JSNIA1422GB
I
J
• This system is equipped with wide-angle high-resolution cameras on the front and rear of the vehicle and on
both right and left door mirrors. The images from front view, rear view, front-side view (RH side), and birds-
eye view that shows the view from the top of the vehicle are displayed to monitor the vehicle surroundings.
• Around view monitor control unit cuts out and expands the image received from each camera to create each K
view.
• The sonar indicator is displayed on display (superimposed on the camera image) in combination with the
camera assistance sonar system to warm of the approach of an obstacle. L
• In front view and rear view, the vehicle width, distance lines and predicted course lines are superimposed
and displayed. In front-side view, the vehicle distance guiding line and vehicle width guiding line are dis-
played.
• The Birds-Eye view converts the images from 4 cameras into the overhead view and displays the status of M
the vehicle on display. The vehicle icon and sonar indicator that are displayed on the Birds-Eye view display
are rendered by around view monitor control unit.
AROUND VIEW MONITOR SCREEN AV
• Around view monitor combines and displays the travel direction view and “Birds-Eye view”, “Front-Side
view”, and then it displays the sonar indicator on the “Birds-Eye view”, “Front-Side view”.
• AV control unit renders the “Change View”, “BEEP” switch, view icon, warning message on display. O

Screen constitution
JSNIA0769GB
OPERATION DESCRIPTION
• Around view monitor operates by pressing the “CAMERA” switch of multifunction switch and shifting the
selector switch to the reverse position.
• When the selector lever is in any position other than the reverse position, the screen is switched to the
around view monitor by pressing the “CAMERA” switch.
• The screen is switched to the around view monitor by shifting the selector lever to the reverse position.
• In the around view monitor, Birds-Eye view and Front-side view can be switched by pressing the “CAMERA”
switch or the touch switch of display.
• The “Front-Side and Front screen” are displayed as a priority when turning “Default to Front-Side View” ON.
• The around view monitor is cancelled 3 minutes after pressing the “CAMERA” switch, and then the screen
returns to the screen before displaying the around view monitor when selector lever is in a position other
than the “R” position.
• ON/OFF setting of sonar indicator display on the Front-Side view screen can be performed.
• In the Birds-Eye view, the invisible area is displayed on the image to specify the boundary of the 4 cameras.
The invisible area is displayed in yellow in the Birds-Eye view after turning the ignition switch ON.
• The sonar (both of buzzer and indicator) operates only when the camera screen is displayed.

Around view monitor screen transition
A
I
JSNIA0765GB
FRONT VIEW
• The front view image is from the front camera. J
• When the selector lever is in any position other than the reverse position, the front view is displayed by
pressing the “CAMERA” switch. It improves the visibility of obstacles in front of the vehicle and helps driving
by the images displayed from Birds-Eye view and Front-Side view.
K
• Display the vehicle width guiding line and vehicle distance guiding line in front view and display the predicted
course line according to the steering angle.
• If the steering angle is within approximately 90 degrees, the predicted course lines on the left/right side are
displayed. If the steering angle is exceeding approximately 90 degrees, only the predicted course line on the L
outside (in the opposite side of steering direction) is displayed.
• Around view monitor control unit controls the direction and distance of the predicted course line according to
the sensor signal from steering angle sensor. M
AV

Front view guiding lines
JSNIA0770GB
REAR VIEW
• The rear view image is from the rear camera.
• When the selector lever is in the reverse position, the rear view is displayed. Backing and parking are
improved by the images from Birds-Eye view and Front-Side view.
• Display the vehicle width guiding line and vehicle distance guiding line in Rear view and display the pre-
dicted course line according to the steering angle.
• The predicted course line is not displayed at the steering neutral position. The predicted course line is dis-
played and the vehicle width guiding line is not displayed by turning the steering wheel.
• Around view monitor control unit controls the direction and distance of predicted course line according to the
sensor signal from steering angle sensor.
Rear view guiding lines
JSNIA1541GB
FRONT-SIDE VIEW
• The front-side view image is from the side camera RH.
• In Front-Side view, display the vehicle distance guiding line and vehicle width guiding line.
• The infrared LED illumination is installed on the door mirror RH to illuminate around the front wheels.

Front-side view area and guiding line
A
JSNIA0771GB F
BIRDS-EYE VIEW
• The image from the 4 cameras is cut out and converted into the overhead view, and the surroundings of the
vehicle is displayed in birds-eye view. G
• In Birds-Eye view, the invisible area is displayed on the image to specify the boundary of the 4 cameras.
• The invisible area is displayed in yellow in the Birds-Eye view after turning the ignition switch ON as an infor-
mation for the user. (OFF setting can be performed) H
Birds-Eye view display image
AV
JSNIA1441GB
P

Birds-Eye view display area
JSNIA0775GB
CAMERA IMAGE OPERATION PRINCIPLE

• If the information writing to around view monitor control unit and the information from the camera are not
matched, the applicable camera position is indicated as an error on the Birds-Eye view display. (Calibration
operation is necessary when replacing each camera or when replacing around view monitor control unit.)
• Around view monitor control unit receives the camera switch signal from AV control unit via AV communica-
tion by pressing the “CAMERA” switch of multifunction switch.
• Around view monitor control unit that receives the camera switch signal supplies the power to each camera
and inputs the camera image from each camera.
• When the selector lever is in the reverse position, around view monitor control unit receives the reverse sig-
nal from AV control unit via AV communication, supplies the power to each camera, and inputs the camera
image from each camera.
• Around view monitor control unit that receives the camera image signal from each camera cuts out the
required screen for each view, superimposes the camera image, vehicle icon, guiding lines, sonar indicator,
and outputs them to the display unit.
PREDICTED COURSE LINE OPERATION PRINCIPLE
Detection of steering rotation direction
Around view monitor control unit detects the rotation direction of steering according to the phase difference of
two pairs of pulse signals (sensor signal 1 and sensor signal 2) input from steering angle sensor.
Detection of steering neutral position
The sensor signal 3 input from the steering angle sensor is generated at 1 pulse per 1 rotation of the steering
wheel. Around view monitor control unit detects the steering neutral position from this pulse.

JSNIA0708GB F
Correction of steering neutral position
Around view monitor control unit corrects the steering neutral position during driving according to the vehicle
speed signal and steering angle sensor signal. G
AV

JSNIA1493ZZ


satellite antenna)
monitor)
37. Microphone
condition
condition
F
G
• Image on display is switched to around view monitor by serial communication
AV CONTROL UNIT between AV control unit and front display unit.
H
• Warning displayed in around view monitor image is illustrated.
• Camera image signal is transmitted from around view monitor control unit, and
RGB image signal for warning display is transmitted from AV control unit.
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT I
• Around view monitor image is switched by serial communication between AV
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH It transmits the CAMERA switch signal via AV communication to AV control unit.
• It supplies power to front camera, rear camera, and side camera, superimpos-
J
es the images from each camera, and then outputs them to front display unit.
• It receives the CAMERA switch signal and reverse signal from AV control unit
via AV communication. K
era. L
• Input the sensor signal from steering angle sensor, and then control the pre-
dicted course line.
communication to AV control unit. M
FRONT CAMERA
• It performs the reception/transmission of the communication signal with AV
REAR CAMERA
O
the image of the vehicle LH to around view monitor control unit. P
SIDE CAMERA LH
SIDE CAMERA RH

It illuminates around the front RH wheel by the power supply from around view
INFRARED LED (AUXILIARY LIGHTING)
monitor control unit to improve nighttime visibility of Front-Side view.
SONAR CONTROL UNIT
AV communication.

A
JSNIA1422GB
I
J
DESCRIPTION
• Install the corner sensor on the front bumper and rear bumper. It detects the obstacles around the vehicle
when the around view monitor is displayed. It warns of the approach to the obstacles with the buzzer and
indicator in the display linked with the around view monitor system. K
• It displays the distance between the bumper and obstacle with the color of sonar indicator in the display and
the blinking cycle of indicator in 3 stages.
• The buzzer warns of the distance to the obstacles with the cycle in 3 stages. L
SYSTEM OPERATION DESCRIPTION
• Around view monitor control unit transmits the sonar operation signal via AV communication to sonar control
unit to control the operation of sonar indicator and sonar buzzer. M
• Sonar control unit that receives the sonar operation signal from around view monitor control unit transmits
the detection signal and detection distance signal according to the signal from corner sensor via AV commu-
nication to around view monitor control unit. around view monitor control unit operates the applicable sonar AV
indicator.
• Sonar control unit that receives the sonar operation signal from around view monitor control unit outputs the
buzzer signal to other buzzers based on the detection distance signal from corner sensor to operate the
buzzer. O
• Sonar control unit has the diagnosis function. It can detect the corner sensor malfunction or sensor harness
open circuit. It transmits the diagnosis results to around view monitor control unit and always displays the
sonar indicator in red to inform the user. P
OBSTACLE DETECTION DISTANCE
• Sonar control unit changes the outputs of the sonar indicator and warning buzzer in 3 stages according to
the obstacle detection distance from the corner sensor.
• The sonar control unit can change the setting of obstacle detection distance in 4 stages.

Obstacle detection image
JSNIA1430ZZ
A. Approx. 50 cm (19.6 in) B. Approx. 15 cm (5.9 in)
Detection distance
Sensitivity level 1 Sensitivity level 2 Sensitivity level 3 Sensitivity level 4
Warning item
(Faster warning) (Default value) (Slower warning) (Slowest warning)
First stage
warning
Second stage
warning
Third stage
Less than 50 cm (19.6 in) Less than 40 cm (15.7 in) Less than 30 cm (11.8 in) Less than 30 cm (11.8 in)
warning
SONAR INDICATOR DISPLAY

• Around view monitor control unit that receives the detection signal and detection distance signal from sonar
control unit displays the sonar indicator on display.
• Around view monitor control unit changes the color or blinking cycle of the indicator according to the detec-
tion distance.

Color and blinking cycle of sonar indicator
A
JSNIA1100GB F
SONAR BUZZER OPERATION
• Sonar control unit outputs the buzzer signal to other buzzers and operates the buzzer when the detection
signal is input from the corner sensor. G
• It changes the buzzer cycle in 3 stages according to the detection distance.
Sonar buzzer cycle
H
JSNIA1101GB
M
AV

JSNIA1493ZZ


satellite antenna)
monitor)
37. Microphone
condition
condition
F
G
H
unit.
• Superimposes the guiding line, predicted course line and sonar indicator to the
• It performs the reception/transmission of communication signal with each cam- I
• Inputs the sensor signal from the steering angle sensor, and then controls the
predicted course line.
• It transmits the sonar operation signal from sonar control unit and receives the J
sonar information from the sonar control unit via AV communication.
• It transmits the information received/transmitted with the sonar control unit via
AV communication to AV control unit.
K
MONITOR)
AV communication. L
M
AV

MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH AND PRESET SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

The ON/OFF operation (continuity) of each switch in multifunction switch and preset switch can be checked.
Self-diagnosis Mode
• Press the “BACK” switch and the “UP” switch of the 8-direction
OFF to ACC and hold them for 3 seconds or more. Then the
buzzer sounds, all indicators of the preset switch illuminate, and
the self-diagnosis mode starts.
pressing the switch. The buzzer sounds if the switch is normal.
NOTE:
JSNIA1392GB

Self-diagnosis mode is canceled when turning the ignition switch OFF.
• AV control unit diagnosis function starts up with multifunction switch operation and AV control unit performs a
diagnosis for each unit in the system during the on board diagnosis.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS
Description
• The trouble diagnosis function has a self-diagnosis mode for conducting trouble diagnosis automatically and
a confirmation/adjustment mode for operating manually.
• The self-diagnosis mode performs diagnoses on AV control unit, connections between system components,
AV control unit and GPS antenna and between AV control unit and satellite radio antenna. Then it displays
the diagnosis results on display.
modifying or adjusting generally require human intervention and judgment (the system cannot make a judg-
ment automatically).
Mode Description
• Diagnoses the connections across system components, between AV
Self Diagnosis
control unit and GPS antenna and between AV control unit and satel-
lite radio antenna.

Mode Description
A
The following check functions are available: color tone check by color
Display Diagnosis bar display, light and shade check by gray scale display and touch panel
calibration response check.
Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, parking brake, B
Vehicle Signals
Climate Control Start auto air conditioner system self-diagnosis. C
Steering Angle Ad- When there is a difference between the actual turning angle and the ve-
justment hicle mark turning angle, it can be adjusted.
D
When there is a difference between the current location mark and the ac-
Navigation Speed Calibration
tual location, it can be adjusted.
XM SAT Subscrip-
The XM NavTraffic subscription status can be checked. E
tion Status
Confirmation/ place that the selected malfunction last occurred are displayed. F
Adjustment Vehicle CAN Diagnosis The transmitting/receiving of CAN communication can be monitored.
AV COMM Diagnosis
monitored. G
The received volume adjustment of hands-free phone, microphone
Handsfree Phone
speaker check, and erase memory can be performed.
It can perform the confirmation of a signal connection to around view H
monitor control unit, the calibration of each camera, Correct Draw Line
Camera Cont.
of Camera Image, and Fine Tuning of Birds-Eye View. Refer to AV-675,
"Diagnosis Description".
I
Bluetooth The passkey and the device name can be checked and changed.
Any necessary channels required to receive traffic information from the
Change Channel
satellite radio system can be set. J
SAT Change Application Any application IDs required to receive traffic information from the satel-
ID lite radio system can be set.
Diag Not used. K
Delete Unit Connection Log Erase the connection history of unit and error history.
L
STARTING PROCEDURE
2. Turn the audio system OFF. M
the self-diagnosis mode is starts, a short beep will sound.) AV
• Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed
by pressing the “BACK” button.
O
P
JSNIA1393GB

items of “Self Diagnosis” and “Confirmation/Adjustment” can be
selected.
JSNIA0061GB
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
1. Start the self-diagnosis function and select “Self Diagnosis”.
- Self-diagnosis subdivision screen is displayed, and the self-
sion screen indicates progress of the trouble diagnosis.
JSNIA0062GB
2. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self-diagnosis is completed. The unit names and the connection
lines are color-coded according to the diagnostic results.
JSNIA1395GB
Con-
Diagnosis results Unit nection
line
Normal Green Green
Connection malfunction Gray Yellow
Unit malfunction Note Red Green
NOTE:
• Replace AV control unit if “Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit malfunction” is indicated. The symptom is an AV
- If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined accord-

component in the diagnosis result screen. A
JSNIA0064GB
D
Detection Range Of Self-diagnosis Mode
between AV control unit and each unit and the internal operation of AV control unit.
• Because the start condition of diagnosis function is switch operated, the on board diagnosis function cannot E
be started up if any malfunction is detected in the communication circuit between AV control unit and multi-
function switch.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS F
Check the applicable display in the following table, and then repair the malfunctioning parts.

Possible malfunction location / Action G
to take
When either one of the following K

items are detected:
• AV control unit power supply or
ground circuits.
ground circuits malfunction are de- L
• When there is no malfunction, AV
tected.
control unit is malfunctioning.
• AV control unit malfunction is de-
tected.
M
AV
JSNIA1396GB
NOTE:
When a control unit malfunction is detected (red in O
unit display), connection malfunction with other
connection unit may be displayed.
P
malfunction”

to take
GPS antenna connection malfunction

GPS antenna.
is detected.
JSNIA1398GB
Poor connection is detected in satel- • Satellite radio antenna feeder.

lite radio antenna. • Satellite radio antenna.
JSNIA1399GB

items are detected:
• communication circuit between AV
control unit and front display unit Communication circuits between AV
are malfunctioning. control unit and front display unit.
control unit and front display unit
are malfunctioning.
JSNIA1400GB

items are detected:
ground circuits are malfunctioning. • iPod adapter power supply and
• AV communication circuits between ground circuits.
AV control unit and iPod adapter • AV communication circuits between
are malfunctioning. AV control unit and iPod adapter.
are malfunctioning.
JSNIA1401GB

to take A
items are detected:
• around view monitor control unit B
power supply and ground circuits
are malfunctioning. • Around view monitor control unit
• AV communication circuits between power supply and ground circuits
AV control unit and around view • AV communication circuits between C
monitor control unit are malfunc- AV control unit and around view
tioning. monitor control unit.
AV control unit and around view D
monitor control unit are malfunc-
When either one of the following E

items are detected:
ground circuits are malfunctioning.
• Sonar control unit power supply F
and ground circuits.
tioning.
and sonar control unit. G
JSNIA1404GB
tioning. H

items are detected: I
• rear display unit power supply and
ground circuits are malfunctioning • Rear display unit power supply and
• communication circuits between AV ground circuits.
control unit and rear display unit are • Communication circuits between J
malfunctioning. AV control unit and rear display unit.
control unit and rear display unit are
K
malfunctioning.
JSNIA1405GB
AV

to take

items are detected:
• video distributor power supply and
ground circuits are malfunctioning. • Video distributor power supply and
• AV communication circuits between ground circuits
AV control unit and video distributor • AV communication circuits between
are malfunctioning. AV control unit.
AV control unit and video distributor
are malfunctioning.
JSNIA1406GB

items are detected:
• DVD player power supply and
ground circuits are malfunctioning. • DVD player power supply and
• AV communication circuits between ground circuits.
AV control unit and DVD player are • AV communication circuits between
malfunctioning. AV control unit and DVD player.
AV control unit and DVD player are
malfunctioning.
JSNIA1423GB
1. Start the diagnosis function and select “Confirmation/Adjustment”. The confirmation/adjustment mode
the “BACK” switch to return to the initial Confirmation/Adjust-
ment Mode screen.
JSNIA0617GB

Display Diagnosis
A
JSNIA0689GB
K
L
M
Vehicle Signals
A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and AV
JSNIA0075GB


ON Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Vehicle speed
OFF Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Parking brake
ON Light switch ON
Lights —
Ignition —
OFF Ignition switch in THE ACC position
Shift the selector lever to the “R”
ON
position
OFF
Speaker Test
NOTE:
Tweeter* : 3 kHz
JSNIA0076GB
*: Squawker
Climate Control
Navigation
STEERING ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
The steering angle output value detected with the gyroscope is
adjusted.
JSNIA0077GB
SPEED CALIBRATION

During normal driving, distance error caused by tire wear and tire
pressure change is automatically adjusted for by the automatic dis- A
tance correction function. This function, on the other hand, is for
immediate adjustment, in cases such as driving with tire chains fitted
on tires.
B
JSNIA0078GB
D
XM SAT SUBSCRIPTION STATUS
E
JSNIA0089GB
H
Error History
However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition SW is turned ON I
and then no error has occurred until the self-diagnosis start. Check the “Error Record” to detect any error that
may have occurred before the self-diagnosis start because of this condition.
The error record displays the time and place of the most recent occurrence of that error. However, take note of J
the following points.
• If there is a malfunction with the GPS antenna circuit board in AV control unit, the correct date and time of
occurrence may not be displayed.
• Place of the error occurrence is represented by the position of the current location mark at the time an error K
occurred. If current location mark has deviated from the correct position, then the place of the error occur-
rence cannot be located correctly.
• The frequency of occurrence is displayed in a count up manner. The actual count up method differs depend- L
ing on the error item.
Count up method A
• The counter resets to 0 if an error occurs when IGN switch is turned ON. The counter increases by 1 if the
condition is normal at a next IGN ON cycle. M
Count up method B AV
• The counter increases by 1 if an error occurs when IGN switch is ON. The counter will not decrease even if
the condition is normal at the next IGN ON cycle.
record display) with the “Delete log” switch or CONSULT-III. O
Display type of occur-

rence frequency P
Count up method B Other than the above

JSNIA0079GB
Error item
Some error items may be displayed simultaneously according to the cause. If some error items are displayed
simultaneously, the detection of the cause can be performed by the combination of display items.

then repair the malfunctioning parts accord-
CAN COMM CIRCUIT ing to the diagnosis results.
ed.
(MULTI AV)".
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
ed.
CONTROL UNIT (AV)
FLASH-ROM Error Of Control Unit
Connection Of Gyro
XM SERIAL COMM Error
Bluetooth Module Connection Error Replace AV control unit.
HDD CONN Error

HDD READ Error
HDD WRITE Error
HDD COMM Error
HDD ACCESS Error
DSP CONN Error
DSP COMM Error
are detected:
circuits.
Internal Communication Error • malfunction is detected in AV control unit
power supply and ground circuits.
GPS Communication Error An intermittent error caused by strong radio
GPS ROM Error
GPS RAM Error curs.
GPS RTC Error occurs constantly.

A
GPS Antenna Error GPS antenna
tected.
are detected: B
C
cation signal between AV control unit and D
front display unit.
are detected:
• rear display unit power supply and E
ground circuits malfunction are detected. • Rear display unit power supply and
Rear Display Connection Error
cation circuits between video distributor • Communication circuits between video
F
and rear display unit. distributor and rear display unit.
cation signal between video distributor
and rear display unit. G
XM Antenna Connection Error
H
are detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT circuits.
• AV control unit power supply or ground
• Internal Communication Error • When there is no malfunction, AV control
unit is malfunctioning. I
are detected:
• multifunction switch power supply and J
• Switches Connection Error munication circuits between AV control • AV communication circuits between AV
unit and multifunction switch. control unit and multifunction switch. K
L
are detected:
circuits malfunction are detected. • iPod adapter power supply and ground M
• malfunction is detected in the AV com- AV
When either one of the following items O
are detected:
ground circuits malfunction are detected. • Video distributor power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • malfunction is detected in the AV com- ground circuits. P
• Video Distributor Connection Error munication circuits between AV control • AV communication circuits between AV
unit and video distributor. control unit and video distributor.
unit and video distributor.

are detected:
• DVD player power supply and ground cir-
cuits malfunction are detected. • DVD player power supply and ground cir-
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • malfunction is detected in the AV com- cuits.
• DVD Deck Connection Error munication circuits between AV control • AV communication circuits between AV
unit and DVD player. control unit and DVD player.
unit and DVD player.
are detected:
supply and ground circuits malfunction • Around view monitor control unit power
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
unit and around view monitor control unit. control unit.
are detected:
ground circuits.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT munication circuits between around view
• AVM Sonar Connection Error monitor control unit and sonar control
unit.
nar control unit.
unit.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
• Switches Connection Error
• Video Distributor Connection Error
• iPod Connection Error
• DVD Deck Connection Error

• The error counter is erased if “Reset” is pressed.
Malfunction counter
(Past)
Tx(HVAC) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
JSNIA1408GB
Rx(ECM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
Rx(Cluster) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
Rx(BCM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
Rx(HVAC) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
Rx(USM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
Rx(TPMS) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
AV COMM Diagnosis

ter unit) and each unit. A
B
C
Status Counter
Items
(Current) (Past)
JSNIA1409GB
C Tx(ITM–PrimarySW) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
D
C Rx(PrimarySW–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(STRG SW–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(Audio–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39 E
C Rx(Amp–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(DVD–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(XM–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
F
C Rx(iPod–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C RX(AVM–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39 G
C Rx(Video Dist–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(Remote Cont–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(Amp–Audio) — — H
C Rx(DVD–Audio) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(iPod–Audio) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
I
C Rx(Sonar–AVM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Tx(Audio–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
NOTE: J
• “Audio” and “Amp” indicate the same status because “Amp” indicates the status of the amplifier integrated in AV control unit.
• “STRG SW”, “Amp” and “XM” indicate the same status as “Audio”.
K
Hands-Free Phone
The hands-free phone reception volume adjustment, microphone
and speaker test, and memory erase functions are also available.
L
AV
JSNIA0083GB
Camera Cont. O
Refer to AV-675, "Diagnosis Description".
Bluetooth
Confirm / Change Passkey P

• The passkey of Bluetooth can be confirmed and changed.
• The passkey can be changed by four digits within 0 to 9.
JSNIA0086GB
Confirm / Change Device Name

• The device name of Bluetooth can be confirmed and changed.
• The device name can be changed by sixteen digits within A to Z
(small character can be used) and - (hyphen).
JSNIA0087GB
SAT
• Change Channel
- Any necessary channels required to receive traffic information from
the satellite radio system can be set.
JSNIA0092GB
• Change Application ID
- Any application IDs required to receive traffic information from the
JSNIA0093GB

trol unit memory. (Clear the records of the unit that has been A
removed.)
JSNIA0088GB
D
Initialize Settings
Deletes data stored in HDD.
G
JSNIA0095GB
CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV) INFOID:0000000003825440 H
CONSULT-III FUNCTIONS
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via the communication with AV control unit. I
Diagnosis mode Description

Ecu Identification The part number of AV control unit can be checked. J
of the Multi AV system, and displays the current and past malfunctions collectively.
Data Monitor The diagnosis of vehicle signal that is input to AV control unit can be performed. K
AV COMMUNICATION
When “AV communication” of “CAN Diag Support Monitor” is selected, the following function will be performed.
L
AV&NAVI C/U
AV communication counter.
AUDIO Displays AV control unit communication status and the error counter. M
ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of AV control unit is displayed. AV
• In CONSULT-III self-diagnosis, self-diagnosis results and error history are displayed simultaneously.
• The timing is displayed as “0” if any of the error codes [U1000], [U1010], [U1300] or [U1310] are detected. O
P
CAN COMM CIRCUIT[U1000] Refer to AV-680, "Diagnosis Procedure".
ed.

CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010]
ed.
CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310]
Gyro NO CONN [U1201]
CAN CONT [U1216]
BLUETOOTH CONN [U1217]
HDD CONN [U1218] Replace AV control unit.
HDD READ [U1219]

XM SERIAL COMM [U1220]
HDD WRITE [U121A]
HDD COMM [U121B]
HDD ACCESS [U121C]
DSP CONN [U121D]
DSP COMM [U121E]
are detected:
circuits.
INTERNAL COMM [U121F] • malfunction is detected in AV control unit
supply or ground circuit.
GPS COMM [U1204] An intermittent error caused by strong radio
GPS ROM [U1205]
GPS RAM [U1206] curs.
GPS RTC [U1207] occurs constantly.
are detected:
front display unit.
GPS ANTENNA CONN [U1244] GPS antenna.
tected.
are detected:
• rear display unit power supply and
ground circuits malfunction are detected. • Rear display unit power supply and
REAR DISP CONN [U1247]
and rear display unit. trol unit and rear display unit.
rear display unit.
XM ANTENNA CONN [U1258]
are detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] circuits.
• INTERNAL COMM [U121F] • When there is no malfunction, AV control

A
are detected:
ground circuits malfunction are detected. • Multifunction switch power supply and B
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] • malfunction is detected in the AV com- ground circuits.
• SWITCH CONN [U1240] munication circuits between AV control • AV communication circuits between AV
• malfunction is detected in the AV com- C
When either one of the following items D
are detected:
ground circuits malfunction are detected. • Video distributor power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] • malfunction is detected in the AV com- ground circuits. E
• VIDEO DIST CONN [U1246] munication circuits between AV control • AV communication circuits between AV
unit and video distributor. control unit and video distributor.
munication signal between AV control F
unit and video distributor.
are detected: G
• DVD player power supply and ground cir-
cuits malfunction are detected. • DVD player power supply and ground cir-
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] • malfunction is detected in the AV com- cuits.
• DVD DECK CONN [U1248] munication circuits between AV control • AV communication circuits between AV H
unit and DVD player. control unit and DVD player.
unit and DVD player. I
are detected:
• iPod adapter power supply and ground J
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] • malfunction is detected in the AV com- circuits.
• IPod CONN [U1254] munication circuits between AV control • AV communication circuits between AV
unit and iPod adapter. control unit and iPod adapter. K
L
are detected:
supply and ground circuits malfunction • Around view monitor control unit power M
unit and around view monitor control unit. control unit. AV
O

are detected:
ground circuit malfunction are detected.
ground circuits.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] munication circuits between around view
• SONAR CONN [U125C] monitor control unit and sonar control
unit.
nar control unit.
unit.
• SWITCH CONN [U1240]
• IPod CONN [U1254]
• DVD DECK CONN [U1248]
• VIDEO DIST CONN [U1246]
DATA MONITOR
ALL SIGNALS

On Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
VHCL SPD SIG
Off Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Changes in indication may be delayed. This is
On Parking brake is applied. normal.
PKB SIG
Off Parking brake is released.
Block the light beam from the auto
On light optical sensor when the light
SW is ON.
ILLUM SIG
Expose the auto light optical sensor
Off to light when the light SW is OFF or —
ON.
IGN SIG
Off Ignition switch in the ACC position
On
sition Changes in indication may be delayed. This is
REV SIG
Shift the selector lever to a position normal.
Off
SELECTION FROM MENU

Allows the technician to select which vehicle signals should be displayed and displays the status of the
selected vehicle signals.
Item to be selected Description

VHCL SPD SIG
PKB SIG
The same as when “ALL SIGNALS”
ILLUM SIG
is selected.
IGN SIG
REV SIG

A
The diagnosis function of around view monitor control unit is displayed when selecting “Camera Cont.” of Con- B
firmation/Adjustment mode in the multi AV system.
Around view monitor control unit diagnosis item
AV control unit Confirmation/Adjustment mode Function C
The status of signals input to around view monitor control unit
can be checked.
Rear Camera Performs the calibration of rear camera. D
Pass-Side Camera Performs the calibration of side camera LH.
Calibrating Cam- Front Camera Performs the calibration of front camera.
era Image E
Dr-Side Camera Performs the calibration of side camera.
Initialize Camera Image The calibration can be initialized to NISSAN factory shipment
Camera Cont. Calibration* condition.
F
Correct Draw Line
of Camera Image
Front View The position of front view guiding line can be changed. G
• The confirmation and adjustment of the difference between
each camera can be performed.
• The system changes to the ZOOM function by the operation H
of shift and the ZOOM ratio of each camera can be changed.
CAUTION:
*: Never perform other operations for approximately 10 seconds after performing "Initialize Camera Image Calibration". I
The status of signals inputted to around view monitor control unit can
be checked. J
JSNIA1057GB
M
Connection Confirmation item list
• Input status of steering angle sensor is displayed by ON/OFF.
Steer. Angle Sensor ON/OFF • When all of steering signals 1, 2, and 3 are input, it is turned ON. It remains AV
Input status of reverse signal inputted to around view monitor control unit is dis-
Reverse Sensor ON/OFF
played by ON/OFF in real time. O
• Input status of vehicle speed signal inputted to around view monitor control
unit is displayed by ON/OFF.
Vehicle Speed Sensor ON/OFF
• When the vehicle speed signal is input, it is turned ON. It remains ON until con- P
nection confirmation mode is stopped.
• The status of camera switch signal received via AV communication from AV
control unit is displayed by ON/OFF.
Camera Switch ON/OFF
• When the camera switch signal is received once, it is turned ON. It remains
Input status of ignition signal inputted to around view monitor control unit is dis-
IGN ON/OFF

The input type of steering angle sensor is displayed. (“Relative” is displayed on
Type of Steer. Angle Sensor Relative
this model.)
Type of Steer. Gear ratio 1 The type of steering gear ratio is displayed. (“1” is displayed on this model.)
Left or Right Steer. Left The steering position is displayed. (“Left” is displayed on this model.)
Rear Camera Image Output signal OK / NG The input status of rear camera image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time.
Rear Camera COMM Status OK / NG The communication status with rear camera is displayed by OK/NG in real time.
The status of communication line with rear camera is displayed by OK/NG in real
Rear Camera COMM Line OK / NG
time.
Front Camera Image Output signal OK / NG The input status of front camera image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time.
Front Camera COMM Status OK / NG The communication status with front camera is displayed by OK/NG in real time.
The status of communication line with front camera is displayed by OK/NG in real
Front Camera COMM Line OK / NG
time.
Pass-Side Camera Image Output sig- The input status of side camera RH image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real
OK / NG
nal time.
The communication status with side camera RH is displayed by OK/NG in real
Pass-Side Camera COMM Status OK / NG
time.
The status of communication line with side camera RH is displayed by OK/NG in
Pass-Side Camera COMM Line OK / NG
real time.
The input status of side camera LH image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real
Dr-Side Camera Image Output signal OK / NG
time.
The communication status with side camera LH is displayed by OK/NG in real
Dr-Side Camera COMM Status OK / NG
time.
The status of communication line with side camera LH is displayed by OK/NG in
Dr-Side Camera COMM Line OK / NG
real time.
Calibrating Camera Image

• Perform the calibration of camera image caused by the incorrect
mounting position of each camera, etc. Always perform calibration
after performing the following work.
- When each camera or each camera mount (door mirror, front grille,
etc.) is removed
- When replacing around view monitor control unit
• When performing the calibration initialization, it can be set to the
NISSAN factory shipment condition.
Refer to AV-614, "CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW
MONITOR) : Special Repair Requirement" for the calibration proce-
dure.
JSNIA1053GB
Adjustment range
center)
Calibrating Camera Image item
Items Description
Rear Camera Performs the calibration of rear camera.
Pass-Side Camera Performs the calibration of side camera RH.
Front Camera Performs the calibration of front camera.
Dr-Side Camera Performs the calibration of side camera LH.
Initialize Camera Image Calibration* The calibration can be initialized to the factory shipment setting.
CAUTION:

Correct Draw Line of Camera Image
The display position of guiding lines when displayed on the rear A
view, front view, and front-side view can be changed.
Adjustment range B
Rotating direction : 31 patterns
Left/right direction : −25 – 25 C
JSNIA1058GB D
Correct Draw Line of Camera Image item
Items Description
E
Front View The position of Front view guiding line can be changed.
F
• The fine adjustment function of camera calibration can check and
adjust the difference between each camera. G
• Fine adjustments can be performed for each camera. Move the
“+”-mark to select the camera by pressing the “CAMERA” switch.
• Perform the adjustment with the center dial and upper/lower/left/ H
right switches.
CAUTION:
Operate the center dial slowly because the changing of the
screen takes approximately 1 second. I
NOTE:
• It can be initialized to the NISSAN factory shipment setting with
JSNIA1055GB
“Initialize Camera Image Calibration” of “Calibrating Camera J
Image”.
• The adjustment value is cancelled in this mode by performing “Initialize Camera Image Calibration”.
Adjustment range K
center)
L
Left/right direction : −99 − 99
ZOOM function M
• The ZOOM ratio of camera can be changed when calibrating the
camera.
• It shifts to ZOOM function mode by shifting the selector lever to a AV
position other than the “R” position → “R” position → other than “R”
position in the “Fine Tuning of Birds-Eye View” mode.
• The changing of ZOOM ratio can be performed for each camera. O
Move the “+”-mark to select the camera by pressing “CAMERA”
switch and press the left/right switch to change the ZOOM ratio.
NOTE:
• When the position is not correct in “Fine Tuning of Birds-Eye View” P
mode, use this "ZOOM" function to adjust it.
JSNIA1059GB
• If this function is used, always adjust the upper/lower/left/right posi-
tion again on the “Fine Tuning of Birds-Eye View” screen.

TOR)]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [SONAR CONTROL UNIT (WITH AROUND VIEW
MONITOR)]
CONSULT-III Function (SONAR) INFOID:0000000003825442
DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown as follows:
Test mode Function

Ecu Identification Sonar control unit part number can be read.
Self Diagnostic Result Sonar control unit checks the conditions and displays memorized error.
Data Monitor Sonar control unit input/output data in real time.
Active Test Gives a drive signal to a load to check the operation.
Work support Changes setting of each function.
ECU IDENTIFICATION
Displays the part number of sonar control unit.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
For details, refer to AV-1027, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item Display Description

On Around view monitor is ON. (sonar system is ON)
SONAR OPE
Off Around view monitor is OFF. (sonar system is OFF)
On Buzzer is output condition.
BUZZER OUTPUT
Off Buzzer is not output condition.
ERROR When a sensor is abnormal.
LV.0 When a sensor is not detection.
CR SEN [FL]
The distance between the corner sensor and an obstacle is 60 cm (23.6 in) or more and
CR SEN [FR] LV.2
CR SEN [RL]
CR SEN [RR] The distance between the corner sensor and an obstacle is 40 cm (15.7 in) or more and
LV.3
LV.4 The distance between corner sensor and an obstacle less than 40 cm (15.7 in).
ACTIVE TEST
Active test item Function

BUZZER This test is able to check buzzer operation.
SONAR SENSOR This test is able to check each sonar sensor operation.
WORK SUPPORT
Work support item Function

CORNER SEN DISTANCE SET Corner sensor warning buzzer distance is adjustable to 4 phases.
CORNER SEN DISTANCE SET

Corner sensor warning buzzer distance can be set to 4 phases as follows.

Second warning 70 – 80 cm (27.5 – 31.4 in) 60 – 70 cm (23.6 – 27.5 in) 50 – 60 cm (19.6 – 23.6 in) 40 – 50 cm (15.7 – 19.6 in)

TOR)]
A
Third warning 50 – 70 cm (19.6 – 27.5 in) 40 – 60 cm (15.7 – 23.6 in) 30 – 50 cm (11.8 – 19.6 in) 30 – 40 cm (11.8 – 15.7 in)
Fourth warning Less than 50 cm (19.6 in) Less than 40 cm (15.7 in) Less than 30 cm (11.8 in) Less than 30 cm (11.8 in)
The default of this model is “FAR”. B
AV

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [NAVIGATION (TWIN MONITOR)]
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

SULT-III
When AV control unit is not transmitting or re-
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ceiving CAN communication signal for 2 sec- CAN communication system
onds or more.
1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC

YES >> Refer to “LAN system”. Refer to LAN-22, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".

A
Initial diagnosis of AV control unit. B

DTC DETECTION LOGIC C

SULT-III D
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected AV control unit
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003825740 E

When DTC U1010 is detected, replace AV control unit. F
>> INSPECTION END

G
AV


stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
[U1310] circuit.

A

stored.
trol. F
parking brake).
ble.
G
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
I
Cont Unit
U1200 FLASH- ROM Replace AV control unit
(FLASH-ROM).
[U1200]
J
AV


stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
GYRO NO CONN Internal malfunction of AV control unit (gyrocompass dis-
[U1201] connection) is detected.

A

stored.
trol. F
parking brake).
ble.
G
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
I
[U1216] detected.
AV


stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
BLUETOOTH MODULE
Internal malfunction of AV control unit (Bluetooth module
U1217 CONN Replace AV control unit
connection malfunction) is detected.
[U1217]

A

stored.
trol. F
parking brake).
ble.
G
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
I
HDD-CONN Internal malfunction of AV control unit (HDD connection
[U1218] malfunction) is detected.
AV


stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
HDD-READ Internal malfunction of AV control unit (HDD read malfunc-
[U1219] tion) is detected.

A

stored.
trol. F
parking brake).
ble.
G
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
I
XM SERIAL COMM Internal malfunction of AV control unit (satellite radio tuner
[U1220] communication error) is detected.
AV


stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
HDD-WRITE Internal malfunction of AV control unit (HDD write mal-
U121A Replace AV control unit
[U121A] function) is detected.

A

stored.
trol. F
parking brake).
ble.
G
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
I
HDD-COMM Internal malfunction of AV control unit (HDD communica-
U121B Replace AV control unit
[U121B] tion error) is detected.
AV


stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
HDD-ACCESS Internal malfunction of AV control unit (HDD access error)
U121C Replace AV control unit
[U121C] is detected.

A

stored.
trol. F
parking brake).
ble.
G
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
I
DSP CONN Internal malfunction of AV control unit (DSP connection
U121D Replace AV control unit
[U121D] error) is detected.
AV


stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
DSP COMM Internal malfunction of AV control unit (DSP communica-
U121E Replace AV control unit
[U121E] tion error) is detected.

A

stored.
trol. F
parking brake).
ble.
G
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
I
INTERNAL COMM Internal malfunction of AV control unit (internal communi- AV control unit power supply and
U121F
[U121F] cation error) is detected. ground circuit
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003825769 J
1.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check AV control unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-716, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis K
Procedure".
L
AV

U1204 GPS
U1204 GPS

stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
GPS CONN Internal malfunction of AV control unit (GPS malfunction)


U1205 GPS
U1205 GPS
A

stored.
F
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
H
I
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
GPS ROM Internal malfunction of AV control unit (GPS malfunction)
U1205
K
AV

U1206 GPS
U1206 GPS

stored.
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
GPS RAM Internal malfunction of AV control unit (GPS malfunction)


U1207 GPS
U1207 GPS
A

stored.
F
trol.
parking brake).
ble.
H
I
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
GPS RTC Internal malfunction of AV control unit (GPS malfunction)
U1207
K
AV


unit.
chronizing).
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
distributor.
directly.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
When either one of the following items is detected.
• front display unit power supply and ground circuit mal- • Front display unit power supply and
function is detected. ground circuit.
FRONT DISP CONN
[U1243]
tween front display unit and AV control unit. front display unit and AV control
tween front display unit and AV control unit.
1.CHECK FRONT DISPLAY UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUITS

Check front display unit power supply and ground circuits. Refer to AV-716, "FRONT DISPLAY UNIT : Diagno-
sis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS

Continuity
11 70
M75 M88 Existed
22 71
Front display unit

Continuity
Connector Terminals
Ground
11
M75 Not existed
22
YES >> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL A

B
(+)
C
Connector Terminal
D

M75 11 Ground E
ness.
PKIB5039J F
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. G
Check signal between front display unit harness connector and ground. H
(+)
Front display unit (−) Condition Reference value I
Connector Terminal

M75 22 Ground
ness. K
PKIB5039J
L
NO >> Replace front display unit. M
AV

U1244 GPS ANTENNA
U1244 GPS ANTENNA

GPS ANTENNA GPS signal is received and sent to AV control unit.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
GPS ANTENNA CONN
U1244 GPS antenna connection malfunction is detected. GPS antenna disconnection
[U1244]
1.GPS ANTENNA CHECK

Visually check GPS antenna and antenna feeder.
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect GPS antenna connector.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit terminal and ground.
(+)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Terminal
110 Ground 5.0 V

U1247 REAR DISPLAY UNIT
A
B
• Rear display image is controlled by the serial communication from video dis-
tributor.
C
REAR DISPLAY UNIT • RGB image signal is input from video distributor (RGB and RGB area).Com-
posite image signal (DVD and AUX images) is input from the video distributor.
D
E
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
• rear display unit power supply and ground circuits are • Rear display unit power supply and F
malfunctioning. ground circuits.
REAR DISP CONN
U1247 • serial communication circuits between video distributor • Serial communication circuits be-
[U1247]
and rear display unit are malfunctioning. tween AV control unit and rear dis-
• serial communication signal between video distributor play unit.
G
and rear display unit is malfunctioning.

H
1.CHECK REAR DISPLAY UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check rear display unit power supply and ground circuits. Refer to AV-717, "REAR DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis I
Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 2. J
2.CHECK CONTINUITY SERIAL COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
K
2. Disconnect rear display unit connector and video distributor connector.
3. Check continuity between rear display unit harness connector and video distributor harness connector.
L
Rear display unit Video distributor
Continuity
M
9 39
B26 M97 Existed
10 40
4. Check continuity between rear display unit harness connector and ground. AV
Rear display unit

Continuity O
Connector Terminals
Ground
9
B26 Not existed
10 P
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SERIAL COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1. Connect rear display unit connector and video distributor connector.

3. Check signal between rear display unit harness connector and ground.
(+)
Rear display unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal
Rear seat re-

mote controller
Ignition operation when
B26 9 Ground switch AUX or DVD im-
ON age is displayed
on rear dis-
played.
PKIB5039J

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace rear display unit.
4.CHECK SERIAL COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
Check signal between rear display unit harness connector and ground.
(+)
Connector Terminal
Rear seat re-

mote controller
Ignition operation when
B26 10 Ground switch AUX or DVD im-
ON age is displayed
on rear dis-
played.
PKIB5039J

NO >> Replace video distributor.

A
B
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA Satellite radio signal is received and sent to AV control unit.
C
Display contents of D
CONSULT-III
XM ANTENNA CONN Satellite radio antenna connection malfunction is detect-
U1258 Satellite radio antenna disconnection
[U1258] ed. E
1.SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA CHECK F
Visually check satellite radio antenna and antenna feeder.

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE H
1. Disconnect satellite radio antenna connector.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit terminal and ground. I
(+)
Voltage J
(Approx.)
Terminal
108 Ground 5.0 V K
AV

U1300 is indicated when malfunction occurs in communication signal of multi AV system. Indicated simulta-

DTC Description
CONSULT-III take
• AV COMM CIRCUIT When either one of the following items are detected: • AV control unit power supply and
U1300 [U1300] • AV control unit power supply and ground circuits mal- ground circuits.
U121F • INTERNAL COMM function are detected. • When there is no malfunction, AV
[U121F] • AV control unit malfunction are detected. control unit is malfunctioning.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
malfunction are detected. and ground circuits.
U1300 [U1300]
cuits between AV control unit and multifunction switch. tween AV control unit and multi-
[U1240]
• malfunction is detected in the AV communication signal function switch.
between AV control unit and multifunction switch.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT tion are detected. ground circuits.
U1300
[U1300] • malfunction is detected in the AV communication cir- • AV communication circuits be-
U1254
• IPod CONN [U1254] cuits between AV control unit and iPod adapter. tween AV control unit and iPod
• malfunction is detected in the AV communication signal adapter.
between AV control unit and iPod adapter.
• video distributor power supply and ground circuits mal- • Video distributor power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
function are detected. ground circuits.
U1300 [U1300]
U1246 • VIDEO DIST CONN
cuits between AV control unit and video distributor. tween AV control unit and video dis-
[U1246]
• malfunction is detected in the AV communication signal tributor.
between AV control unit and video distributor.
• DVD player power supply and ground circuits malfunc- • DVD player power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
tion are detected. ground circuits.
U1300 [U1300]
U1248 • DVD DECK CONN
cuits between AV control unit and DVD player. tween AV control unit and DVD
[U1248]
• malfunction is detected in the AV communication signal player.
between AV control unit and DVD player.
• around view monitor control unit power supply and
ground circuits malfunction are detected. • Around view monitor control unit
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
• malfunction is detected in the AV communication cir- power supply and ground circuits.
U1300 [U1300]
cuits between AV control unit and around view monitor • AV communication circuits be-
U125B • AROUND CAMERA
control unit. tween AV control unit and around
CONN [U125B]
• malfunction is detected in the AV communication signal view monitor control unit.
between AV control unit and around view monitor con-
trol unit.

DTC Description
CONSULT-III take A
• sonar control unit power supply or ground circuit mal-
function are detected. • Sonar control unit power supply B
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
• malfunction is detected in the AV communication cir- and ground circuits.
U1300 [U1300]
cuits between around view monitor control unit and so- • AV communication circuits be-
U125C • SONAR CONN
nar control unit. tween around view monitor control
[U125C]
• malfunction is detected in the AV communication signal unit and sonar control unit. C
between around view monitor control unit and sonar
control unit.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT D
[U1300]
• SWITCH CONN
U1300
[U1240]
U1240
• DVD DECK CONN Malfunction is detected in the AV communication circuits AV communication circuits between E
U1248
[U1248] between AV control unit and around view monitor control AV control unit and around view mon-
U1246
• VIDEO DIST CONN unit. itor control unit.
U1254
[U1246]
U125B
• IPod CONN [U1254] F
• AROUND CAMERA
CONN [U125B]
AV

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CORNER SENSOR [FL]
B2700 Corner sensor front left is malfunctioning. Replace corner sensor front LH
[B2700]

A
B
C

SENSOR HARNESS E
B2701 Corner sensor front LH harness circuit is open. Check corner sensor front LH circuit
OPEN [CR-FL] [B2701]

F
1.CHECK HARNESS CORNER SENSOR FRONT LH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
G
3. Check continuity between sonar control unit harness connector and corner sensor (FL) harness connec-
tor.
H
Continuity
I
J
Sonar control unit
Continuity
K
M44 3 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2. L
2.CHECK HARNESS CORNER SENSOR FRONT LH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between sonar control unit harness connector and corner sensor (FL) harness connector. M

Continuity AV
P

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CORNER SENSOR [FR]
B2702 Corner sensor front right is malfunctioning. Replace corner sensor front RH
[B2702]

A
B
C

SENSOR HARNESS E
B2703 Corner sensor front right harness circuit is open. Check corner sensor front RH circuit
OPEN [CR-FR] [B2703]

F
1.CHECK HARNESS CORNER SENSOR FRONT RH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
G
3. Check continuity between sonar control unit harness connector and corner sensor (FR) harness connec-
tor.
H
Continuity
I
J
Sonar control unit
Continuity
K
M44 4 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2. L
2.CHECK HARNESS CORNER SENSOR FRONT RH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between sonar control unit harness connector and corner sensor (FR) harness connector. M

Continuity AV
P

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CORNER SENSOR [RL]
B2704 Corner sensor rear left is malfunctioning. Replace corner sensor rear LH
[B2704]

A
B
C

SENSOR HARNESS E
B2705 Corner sensor rear left harness circuit is open. Check corner sensor rear LH circuit
OPEN [CR-RL] [B2705]

F
1.CHECK HARNESS CORNER SENSOR REAR LH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
G
3. Check continuity between sonar control unit harness connector and corner sensor (RL) harness connec-
tor.
H
Continuity
I
J
Sonar control unit
Continuity
K
M44 5 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2. L
2.CHECK HARNESS CORNER SENSOR REAR LH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between sonar control unit harness connector and corner sensor (RL) harness connector. M

Continuity AV
P

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CORNER SENSOR [RR]
B2706 Corner sensor rear right is malfunctioning. Replace corner sensor rear RH
[B2706]

A
B
C

SENSOR HARNESS E
B2707 Corner sensor rear right harness circuit is open. Check corner sensor rear RH circuit
OPEN [CR-RR] [B2707]

F
1.CHECK HARNESS CORNER SENSOR REAR RH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
G
3. Check continuity between sonar control unit harness connector and corner sensor (RR) harness connec-
tor.
H
Continuity
I
J
Sonar control unit
Continuity
K
M44 6 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2. L
2.CHECK HARNESS CORNER SENSOR REAR RH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between sonar control unit harness connector and corner sensor (RR) harness connector. M

Continuity AV
P

AV CONTROL UNIT
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 34
YES >> GO TO 2.
M80 19
Battery power supply 22 OFF Battery voltage
M87
24
M80 7
ACC power supply ACC Battery voltage
M87 25
YES >> GO TO 3.
21
23
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 34

YES >> GO TO 2. A
B
Check voltage between front display unit harness connector and ground.
C
Is inspection result normal? D
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between front display unit and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT E

1 G
13
REAR DISPLAY UNIT I
REAR DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003825901
1.CHECK FUSE J

K
Battery 34
Ignition switch ACC or ON 19 L
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. M
Check voltage between rear display unit harness connector and ground. AV
3 O
Battery power supply B26 OFF Battery voltage
4
Is the inspection result normal? P
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between rear display unit and fuse.
2. Disconnect rear display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between rear display unit harness connector and ground.

1
Ground B26 OFF Existed
2
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003825902
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 34
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check voltage between video distributor harness connector and ground.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between video distributor and fuse.
2. Disconnect video distributor connector.
3. Check continuity between video distributor harness connector and ground.
1.CHECK FUSE


YES >> GO TO 2. A
B
C
YES >> GO TO 3. D
E
2. Disconnect multifunction switch connector.
F
G
H
BOSE AMP.
I
1.CHECK FUSE
J
Battery 8
K
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. L
M
AV
YES >> GO TO 3.
O
2. Disconnect BOSE amp. connector. P

DVD PLAYER
DVD PLAYER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003825903
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 34
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check voltage between DVD player harness connector and ground.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between DVD player and fuse.
2. Disconnect DVD player connector.
3. Check continuity between DVD player harness connector and ground.
iPod ADAPTER
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 34
YES >> GO TO 2.

Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.) A
B
C
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003825823
D
1.CHECK FUSE
E
Battery 34
F
Ignition switch ACC 19
Ignition switch ON 4
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS H
Check voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground.
I
ACC power supply B46 4 ACC Battery voltage J
Ignition power supply B46 3 ON Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 3. K
NO >> Check harness between around view monitor control unit and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT L
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector.
M
AV
NO >> Repair harness or connector. O
SONAR CONTROL UNIT (WITH AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000003825824
P
1.CHECK FUSE


YES >> GO TO 2.
2. Check voltage between sonar control unit harness connector and ground.
Sonar control unit Voltage

Connector Terminal Ground (Approx.)
M44 13 Battery voltage

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace sonar control unit power supply harness.
2. Disconnect sonar control unit connector.
Sonar control unit

Continuity
M44 24 Existed
NO >> Repair or replace sonar control unit ground harness.

RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY
UNIT)
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY
A
UNIT)
B
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
E
Continuity
Front display unit

G
Continuity
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL
J
K
(+)
ment mode, and then dis- M
play color bar by
M75 17 Ground
DIAGNOSIS screen. AV
JSNIA1029ZZ

YES >> Replace front display unit. O

RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY
UNIT)
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DIS-
PLAY UNIT)


Continuity
Front display unit

Continuity
M75 6 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Connector Terminal
play color bar by
M75 6 Ground
DIAGNOSIS screen.
JSNIA1030ZZ


RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY
UNIT)
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DIS-
A
PLAY UNIT)
B
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
E
Continuity
Front display unit

G
Continuity
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL
J
K
(+)
ment mode, and then dis- M
play color bar by
M75 18 Ground
DIAGNOSIS screen. AV
JSNIA1031ZZ

YES >> Replace front display unit. O

RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DIS-
PLAY UNIT)
RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT
DISPLAY UNIT)


Continuity
Front display unit

Continuity
M75 19 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Connector Terminal
M75 19 Ground
SKIB3603E


RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY
UNIT)
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DIS-
A
PLAY UNIT)
B
Transmits the display area of RGB image displayed by AV control unit with RGB area (YS) signal to front dis-
play unit.
C

D
E

Continuity
F
G
Front display unit
Continuity
H
M75 9 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2. I
J
K
(+)
Reference value
(Approx.) L
Connector Terminal
At RGB image displayed 5.0 V
M
M75 9 Ground
At AUX image displayed AV
PKIB4948J O
NO >> Replace AV control unit. P

HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT (FRONT DISPLAY UNIT TO
AV CONTROL UNIT)
HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT (FRONT DISPLAY
UNIT TO AV CONTROL UNIT)


Continuity
Front display unit

Continuity
M75 8 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Connector Terminal
M75 8 Ground
SKIB3603E


VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT (FRONT DISPLAY UNIT TO AV
CONTROL UNIT)
VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT (FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
A
TO AV CONTROL UNIT)
B
RGB images displayed with AV control unit such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc. C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT D

3. Check continuity between front display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector. E

Continuity F
4. Check continuity between front display unit harness connector and ground. G
Front display unit

Continuity H
M75 20 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL J
3. Check signal between front display unit harness connector and ground. K
(+)
L
Connector Terminal
M75 20 Ground
AV
SKIB3598E
O
NO >> Replace front display unit. P

COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO FRONT DIS-
PLAY UNIT)
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO FRONT
DISPLAY UNIT)
Video distributor receives the image signal from the DVD player and auxiliary input jack and then transmits it to
the front display unit and rear display unit.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect video distributor connector and front display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between video distributor harness connector and front display unit harness connector.
Video distributor Front display unit

Continuity
8 15
M98 M75 Existed
6 5
Front display unit

Continuity
M75 15 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Connect video distributor connector and front display unit connector.
3. Check signal between front display unit harness connector using an oscilloscope.
(+) (−)
Front display unit Front display unit Condition Reference value
When AUX, DVD or camera image

M75 15 M75 5
is displayed on front display unit.
SKIB2251J


RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DISPLAY
UNIT)
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DIS-
A
PLAY UNIT)
B
Transmit the image displayed with video distributor with RGB signal to the rear display unit.
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
E
Continuity
Rear display unit

G
Continuity
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL
J
3. Check signal between rear display unit harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope.
K
(+)
Rear seat remote controller opera- M

B26 22 Ground tion when AUX or DVD image is
displayed on rear display unit.
AV
JSNIA1029ZZ

YES >> Replace rear display unit. O

RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DISPLAY
UNIT)
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DIS-
PLAY UNIT)


Continuity
Rear display unit

Continuity
B26 21 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Connector Terminal
Rear seat remote controller opera-

JSNIA1030ZZ

YES >> Replace rear display unit.

RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DISPLAY
UNIT)
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DIS-
A
PLAY UNIT)
B
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
E
Continuity
Rear display unit

G
Continuity
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL
J
K
(+)
Rear seat remote controller opera- M

AV
JSNIA1031ZZ

YES >> Replace rear display unit. O

RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DISPLAY
UNIT)
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DIS-
PLAY UNIT)
Transmits the display area of RGB image displayed by video distributor with RGB area (YS) signal to rear dis-
play unit.


Continuity
Rear display unit

Continuity
B26 15 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL
(+)
Connector Terminal
When AUX or DVD image is dis-
0V
played on rear display unit.
B26 15 Ground Rear seat remote controller opera-

tion when AUX or DVD image is
PKIB4948J


VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT (REAR DISPLAY UNIT TO VID-
EO DISTRIBUTOR)
VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT (REAR DISPLAY UNIT TO
A
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR)
B
In composite image (DVD and AUX images), transmit the vertical synchronizing (VP) signal and horizontal
synchronizing (HP) signal from rear display unit to video distributor so as to synchronize the RGB images dis-
played with video distributor such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc. C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT D

3. Check continuity between rear display unit harness connector and video distributor harness connector. E

Continuity F
4. Check continuity between rear display unit harness connector and ground. G
Rear display unit

Continuity H
B26 17 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL J
3. Check signal between rear display unit harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope. K
(+)
L
Connector Terminal
B26 17 Ground —
AV
SKIB3598E
O
YES >> Replace video distributor.
NO >> Replace rear display unit. P

HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT (REAR DISPLAY UNIT TO
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR)
HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT (REAR DISPLAY UNIT
TO VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR)
In composite image (DVD and AUX images), transmit the vertical synchronizing (VP) signal and horizontal
synchronizing (HP) signal from rear display unit to video distributor so as to synchronize the RGB images dis-
played with video distributor such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc.


Continuity
Rear display unit

Continuity
B26 18 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Connector Terminal
B26 18 Ground —
SKIB3601E

NO >> Replace rear display unit.

COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR DIS-
PLAY UNIT)
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO REAR
A
DISPLAY UNIT)
B
Video distributor receives the image signal from the DVD player and auxiliary input jack and then transmits it to
the front display unit and rear display unit.
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

D
2. Disconnect video distributor connector and rear display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between video distributor harness connector and rear display unit harness connector.
E
Video distributor Rear display unit

Continuity
F
G
Rear display unit
Continuity
H
B26 14 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2. I
J
1. Connect video distributor connector and rear display unit connector.
3. Check signal between rear display unit harness connector using an oscilloscope.
K
(+)
L
Connector Terminal
M
When AUX or DVD image is dis-
B26 14 Ground
played on rear display unit.
AV
SKIB2251J

P

Transmits the image signal of external device from auxiliary input jacks to video distributor.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect auxiliary input jacks connector and video distributor connector.
3. Check continuity between auxiliary input jacks harness connector and video distributor harness connec-
tor.
Auxiliary input jacks Video distributor

Continuity

Continuity
M183 7 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AUX IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect auxiliary input jacks connector and video distributor connector.
(+)
Connector Terminal
M183 7 Ground At AUX image displayed
SKIB2251J


DVD IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
DVD IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
The DVD player transmits the playback DVD image signal to the video distributor. The video distributor B
receives the image signal from the DVD player, and auxiliary input jack, and then transmits it to the front dis-
play unit and rear display.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY DVD IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect DVD player connector and video distributor connector.
3. Check continuity between DVD player harness connector and video distributor harness connector.
E
DVD player Video distributor
Continuity
7 23 F
M182 M98 Existed
5 22
4. Check continuity between video distributor harness connector and ground. G
Video distributor
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground H
M98 23 Not existed
I
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DVD IMAGE SIGNAL J
1. Connect DVD player connector and video distributor connector.
3. Check signal between video distributor harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope. K
(+) (−)
Video distributor Video distributor Condition Reference value L
M98 23 M98 22 When DVD image is displayed.

AV
SKIB2251J
O
NO >> Replace DVD player. P

• AV control unit transmits the mode change signal to BOSE amp.



Continuity
BOSE amp.
Continuity
B41 17 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Connect BOSE amp. connector.
3. Check voltage between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.
(+)
Voltage
BOSE amp. (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B41 17 Ground 8.5 V

A
The eject signal is output to AV control unit when the eject switch of multifunction switch is pressed. B
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CD EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT C

3. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and AV control unit harness connector. D

Continuity E
4. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and ground. F
Continuity
M72 14 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE I
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector and ground. J
(+)
Voltage K
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M89 85 Ground 3.3 V
L
NO >> Replace AV control unit. M
AV

Supply power from AV control unit to microphone. The microphone transmits the sound voice to the AV control
unit.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN AV CONTROL UNIT AND MICROPHONE CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and microphone connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and microphone harness connector.
AV control unit Microphone

Continuity
26 4
M87 27 R17 2 Existed
28 1
AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminals
Ground
26
M87 Not existed
28
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+) (−)
Voltage
(Approx.)
M87 26 M87 27 5.0 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL
4. Check signal between AV control unit harness connector.

(+) (−) A
AV control unit AV control unit Condition Reference value
B
C
M87 28 M87 27 Give a voice.
D
PKIB5037J

YES >> Replace AV control unit. E
AV

camera.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector and front display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and front display unit har-
ness connector.

Front display unit
unit Continuity

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminal
B46 27 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector and front display unit connector.
(+)
unit
Connector Terminal


B
JSNIA0834GB
B46 27 Ground C
Other than camera im- D

age display
E
JSNIA0835GB

YES >> Replace front display unit. F
AV

• Steering angle sensor signal 1, 2 detects the turning direction and quantity of the steering and transmits it to
the around view monitor control unit.
• Steering angle sensor signal 3 detects the neutral position of the steering and transmits it to around view
monitor control unit.
• Around view monitor control unit performs the correction of neutral position with sensor signal 1, 2, 3 and
vehicle speed signal.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector and steering angle sensor connector.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and steering angle sensor
harness connector.

Steering angle sensor
unit Continuity
14 3
16 5

unit Continuity
Connector Terminals
Ground
14
B46 15 Not existed
16
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector.
(+)
unit (−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminals
14
B46 15 Ground 5.0 V
16
YES >> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK SIGNAL SENSOR SIGNAL A

2. Connect steering angle sensor connector.
B
(+)
C
unit
Connector Terminals
D
F
SKIB3827E
A: Sensor signal 1
B: Sensor signal 2
14, 15 Ground G
H
B46 Turn the steering to the left
I
SKIB3828E
A: Sensor signal 1
B: Sensor signal 2
J
K
Turn the steering around the
16 Ground
neutral position
SKIB3829E
L
A: Sensor signal 3
B: Sensor signal 1
Is inspection result normal? M
NO >> Replace steering angle sensor.
AV


1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT


Continuity
AV control unit
Continuity
M80 6 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check spiral cable.
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+) (−)
Voltage
(Approx.)
M80 6 M80 15 5.0 V
YES >> GO TO 4.

A
D
JSNIA0112GB
E
Condition
F

14 MENU DOWN switch ON 318 – 324 G

H

15
I
AV


1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT


Continuity
AV control unit
Continuity
M80 16 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check spiral cable.
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+) (−)
Voltage
(Approx.)
M80 16 M80 15 5.0 V
YES >> GO TO 4.

A
D
JSNIA0112GB
E
Condition
F

14 MENU DOWN switch ON 318 – 324 G

H

15
I
AV


1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT


Continuity
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check spiral cable.
YES >> GO TO 3.
AV control unit
Continuity
M80 15 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
JSNIA0112GB

A
Condition
ENTER switch ON 2003 – 2043 B

C
716 – 730 D
switch ON

15
VOL UP switch ON 120 – 122 E
AV

camera.

connector.

Front camera
unit Continuity
B45 45 E155 6 Existed

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminal
B45 45 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
unit
Connector Terminal

B45 45 Ground
JSNIA0836GB


A
camera.
D
1.CHECK CONTINUITY FRONT CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
connector.
F
Front camera
unit Continuity
G
44 2
B45 E155 Existed
46 1 H

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminal
B45 46 Not existed
J

YES >> GO TO 2. K
2.CHECK VOLTAGE FRONT CAMERA POWER SUPPLY
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector and front camera connector. L
3. Check voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector.
M
(+)
(−) Condition
unit (Approx.) AV
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CONTINUITY FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

connector.


Front camera
unit Continuity
41 3
B45 E155 Existed
42 4

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminals
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
(+) (−)
unit unit
B45 41 B45 42
JSNIA0834GB


A
camera.
D
connector.
F
Rear camera
unit Continuity
G

unit Continuity I
Ground
Connector Terminal
B46 35 Not existed
J
YES >> GO TO 2.
K
(+) M
unit
O
B46 35 Ground
P
JSNIA0836GB


camera.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY REAR CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector terminals 36, 38 and rear
camera harness connector terminals 8, 7.

Rear camera
unit Continuity
36 8
B46 D111 Existed
38 7

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminal
B46 36 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE REAR CAMERA POWER SUPPLY
(+)
(−) Condition
unit (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B46 36 Ground 6.0 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CONTINUITY REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
connector.


Rear camera
unit Continuity
39 5 B
B46 D111 Existed
40 1

unit Continuity D
Ground
Connector Terminals
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL F
(+) (−) H
unit unit
J
B46 39 B46 40
K
JSNIA0834GB

L
AV

camera.


unit (driver side) Continuity
B45 47 D3 3 Existed

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminal
B45 47 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
unit
Connector Terminal

B45 47 Ground
JSNIA0836GB


A
camera.
D
1.CHECK CONTINUITY SIDE CAMERA LH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
F
unit Continuity
G
48 6
B45 D3 Existed
50 18 H

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminal
B45 48 Not existed
J

YES >> GO TO 2. K
2.CHECK VOLTAGE SIDE CAMERA LH POWER SUPPLY
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector and door mirror (driver side) connector. L
M
(+)
(−) Condition
unit (Approx.) AV
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CONTINUITY SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT



unit Continuity
51 5
B45 D3 Existed
52 17

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminals
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL
(+) (−)
unit unit
B45 51 B45 52
JSNIA0834GB


A
camera.
D
F
G

unit Continuity I
Ground
Connector Terminal
B46 33 Not existed
J
YES >> GO TO 2.
K
(+) M
unit
O
B46 33 Ground
P
JSNIA0836GB


camera.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY SIDE CAMERA RH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect control unit connector and door mirror (passenger side) connector.

32 18
B46 D33 Existed
34 6

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminal
B46 34 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE SIDE CAMERA RH POWER SUPPLY
(+)
(−) Condition
unit (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B46 34 Ground 6.0 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CONTINUITY SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Around view monitor control Door mirror A

29 5 B
B46 D33 Existed
30 17
around view monitor control

unit Continuity D
Ground
Connector Terminals
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL F
(+) (−) H
unit unit
J
B46 29 B46 30
K
JSNIA0834GB

L
AV

BUZZER SIGNAL CIRCUIT
The sonar control unit outputs the buzzer signal when the rear sonar detects the obstacle.
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000003825883
1.SONAR CONTROL UNIT ACTIVE TEST

1. Select “BUZZER” of sonar control unit active test item.
2. Check the buzzer operation.
BUZZER
Test item Condition
On : Buzzer is operation.
Off : Buzzer is not operation.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK BUZZER POWER SUPPLY

2. Check voltage between buzzer harness connector and ground.
(+)
Voltage
Buzzer (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B231 1 Ground Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS BUZZER SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect sonar control unit connector and buzzer connector.
3. Check continuity between sonar control unit harness connector and buzzer harness connector.
Sonar control unit Buzzer

Continuity
Sonar control unit

Continuity
M44 23 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SIGNAL SONAR CONTROL UNIT
1. Connect sonar control unit connector and buzzer connector.
2. Check signal between sonar control unit harness connector and ground.

(+) A
Sonar control unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal
B
NOTE:
C
M44 23 Ground When buzzer operation
SKIB8943E
E
NO >> Replace sonar control unit.
F
AV

AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [NAVIGATION (TWIN MONITOR)]
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

AV CONTROL UNIT


VHCL SPD SIG

PKB SIG

ILLUM SIG
Ignition switch
— On
ON
IGN SIG
Ignition switch
— Off
ACC

REV SIG
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JPNIA0004ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
(V)
ON
Ignition
2 3
(P) (L)
ON
SKIB3609E

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
4 5 C
Sound signal rear LH Output switch Audio output
(V) (LG)
ON
SKIB3609E D
0V
switch.
Keep pressing MENU UP
E
1.0 V
switch.
Ignition Keep pressing MENU
6 15 2.0 V
(P) (B)
Steering switch signal A Input switch DOWN switch. F
ON
Keep pressing switch 3.0 V
Keep pressing ENTER

4.0 V G
switch.
Ignition H
7
(V)
ACC

Ground Illumination signal Input OFF I
10 — Shield — — — —
J
Ignition
11 12
Sound signal front RH Output switch Audio output K
(R) (G)
ON
SKIB3609E L
M
Ignition
13 14
(BR) (Y)
ON
AV
SKIB3609E
Ignition
15 Steering switch signal O
(B) ground
ON
Keep pressing VOL DOWN
0V
switch. P
Keep pressing VOL UP
Ignition 1.0 V
16 15 switch.
Steering switch signal B Input switch
(L) (B) 2.0 V
ON Keep pressing switch.

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
19
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
21
(B)
ON
Ignition
22
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
23
(B)
ON
Ignition
24
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
25
(V)
ACC
Ignition
26
(G)
ON
27 Ground Microphone ground — ON — 0V
Ignition
28
(R)
ON
PKIB5037J
Ignition
35
(G)
ON
Parking brake ON 0V
Ignition
36
ON
JSNIA0007GB

37
ON

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
NOTE: B
(destination unit).
C
Ignition
Ground Input switch
(R) (8-pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25MPH)
ON
D
JSNIA0012GB
E
Ignition
41
(B)
ON
F
Ignition
42
(B)
ON
Ignition G
43
(B)
ON
Ignition Driver's Audio Stage ON 0V H
44
(SB) Driver's Audio Stage OFF 8.5 V
ON
48 AV communication signal Input/ I
— — — —
(G) (H) Output
— — — —
(R) (L) Output
J
— — — —
(LG) (H) Output
— — — — K
(V) (L) Output
52 Input/
— CAN–H — — —
(L) Output
L
53 Input/
— CAN–L — — —
(P) Output
M
Ignition
(B) “Color Spectrum Bar” on AV
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
JSNIA1029ZZ
O
Ignition P
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
JSNIA1030ZZ

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
JSNIA1031ZZ
64 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
65
(G)
ON
SKIB3603E
66 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
67
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Output switch At camera image or AUX
(B)
ON image display.
PKIB4948J
Ignition
(R) (HP) signal
ON
SKIB3601E
Ignition
(W) signal
ON
SKIB3598E
Ignition
ON
PKIB5039J

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
71 Communication signal When adjusting display C
Ground Input switch
ON
PKIB5039J D
72 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
(Y) (BR) ed. F
ON
SKIB3609E
G
Ignition H
(R) (G) ed.
ON
I
SKIB3609E
81 — Shield — — — —
85 Pressing the eject switch 0V J

86 — Shield — — — —
K
Ignition L
(R) (W) ed.
ON
M
SKIB3609E
Ignition
102
Ground SW ground — switch — 0V
(BR) AV
ON
O
Ignition
(B) (W) ed.
ON
P
SKIB3609E

Ignition
ACC

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
Not connected to satellite
108 Ground Satellite antenna signal Input switch 5.0 V
antenna connector.
ACC
109 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
Not connected to GPS an-
110 Ground GPS antenna signal Input switch 5.0 V
tenna connector.
ACC
111 — Shield — — — —
Wiring Diagram - BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION (TWIN MONITOR) - INFOID:0000000003825609
NOTE:

AV CONTROL UNIT
SWITCH virtually. A
AV
JCNWM1054GB P

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1055GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1056GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1057GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1058GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1059GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1060GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1061GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1062GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1063GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1064GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1065GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1066GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1067GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1068GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1069GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1070GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1071GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1072GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1073GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1074GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1075GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1076GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM1077GB

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM1078GB
P
When the ambiance temperature becomes extremely low or extremely high, or when HDD is malfunctioning,
AV control unit displays the message and limits the AV control unit function.
FAIL-SAFE CONDITIONS
• When the ambiance temperature is −20°C (-4°F) or lower, or when it is 70°C (158°F) or higher
• when HDD is malfunctioning

AV CONTROL UNIT
Display
The messages displayed on fail-safe conditions are as shown below:
JPNIA0414GB
Fail-safe mode Display (display of the fail-safe condition)

HDD system is experiencing problems due to extreme low temperature.
When HDD temperature is low
Normal operation will resume when temperature rises.
HDD system is experiencing problems due to extreme high temperature.
When HDD temperature is high
Normal operation will resume when temperature drops.
HDD system is not functioning.
Please contact your dealer for assistance.
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS
Function When Fail-safe Function is activated

Operation Only multifunction switch (preset switch) can be operated.
Air conditioner • LED of multifunction switch (preset switch) illuminates.
Display
• Aimed temperature, blow angle, and flow rate are displayed in simplified mode.
Operation Only ON/OFF and volume control operations by multifunction switch (preset switch) are possible.
Audio
Display No display (“Fail-safe mode” is displayed)
Operation Image tone cannot be controlled.
Camera
Display Cannot be superimposed. (warning display, tone control display)
Hands-free phone Operation Cannot be operated.
Navigation Operation Cannot be operated.
Self diagnosis The display in simplified mode of fail-safe condition
CONSULT-III diagnosis Cannot be operated.
Ability Operation Mode

There is an ability operation mode for Fail-safes due to low or high ambiance temperature.
If HDD data can be read, fail-safe is shown, then normal displays are displayed only for functions which can be
operated.
RELEASE CONDITIONS OF FAIL-SAFE
Fail-safe is released on following conditions and normal mode is restored.
When the temperature of HDD is low or high
If the ambient temperature becomes out of fail-safe condition range, normal mode is restored.
If the malfunction disappears, normal mode is restored.
NOTE:
• If fail-safe mode due to HDD malfunction is seen continuously, replace AV control unit.
• If fail-safe mode due to HDD malfunction is seen temporarily, check the “Error History” of Confirmation/
Adjustment mode. If this is normal, then continue the normal operation, observing the function. (It might be a
temporary malfunction of HDD.)

AV CONTROL UNIT
A
B
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010] AV-681, "Diagnosis Procedure" C
U1201 Gyro NO CONN [U1201] AV-684, "DTC Logic" D
U1217 BLUETOOTH CONN [U1217] AV-686, "DTC Logic"
E
U1218 HDD CONN [U1218] AV-687, "DTC Logic"
U1219 HDD READ [U1219] AV-688, "DTC Logic"
U1220 XM SERIAL COMM [U1220] AV-689, "DTC Logic" F
U121A HDD WRITE [U121A] AV-690, "DTC Logic"
U121B HDD COMM [U121B] AV-691, "DTC Logic"
G
U121C HDD ACCESS [U121C] AV-692, "DTC Logic"
U121D DSP CONN [U121D] AV-693, "DTC Logic"
U121E DSP COMM [U121E] AV-694, "DTC Logic" H
U121F INTERNAL COMM [U121F] AV-695, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1204 GPS COMM [U1204] AV-696, "Diagnosis Procedure"
I
U1205 GPS ROM [U1205] AV-697, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1206 GPS RAM [U1206] AV-698, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1207 GPS RTC [U1207] AV-699, "Diagnosis Procedure" J
U1244 GPS ANTENNA CONN [U1244] AV-702, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1247 REAR DISP CONN [U1247] AV-703, "Diagnosis Procedure"
K
U1258 XM ANTENNA CONN [U1258] AV-705, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1300 • AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] L
U121F • INTERNAL COMM [U121F]
M
U1246 • VIDEO DIST CONN [U1246]
U1248 • DVD DECK CONN [U1248]
AV-706, "Description" AV

O
AV-706, "Description" P
U125C • SONAR CONN [U125C]
U1248 • DVD DECK CONN [U1248]
U1246 • VIDEO DIST CONN [U1246]

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JPNIA0006ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
(B)
ON
Ignition
2
(P)
OFF
Ignition
3
(L)
ACC
4 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
5
Ground AUX image ground — switch — 0V
(G)
ON
Ignition
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
JSNIA1030ZZ
7 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
(R) (HP) signal
ON
SKIB3601E

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
At RGB image display 5.0 V B
9
Ignition C
(B) At camera image display
ON
D
PKIB4948J
Ignition
Ground Input switch
(BR) (CONT→DISP) brightness. F
ON
PKIB5039J
G
Ignition H
(W) display
ON
I
SKIB2251J
Ignition
13
(B) J
ON
14 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
15
Ground AUX image signal Input switch AUX image display L
(R)
ON
SKIB2251J
M
ment mode, and then dis- AV
Ignition
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen. O
JSNIA1029ZZ
Start confirmation/adjust- P
Ignition
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
JSNIA1031ZZ

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
19
(G)
ON
SKIB3603E
Ignition
(W) signal
ON
SKIB3598E
21 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
ON
PKIB5039J
23 — Shield — — — —
NOTE:

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
SWITCH virtually. A
AV
JCNWM1054GB P

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1055GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1056GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1057GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1058GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1059GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1060GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1061GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1062GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1063GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1064GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1065GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1066GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1067GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1068GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1069GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1070GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1071GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1072GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1073GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1074GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1075GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1076GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1077GB

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1078GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
REAR DISPLAY UNIT
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JPNIA0007ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
(B)
ON
Ignition
2
(B)
ON
Ignition
3
(Y)
ON
Ignition
4
(LG)
ON
Ignition Headphone mode is ON. 4.0 V
5
Ground Headphone ON signal Input switch
(P) Headphone mode is OFF. 0V
ON
Ignition
6
(GR)
ACC
8 — Shield — — — —
Rear seat remote controller

Ignition
9 Communication signal operation when AUX or
(V) (DISP→DIST) DVD image is displayed on
ON
rear displayed.
PKIB5039J

Ignition
Ground Input switch
(SB) (DIST→DISP) DVD image is displayed on
ON
rear displayed.
PKIB5039J

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition B
switch — 0V
11 ON
Ground Ignition signal Input
(O) Ignition C
switch — 5.0 V
ACC
12 — Shield — — — — D
13* — — — — — —
(G)
E
Ignition When AUX or DVD image

13 Composite image synchro-
(G)
Ground
nizing signal
Input switch is displayed on rear display F
ON unit.
SKIB0825E G
H
14
Ground Composite image signal Input switch is displayed on rear display
(R)
ON unit.
I
SKIB2251J
When AUX or DVD image

0V J
is displayed.
Ignition
15 Rear seat remote controller K
(BR) operation when AUX or
ON
DVD image is displayed on
rear display.
L
PKIB4948J
Ignition
16 M
— Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
AV
Ignition
(Y) signal
ON O
SKIB3598E
Ignition
(O) (HP) signal
ON
SKIB0825E

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
19
Ground RGB ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON

Ignition
20 RGB signal (B: blue) for operation when AUX or
Ground Input switch
(G) rear display unit DVD image is displayed on
ON
rear display unit.
JSNIA1031ZZ

Ignition
21 operation when AUX or
(R) DVD image is displayed on
ON
rear display unit.
JSNIA1030ZZ

Ignition
22 operation when AUX or
(W) DVD image is displayed on
ON
rear display unit.
JSNIA1029ZZ
Ignition
27 25 Headphone sound signal
Input switch Headphone sound output
(BR) (Y) RH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
Input switch Headphone sound output
(L) (P) LH
ON
SKIB3609E
NOTE:
*: This harness is not used.
NOTE:

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
SWITCH virtually. A
AV
JCNWM1054GB P

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1055GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1056GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1057GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1058GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1059GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1060GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1061GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1062GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1063GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1064GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1065GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1066GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1067GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1068GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1069GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1070GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1071GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1072GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1073GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1074GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1075GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1076GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM1077GB

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM1078GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JSNIA1448ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
— — — —
(G) (H) Output
— — — —
(R) (L) Output
7 — Shield — — — —

8 6 Composite image signal for
Output switch is displayed on front display
(R) (G) front display unit
ON unit.
SKIB2251J
Ignition
19 When AUX image is dis-
21 AUX image signal Input switch
(W) played.
ON
SKIB2251J
21 — Shield — — — —
22 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
23 When DVD image is dis-
22 DVD image signal Input switch
(P) played.
ON
SKIB2251J
24* — — — — — —
(L)

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B

Ignition
25 RGB signal (R: red) for rear operation when AUX or C
(W) display unit DVD image is displayed on
ON
rear display unit.
JSNIA1029ZZ D
Rear seat remote controller E

Ignition
26 RGB signal (G: green) for operation when AUX or
(R) rear display unit DVD image is displayed on
ON
rear display unit.
F
JSNIA1030ZZ
Ignition
27 RGB ground for rear dis- G
(B) play unit
ON
H
Ignition
28 RGB signal (B: blue) for operation when AUX or
(G) rear display unit DVD image is displayed on
ON I
rear display unit.
JSNIA1031ZZ
J
Ignition
29 Vertical synchronizing (VP) K
(R) signal for rear display unit
ON
L
SKIB3598E
M
Ignition
(W) (HP) signal for rear display
ON
AV
SKIB0825E
31 O
— Shield — — — —
(B)

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
When AUX or DVD image
is displayed on rear display 0V
unit.
Ignition
32 RGB area (YS) signal for
Ground Output switch Rear seat remote controller
(B) rear display
ON operation when AUX or
DVD image is displayed on
rear display unit.
PKIB4948J
33* — — — — — —
(G)

34 Composite image signal for
Ground Output switch is displayed on rear display
(R) rear display unit
ON unit.
SKIB2251J
35 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
switch — 0V
36 ON
Ground Ignition signal Output
(O) Ignition
switch — 5.0 V
ACC
38 — Shield — — — —

Ignition
Ground Input switch
(V) (DISP→DIST) DVD image is displayed on
ON
rear display unit.
PKIB5039J

Ignition
(SB) (DIST→DISP) DVD image is displayed on
ON
rear display unit.
PKIB5039J
Ignition
53
(B)
ON
Ignition
54
(O)
OFF

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition B
55
(SB)
ACC
Ignition C
56
(G)
ON
Ignition Headphone mode is ON. 4.0 V D
60
Ground Headphone ON signal Output switch
(P) Headphone mode is OFF. 0V
ON
NOTE:
E
F
NOTE:
AV

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
SWITCH virtually.
JCNWM1054GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
AV
JCNWM1055GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
JCNWM1056GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
AV
JCNWM1057GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
JCNWM1058GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
AV
JCNWM1059GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
JCNWM1060GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
AV
JCNWM1061GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
JCNWM1062GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
AV
JCNWM1063GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
JCNWM1064GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
AV
JCNWM1065GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
JCNWM1066GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
AV
JCNWM1067GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
JCNWM1068GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
AV
JCNWM1069GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
JCNWM1070GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
AV
JCNWM1071GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
JCNWM1072GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
AV
JCNWM1073GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
JCNWM1074GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
AV
JCNWM1075GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
JCNWM1076GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
AV
JCNWM1077GB

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
JCNWM1078GB

BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP.
A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
JSNIA1223ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name G
Output
H
Ignition
(Y) (G) speaker LH
ON
I
SKIB3609E
Ignition
Output switch Audio output K
(SB) (V) speaker RH
ON
SKIB3609E L
Ignition M
(L) (P) speaker LH
ON
AV
SKIB3609E
O
Ignition
(O) (W) er LH
ON P
SKIB3609E

BOSE AMP.
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
(LG) (Y) speaker RH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
11
(GR)
OFF
Ignition
12
(B)
ON
Ignition
(Y) (G) er
ON
SKIB3609E

17
ON
Ignition
18 32
Sound signal front LH Input switch Audio output
(P) (L)
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
19 20
(R) (G)
ON
SKIB3609E

BOSE AMP.
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
21 22 C
(V) (SB)
ON
SKIB3609E D
E
Ignition
23 33
(BR) (Y)
ON
F
SKIB3609E
Ignition
25 G
(L)
ACC
H
Ignition
(V) (LG) er RH
ON I
SKIB3609E
J
Ignition
31
(GR)
ACC
K
NOTE:
L
AV

BOSE AMP.
SWITCH virtually.
JCNWM1054GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1055GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1056GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1057GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1058GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1059GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1060GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1061GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1062GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1063GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1064GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1065GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1066GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1067GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1068GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1069GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1070GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1071GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1072GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1073GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1074GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1075GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1076GB

BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM1077GB

BOSE AMP.
JCNWM1078GB

IPOD ADAPTER
IPOD ADAPTER
A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
JSNIA0618ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.) G
+ – Signal name
Output
H
Ignition
(R) (G) ed.
ON I
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(BR) (Y) ed.
ON
SKIB3609E
L
Ignition
3
(O)
ACC M
— — — —
(V) (L) Output
Ignition AV
5
(Y)
OFF
Ignition O
8
(W)
ON

IPOD ADAPTER
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

9
JPNIA0462GB
NOTE:

10
JPNIA0462GB
Ignition
11
(L)
ON
Ignition
(R) (W) ed.
ON
SKIB3609E
15 — Shield — — — —
— — — —
(LG) (H) Output
Ignition
17
(B)
ON
19 — Shield — — — —
Ground Input switch
(SB) tion signal
Ignition
22
(W)
ON
Ignition
(B) (W) ed.
ON
SKIB3609E

IPOD ADAPTER
A
NOTE:
SWITCH virtually. B
AV
JCNWM1054GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1055GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1056GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1057GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1058GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1059GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1060GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1061GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1062GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1063GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1064GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1065GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1066GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1067GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1068GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1069GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1070GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1071GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1072GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1073GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1074GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1075GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1076GB

IPOD ADAPTER
JCNWM1077GB

IPOD ADAPTER
AV
JCNWM1078GB

DVD PLAYER
DVD PLAYER
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JPNIA0007ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
(B)
ON
Ignition
2
(Y)
OFF
3
(L) Lighting switch is ON. 12.0 V
ON
Ignition
4
(V)
ACC
5
— Shield — — — —
(B)
Ignition
7 5 When DVD image is dis-
DVD image signal Output switch
(P) (B) played.
ON
SKIB2251J
*
9 — — — — — —
(L)
Ignition
13 11
AUX sound signal LH Input switch AUX sound output.
(B) (G)
ON
SKIB3609E

DVD PLAYER
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
14 12 C
AUX sound signal RH Input switch AUX sound output.
(W) (R)
ON
SKIB3609E D
16 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
Output switch Headphone sound output.
(G) (R) LH F
ON
SKIB3609E
G
Ignition H
Output switch Headphone sound output.
(BR) (Y) RH
ON
I
SKIB3609E
J
Ignition
21 22 Sound signal LH
Output switch AUX or DVD sound output.
(Y) (BR) (DVD and AUX sound)
ON
K
SKIB3609E
Ignition
23 24 Sound signal RH
Output switch AUX or DVD sound output. M
(R) (G) (DVD and AUX sound)
ON
SKIB3609E AV
25
— Shield — — — —
(B)
27 O
— Shield — — — —
(B)
— — — —
(R) (L) Output P
— — — —
(G) (H) Output
NOTE:

DVD PLAYER
NOTE:
SWITCH virtually.
JCNWM1054GB

DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM1055GB

DVD PLAYER
JCNWM1056GB

DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM1057GB

DVD PLAYER
JCNWM1058GB

DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM1059GB

DVD PLAYER
JCNWM1060GB

DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM1061GB

DVD PLAYER
JCNWM1062GB

DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM1063GB

DVD PLAYER
JCNWM1064GB

DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM1065GB

DVD PLAYER
JCNWM1066GB

DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM1067GB

DVD PLAYER
JCNWM1068GB

DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM1069GB

DVD PLAYER
JCNWM1070GB

DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM1071GB

DVD PLAYER
JCNWM1072GB

DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM1073GB

DVD PLAYER
JCNWM1074GB

DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM1075GB

DVD PLAYER
JCNWM1076GB

DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM1077GB

DVD PLAYER
JCNWM1078GB

A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
JSNIA0833ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name G
Output
Ignition
1
(B) H
ON
Ignition
2
(Y)
OFF I
Ignition
3
(G)
ON J
Ignition
4
(LG)
ACC
K
5
OFF
L
NOTE:
(destination unit). M
Ignition
Ground Input switch
(V) (8-pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25 MPH)
ON
AV
JSNIA0012GB
O
7
ON
P
Ignition
13
(B)
ON

Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
SKIB3827E
A: Sensor signal 1
14
(GR)
ON
SKIB3828E
A: Sensor signal 1
B: Sensor signal 2
SKIB3827E
A: Sensor signal 1
15
(SB)
ON
SKIB3828E
A: Sensor signal 1
B: Sensor signal 2
Ignition
16 Turn the steering around the
(L) neutral position
ON
SKIB3829E
A: Sensor signal 3
B: Sensor signal 1
17 Input/
(W) Output
18 Input/
(P) Output

Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
21 Input/ B
(O) Output
22 Input/
(V) Output C
Ignition
23 24 Auxiliary infrared LED power “CAMERA” switch is ON or
Output switch 5.5 V
(LG) (G) supply shift position is “R”.
ON D
E
F
Ignition JSNIA0834GB
27
(W)
ON
G
Other than camera image

display
H
JSNIA0835GB
28 — Shield — — — — I
J
Ignition
29 30 Side camera passenger side “CAMERA” switch is ON or
Input switch
(R) (Y) image signal shift position is “R”.
ON
K
JSNIA0834GB
31 — Shield — — — —
L
Ignition
32 Side camera passenger side
(W) ground
ON
M
Ignition
33 Side camera passenger side Input/ “CAMERA” switch is ON or AV
Ground switch
(BR) communication signal Output shift position is “R”.
ON
O
JSNIA0836GB
Ignition
34 Side camera passenger side “CAMERA” switch is ON or
(L) power supply shift position is “R”. P
ON

Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
35 Rear camera communication Input/ “CAMERA” switch is ON or
Ground switch
ON
JSNIA0836GB
Ignition
Ground Rear camera power supply Output switch 6.0 V
ON
37 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
38
Ground Rear camera ground — switch — 0V
(L)
ON
Ignition
Rear camera image signal Input switch
(Y) (BR) shift position is “R”.
ON
JSNIA0834GB
Ignition
Front camera image signal Input switch
(L) (BR) shift position is “R”.
ON
JSNIA0834GB
43 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
44
Ground Front camera ground — switch — 0V
(Y)
ON
Ignition
45 Front camera communication Input/ “CAMERA” switch is ON or
Ground switch
ON
JSNIA0836GB
Ignition
Ground Front camera power supply Output switch 6.0 V
ON
Ignition
47 Side camera driver side com- Input/ “CAMERA” switch is ON or
Ground switch
(BR) munication signal Output shift position is “R”.
ON
JSNIA0836GB

Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition B
48 Side camera driver side power “CAMERA” switch is ON or
(L) supply shift position is “R”.
ON
49 — Shield — — — — C
Ignition
50 Side camera driver side
(W) ground
ON D
Ignition E
51 52 Side camera driver side image “CAMERA” switch is ON or
Input switch
(R) (Y) signal shift position is “R”.
ON
F
JSNIA0834GB

G
NOTE:
AV

SWITCH virtually.
JCNWM1054GB

AV
JCNWM1055GB

JCNWM1056GB

AV
JCNWM1057GB

JCNWM1058GB

AV
JCNWM1059GB

JCNWM1060GB

AV
JCNWM1061GB

JCNWM1062GB

AV
JCNWM1063GB

JCNWM1064GB

AV
JCNWM1065GB

JCNWM1066GB

AV
JCNWM1067GB

JCNWM1068GB

AV
JCNWM1069GB

JCNWM1070GB

AV
JCNWM1071GB

JCNWM1072GB

AV
JCNWM1073GB

JCNWM1074GB

AV
JCNWM1075GB

JCNWM1076GB

AV
JCNWM1077GB

JCNWM1078GB

A
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL B

C
Around view monitor operating (sonar operating). On
Ignition switch
SONAR OPE Around view monitor non-operating (sonar non-operat-
ON Off
ing).
D
Ignition switch Buzzer is output condition. On
BUZZER OUTPUT
ON Buzzer is not output condition. Off
When a sensor is abnormal. ERROR E
LV.2
CR SEN [FL]
Ignition switch is 50 cm (19.6 in) or more and less then 60 cm (23.6 in). F
ON
LV.3
The distance between corner sensor and an obstacle G
LV.4
When a sensor is not detection. LV.0 H
LV.2
CR SEN [FR]
ON I
LV.3
LV.4 J
K
LV.2
CR SEN [RL]
ON
LV.3 L
LV.4
M
The distance between the corner sensor and an obstacle AV
LV.2
CR SEN [RR]
ON
LV.3
O
LV.4

TERMINAL LAYOUT
JSNIA0303ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
Input switch
(W) (B) LH shift position is “R”.
ON
JSNIA0837GB
Ignition
Input switch
(R) (B) RH shift position is “R”.
ON
JSNIA0837GB
Ignition
Input switch
(L) (B) LH shift position is “R”.
ON
JSNIA0837GB
Ignition
Input switch
(Y) (B) RH shift position is “R”.
ON
JSNIA0837GB
Ignition
12
Ground Sensor ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
Ignition
13
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — 12.0 V
(V)
ACC
18
— K-line (CONSULT-III) — — — —
(P)

Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
19 Input/ B
— AV communication (H) — — —
(G) Output
20 Input/
— AV communication (L) — — —
(R) Output C
NOTE:
the distance to an obstacle. D
Ignition
23
Ground Buzzer drive signal Output switch When buzzer operation
(GR)
ON E
SKIB8943E
F
Ignition
24
(B)
ON
G
NOTE: H
AV

SWITCH virtually.
JCNWM1054GB

AV
JCNWM1055GB

JCNWM1056GB

AV
JCNWM1057GB

JCNWM1058GB

AV
JCNWM1059GB

JCNWM1060GB

AV
JCNWM1061GB

JCNWM1062GB

AV
JCNWM1063GB

JCNWM1064GB

AV
JCNWM1065GB

JCNWM1066GB

AV
JCNWM1067GB

JCNWM1068GB

AV
JCNWM1069GB

JCNWM1070GB

AV
JCNWM1071GB

JCNWM1072GB

AV
JCNWM1073GB

JCNWM1074GB

AV
JCNWM1075GB

JCNWM1076GB

AV
JCNWM1077GB

JCNWM1078GB
• Sonar control unit has diagnosis function which can detect corner sensor malfunction and sensor harness
disconnection.
• It transmits the malfunction status to around view monitor control unit and informs the malfunction to the user
by displaying continuously red sonar indicator.

DTC Display item Malfunction is detected when... Reference

CORNER SENSOR [FL] B
B2700 Corner sensor front left is malfunctioning. AV-708, "DTC Logic"
[B2700]
SENSOR HARNESS OPEN [CR-FL]
B2701 Corner sensor front left harness circuit is open. AV-709, "Diagnosis Procedure"
[B2701] C
CORNER SENSOR [FR]
B2702 Corner sensor front right is malfunctioning. AV-710, "DTC Logic"
[B2072]
SENSOR HARNESS OPEN [CR- D
B2703 FR] Corner sensor front right harness circuit is open. AV-711, "Diagnosis Procedure"
[B2703]
CORNER SENSOR [RL] E
B2704 Corner sensor rear left is malfunctioning. AV-712, "DTC Logic"
[B2704]
SENSOR HARNESS OPEN [CR-RL]
B2705 Corner sensor rear left harness circuit is open. AV-713, "Diagnosis Procedure"
[B2705]
F
CORNER SENSOR [RR]
B2706 Corner sensor rear right is malfunctioning. AV-714, "DTC Logic"
[B2706]
B2707 RR] Corner sensor rear right harness circuit is open. AV-715, "Diagnosis Procedure" G
[B2707]
NOTE:
“TIME” means the following. H
• 0: Means detected malfunction at present. (From malfunction detection to turning ignition switch OFF)
• 1–39: Means detected malfunction in past.
I
AV

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [NAVIGATION (TWIN MONITOR)]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
RELATED TO NAVIGATION

• “MULTI AV” is displayed on system
Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-671,
"CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
Procedure".
SULT-III is initialized.
Multifunction switch or preset switch malfunction.
Only specified switch cannot be operat- Perform multifunction switch and preset switch self-di-
ed. agnosis function. Refer to AV-656, "Diagnosis Descrip-
tion".
There is malfunction in the CONSULT- Perform detected DTC self-diagnosis.
III self-diagnosis result. Refer to AV-671, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
Fuel economy display, vehicle set-
ting operation is abnormal. Ignition signal circuit malfunction (AV control unit).
There is no malfunction in the self-diag-
Refer to AV-716, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Pro-
nosis results.
cedure".
On the setting display select “system AV control unit malfunction.
Guide sound is not heard. sound (guide sound volume, etc.),” and Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-1045, "Exploded
confirm that guide sound is ON. View".
RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE

• Check that the cellular phone is corresponding type (Bluetooth™ correspond) when the hands-free related
• There is a case that malfunction occurs due to the version change of the phone type, etc. even though it is a
cellular phone.
Simple Check for Bluetooth™ Communication
If cellular phone and AV control unit cannot be connected with Bluetooth™ communication, following proce-
dure allows the technician to judge which device has malfunction.
2. Start CONSULT-III, then start Windows®.
if CONSULT-III* would be displayed on the device name.
NOTE:
Repair the cellular phone first, then perform diagnosis.
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom

Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location A

phone connection. (no connec-
Repeat the registration of cellular phone. Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-1045, "Exploded
tion is displayed on the display
View". B
at the guide.)
• Hands-free phone operation can be
made, but the communication cannot
be established. AV control unit malfunction. C
Hands-free phone cannot be
• Hands-free phone operation can be Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-1045, "Exploded
established.
performed, however, voice between View".
each other cannot be heard during the
conversation.
D
The other party's voice cannot
— Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-1045, "Exploded
be heard by hands-free phone. E
View".
Originating sound is not heard Sound operation function is normal. Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-1045, "Exploded
by the other party with hands- View". F
free phone communication. Microphone signal circuit malfunction.
RELATED TO AROUND VIEW MONITOR G

take H
Ignition signal circuit (around view monitor
control unit).
“Camera Cont.” of “Confirmation/Adjustment” can be
Refer to AV-721, "AROUND VIEW MONI- I
selected.
TOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Proce-
It does not switch to camera im- dure".
age even when the “CAMERA” • Around view monitor control unit power
switch is pressed or the selec- supply and ground circuits. J
tor lever is in the reverse posi- Refer to AV-721, "AROUND VIEW MONI-
tion. “Camera Cont.” of “Confirmation/Adjustment” cannot TOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Proce-
be selected. dure".
K
(MULTI AV)".
• Camera image signal circuit between L
around view monitor control unit and front
display unit.
Only superimposing is displayed.
(Only the image displayed by AV control unit is dis- M
• RGB (YS) area signal circuit between AV
played)
The screen switches when Refer toAV-727, "Diagnosis Procedure"
pressing the “CAMERA” switch AV-727, "Diagnosis Procedure".
or shifting the selector lever to
AV
the reverse position, however, • Communication circuit between AV control
all views are not displayed. unit and front display unit.
(MULTI AV)". O
Superimposing is not displayed.
• Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal cir-
cuit malfunction between AV control unit
and front display unit.
P
Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit
malfunction between AV control unit and
Camera image is rolling. AUX image is rolling
front display unit.

take
It cannot be switched to rear
view monitor even when the se-
The front view is displayed normally. Reverse signal circuit. (AV control unit)
lector lever is in the reverse po-
sition.
The predicted course line dis-
The “Steer. Angle Sensor” is not turned ON at “Con- Steering angle sensor signal circuits. Refer
play in front view and rear view
nection Confirmation” of “Camera Cont.” to AV-746, "Diagnosis Procedure".
is malfunctioning.
• Front camera image signal circuit.
• Front camera power supply and ground
• The front view screen is not Check the item Front • COMM Status: NG
circuits.
Refer to AV-755, "Diagnosis Procedure"
• The front of Birds-Eye view Confirmation” mode of
screen is not displayed. “Camera Cont.” • Image Output Signal: OK
Front camera communication signal circuit.
• COMM Status: NG
• COMM Line: NG
• Rear camera image signal circuit.
• Rear camera power supply and ground
• The rear view screen is not Check the item Rear • COMM Status: NG
circuits.
• The rear of Birds-Eye view Confirmation” mode of
screen is not displayed. “Camera Cont.” • Image Output Signal: OK Rear camera communication signal
• COMM Status: NG circuits. Refer to AV-757, "Diagnosis Proce-
• COMM Line: NG dure".
• Side camera RH image signal circuit.
Check the item Pass- • Side camera RH power supply and ground
• The front-side screen is not • COMM Status: NG
Side Camera in “Con- circuits.
displayed. • COMM Line: NG
nection Confirmation” Refer to AV-764, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• The side RH of Birds-Eye
mode of “Camera • Image Output Signal: OK
view screen is not displayed. Side camera RH communication circuit. Re-
Cont.” • COMM Status: NG
• COMM Line: NG
• Side camera LH image signal circuit.
• Side camera LH power supply and ground
Check the item Dr-Side • COMM Status: NG
circuits.
The side LH of Birds-eye view Camera at “Connection • COMM Line: NG
screen is not displayed. Confirmation” mode of
“Camera Cont.” • Image Output Signal: OK
Side camera LH communication circuit. Re-
• COMM Status: NG
• COMM Line: NG
When shift position is other
than “R” the front-side and front
screen or the Birds-Eye view Vehicle speed signal (around view monitor
—
and front screen remain dis- control unit).
playing even if the vehicle
speed increases.
Around view monitor does not Certain States restrict the operation so that
start other than shift position — around view monitor does not start other
“R” than at shift position "R".
RELATED TO CAMERA ASSISTANCE SONAR

Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location / Action to take A

• Corner sensor malfunction in corresponding area
The malfunction is detected in only 1 in-
• Corner sensor harness circuit in corresponding area
dicator
Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis of sonar system.
(Always displayed in red) B
Refer to AV-678, "CONSULT-III Function (SONAR)".
The malfunction is detected in • Corner sensor ground circuit.
the sonar indicator Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis of sonar system.
(Always displayed in red) Refer to AV-678, "CONSULT-III Function (SONAR)". C
The malfunction is detected in all 4 indi-
• Sonar control unit power supply and ground circuits.
cators (Always displayed in red)
Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis of multi AV system.
D
The buzzer is turned ON when perform- Replace sonar control unit. Refer to AV-1072, "Exploded
ing “Buzzer” in “Active test” of “Sonar”. View"
The sonar indicator is normal, E
but the buzzer does not sound The buzzer is not turned ON when per-
forming “Buzzer” in “Active test” of “So- Replace buzzer. Refer to AV-1075, "Exploded View".
nar”.
F
Front Display Unit
G
• “MULTI AV” is displayed on system se- Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. H
lection screen when the CONSULT-III Refer to AV-671, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
is started.
RGB image is not shown.
AV control unit power supply and ground circuit. I
• “MULTI AV” is not displayed on system
selection screen when the CONSULT-
dure".
III is started.
RGB signal (R: red) circuit malfunction between AV con- J
Light blue (Cyan) tint. trol unit and front display unit.
RGB signal (G: green) circuit malfunction between AV K
Color of RGB image is not
Purple (Magenta) tint. control unit and front display unit.
proper.
RGB signal (B: blue) circuit malfunction between AV con-
L
Screen looks yellowish. trol unit and front display unit.
RGB synchronizing signal circuit malfunction between AV
RGB screen is rolling. — control unit and front display unit. M
Rear Display Unit

AV
between video distributor and rear display unit. O
• Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal circuit malfunction
The menu screen is not dis- For rear display unit, AUX and DVD im-
between video distributor and rear display unit.
played. age are normal. P
• RGB area (YS) signal circuit malfunction between vid-
eo distributor and rear display unit.

RGB signal (R: red) circuit malfunction between video dis-
Light blue (Cyan) tint. tributor and rear display unit.
RGB signal (G: green) circuit malfunction between video
Color of RGB image (menu dis-
Purple (Magenta) tint. distributor and rear display unit.
play screen) is not proper.
RGB signal (B: blue) circuit malfunction between video
Screen looks yellowish. distributor and rear display unit.
RELATED TO VOICE CONTROL

Voice sounds at “Voice Microphone Test”
Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-1045, "Exploded
The voice cannot be controlled of Confirmation/Adjustment mode.
View".
even if the voice control screen
is displayed. Voice does not sound at “Voice Micro-
Microphone circuit malfunction.
phone Test” of Confirmation/Adjustment
mode.
Steering switch “SOURCE”, “MENU UP”,
“MENU DOWN” operates, but “ ” does Replace steering switch.
not operate.
The voice cannot be controlled
Steering switch's “SOURCE”, “MENU
(Voice control screen is not dis- Steering switch signal A circuit malfunction.
played). UP”, “MENU DOWN”, “ ” does not oper- Refer to AV-748, "Diagnosis Procedure".
ate.
All steering switches do not work.
RELATED TO AUDIO

Disk eject signal circuit malfunction.
The disk cannot be removed. —
• Amp. ON signal circuit.
No sound from all speakers. • BOSE amp. power supply and ground circuits.
Refer to AV-719, "BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure".
• Woofer power supply and ground circuits.
Audio sound is not heard. Sound is not heard from woofer. • Sound signal (woofer) circuits.
• Woofer amp. ON signal circuit.
Sound is not heard from center speaker. Sound signals center speaker circuit.
Sound is heard only from specific places. Sound signal circuits of suspect system.
—

A
1. Check satellite radio antenna (antenna base) B
mounting nut for looseness.
Satellite radio is not received. NOTE:
There is no malfunction in the CON- Tightening torque: 6.5 N·m (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb)
SULT-III self-diagnosis result. 2. Visually check for satellite radio antenna feeder.
C
3. Replace the satellite radio antenna (antenna base).
4. Replace the AV control unit. D
• Antenna amp. ON signal circuit.
• Antenna feeder.
E
®
RELATED TO iPod
nose the vehicle. If no malfunction is detected, replace the iPod harness. F
NOTE:
G
• iPod sound signal circuits between AV control unit and
The sound of iPod® is not iPod adapter. H
heard. • iPod sound signal circuits between iPod® and iPod
adapter.
It does not change to iPod There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. I
iPod connection recognition signal circuit between iPod®
played when it comes to iPod Connected to iPod®. J
mode. and iPod adapter.
tery. adapter.
K
Accessing the iPod® is unavail- L

M
None of the steering switch operations work. AV
Only specified switch cannot be operated.
Replace steering switch.
Steering switch's “SOURCE”, “MENU UP”, “MENU DOWN” O
Steering switch signal A circuit malfunction.
and “ ” switches do not work. Refer to AV-748, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Steering switch's “VOL UP”, “VOL DOWN”, “ ” and “ ” Steering switch signal B circuit malfunction.
P
switches do not work. Refer to AV-750, "Diagnosis Procedure".
RELATED TO AUXILIARY INPUT

NOTE:


AUX image signal circuit malfunction between auxiliary
Front display unit and rear dis- DVD image is normal. input jacks and video distributor.
play unit, AUX image is not dis- Refer to AV-738, "Diagnosis Procedure".
played. Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
DVD image is not displayed.
AUX image signal circuit malfunction between auxiliary
DVD image is normal. input jacks and video distributor.
For front display unit, AUX im- • Composite image signal circuits malfunction between
age is not displayed (Menu dis- video distributor and front display unit.
play is normal). DVD image is not displayed (Menu display Refer to AV-730, "Diagnosis Procedure".
is normal). • RGB area (YS) signal circuit malfunction between AV
For front display unit, AUX im- Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal circuit malfunction
DVD image is not displayed (Also, menu
age is not displayed (Menu dis- between AV control unit and front display unit.
display is not displayed).
play is not displayed, too). Refer to AV-728, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit malfunction be-
For front display unit, AUX im-
DVD image is rolling. tween AV control unit and front display unit.
age is rolling.
For rear display unit, AUX im- Composite image signal circuits malfunction between
DVD image is not displayed (Menu display
age is not displayed (Menu dis- video distributor and rear display unit.
is normal).
play is normal). Refer to AV-737, "Diagnosis Procedure".
At AUX of rear display, menu
AUX image is normal. tion between video distributor and rear display unit.
display is not displayed.
Sound signal circuit between DVD player and AV control
DVD sound is not normal, neither.
unit.
There is no AUX sound.
The sound other than AUX sound is nor- AUX sound signal circuit between auxiliary input jacks
mal. and DVD player.
Sound signal circuit between auxiliary input jacks and
DVD sound is normal.
There is no AUX sound from DVD player.
speaker on the right or left side. Sound signal circuit between DVD player and AV control
DVD sound is not normal, neither.
unit.
It does not change to AUX There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
mode. self-diagnosis result. Refer to AV-671, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
RELATED TO DVD MODE

DVD image signal circuit.
Front display unit and rear dis- AUX image is normal.
play unit, DVD image is not dis-
played. Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
AUX image is not displayed.
• Composite image signal circuits malfunction between
video distributor and front display unit.
For front display unit, DVD im-
AUX image is not displayed (Menu display Refer to AV-730, "Diagnosis Procedure".
age is not displayed (Menu dis-
is normal). • RGB area (YS) signal circuit malfunction between AV
play is normal).

A
For front display unit, DVD im- Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal circuit malfunction
AUX image is not displayed (Also, menu
age is not displayed (Also, between AV control unit and front display unit.
display is not displayed).
menu display is not displayed). Refer to AV-728, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit malfunction be- B
For front display, DVD image is
AUX image is rolling. tween AV control unit and front display unit.
rolling.
For rear display, DVD image is Composite image signal circuits malfunction between C
AUX image is not displayed (Menu display
not displayed (Menu display is video distributor and rear display unit.
is normal).
normal). Refer to AV-737, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit malfunction D
At DVD of rear display unit,
DVD image is normal. tion between video distributor and rear display unit. E
menu display is not displayed.
Refer to AV-734, "Diagnosis Procedure". F
Sound signal circuit between DVD player and AV control
There is no DVD sound. —
unit.
There is no DVD sound from Sound signal circuit between DVD player and AV control G
—
speaker on the right or left side. unit.
It does not change to DVD There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
mode. self-diagnosis result. Refer to AV-671, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)". H
RELATED TO HEADPHONE
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location I

The LED for headphones sound transmis-
Headphones sound signal circuit.
No sound is heard from head- sion is illuminated.
phones. J
The LED for headphones sound transmis-
Headphones ON signal circuit.
sion is not illuminated.
No sound is heard from head-
— Headphones sound signal circuit RH (LH). K
phones only for RH (LH).
RELATED TO REAR DISPLAY UNIT

L
M
• Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal circuit malfunction
The menu screen is not dis- For rear display unit, AUX and DVD im-
played. age are normal.
Refer to AV-736, "Diagnosis Procedure". AV
RGB signal (R: red) circuit malfunction between video dis- O
Light blue (Cyan) tint. tributor and rear display unit.
RGB signal (G: green) circuit malfunction between video P
Color of RGB image (menu dis-
Purple (Magenta) tint. distributor and rear display unit.
play screen) is not proper.
RGB signal (B: blue) circuit malfunction between video
Screen looks yellowish. distributor and rear display unit.

Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
Front display unit is not displayed.
AUX and DVD image are not
displayed. Composite image signal circuit between video distributor
Front display unit is normal. and rear display unit.
Rear display unit does not Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
—
open. Refer to AV-671, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".

A
• For Navigation system operation information, refer to Navigation system Owner's Manual. B
• Vehicle operation information, refer to Owner's Manual.
BASIC OPERATIONS
C
No image is displayed. The system in the video mode. Press <DISC-AUX> to change the mode. D
The volume is not set correctly, or it is turned off. Adjust the volume of voice guidance.
No voice guidance is available. Or E
The volume is too high or too low. Voice guidance is not provided for certain streets
No map is displayed on the screen. A screen other than map screen is displayed. Press <MAP>.
F
Some pixels in the display are dark- This condition is an inherent characteristic of liquid G
lected. hicle is driven. then operate the navigation system.
H
NOTE:
Locations stored in the Address Book and other memory functions may be lost if the vehicle's battery is dis-
connected or becomes discharged. If this occurs, service the vehicle's battery as necessary and re-enter the
I
information in the Address Book.
Related to basic operation J

The interior of the vehicle is too noisy. Close the windows or have other occupants quiet. K
The volume of your voice is too low. Speak louder
The volume if your voice is too loud. Speak softer
L
Your pronunciation is unclear Speak clearly
You are speaking before the voice recognition made is Press and release “ ” switch on the steering
The system does not switch, and speak a command after the tone M
ready
recognize your com- sounds
mand.
or Make sure to speak a command within 8 seconds
8 seconds or more have passed after you pressed and
The system recognizes
released “ ” switch on the steering switch.
after you press and release “ ” switch on the AV
your command incor- steering switch.
rectly
Only a limited range of voice commands is usable for Use a correct voice command appropriate for the
each screen. current screen O
If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fan speed
is automatically lowered and voice commands
The second of the fan od the air conditioner is too loud. can be recognized more easily.
Lower the fan speed as necessary or set the air P
conditioner to “Auto”.
Related to item choice

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, fol-
low the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error.
Where the solutions are listed b number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem
is resolved.

Symptom/ error message Solution

1. Ensure that the command format is valid.
2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise
level.
Displays “COMMAND NOT REC-
OGNIZED” or the system fails to in- 3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.
terpret the command correctly. NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then command should be tried with these
in place.
1.Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed
The system consistently selects by giving the Addressbook Directory or Phone Directory command.
the wrong voicetag
2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.
resolves.
Symptom Solution
el in the vehicle.
4.Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster
System fails to interpret the com- on),
1.Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can
The system consistently selects be confirmed by using the “List Names” command.
the wrong voicetag
RELATED TO AUDIO
NOTE:


Check if the CD/CF was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.
B
temperature. C
Check if the CD/CF is protected by copyright. F
Poor sound quality Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.
It takes a relatively long time before If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD/CF, or if it is a multi session disc, some
H
I
J
NOTE:
the signal. K
L
RELATED TO VEHICLE ICON

M
This is because the quantity of the displayed in-
formation is reduced so that the screen does
Names of roads differ between Plan not become too crowded. There is also a
chance that names of the roads may be dis- This is not a malfunction. AV
View and Birdview™. played multiple times, and the names appear-
ing on the screen may be different because of
a processing procedure.
The vehicle was transported after the ignition
O
Drive the vehicle for a while on a road where
switch was pressed off, for example, by a ferry
GPS signals can be received.
or car transporter.
The vehicle icon is not displayed in
the correct position. The position and direction of the vehicle icon P
This is not a malfunction. Drive the vehicle for
may be incorrect depending on the driving en-
a while to automatically correct the position
vironments and the levels of positioning accu-
and direction of the vehicle icon.
racy of the navigation system.
When the vehicle is traveling on a Because the new road is not stored in the map
new road, the vehicle icon is located data, the system automatically places the vehi-
on another road nearby. cle icon on the nearest road available.

The screen does not switch to the
The daytime screen was set the last time the Set the screen to the night screen mode using
night screen even after turning on
headlights were turned on. <Day/Night> when you turn on the headlights.
the headlights.
The map does not scroll even when The current location map screen is not dis-
Press <MAP>.
the vehicle is moving. played.
The current location map screen is not dis-
The vehicle icon is not displayed. Press <MAP>.
played.
Drive the vehicle for a while (at approximately
When using tire chains or replacing the tires, 19 MPH for about 30 minutes) to automatical-
speed calculations based on the speed sensor ly correct the vehicle icon position.
The location of the vehicle icon is may be incorrect. If this does not correct the vehicle icon posi-
misaligned from the actual position. tion, contact an INFINITI dealer.
The map data has a mistake or is incomplete
(the vehicle icon position is always misaligned
in the same area).
RELATED TO ROUTE CALCULATION AND VISUAL GUIDANCE

Waypoints are not included in Waypoints that you have already passed are not included in If you want to go to that waypoint
the auto reroute calculation. the auto reroute calculation. again, you need to edit the route.
Set the destination and perform route
Route calculation has not yet been performed.
calculation.
Route information is not dis- You are not driving on the suggested route. Drive on the suggested route.
played. Route guidance is set to off. Turn on route guidance.
Route information is not provided for certain types of roads
The auto reroute calculation (or
detour calculation) suggests Route calculations took priority conditions into consider-
the same route as the one pre- ation, but the same route was calculated.
viously suggested.
A maximum of 5 waypoints can be set
Five waypoints are already set on the route, including ones on the route. If you want to go to 6 or
A waypoint cannot be added.
that you have already passed. more waypoints, perform route calcu-
lations multiple times as necessary.
Roads near the destination cannot be calculated.
The starting point and destination are too close. Set a more distant destination.
The suggested route is not dis- Divide your trip by selecting one or two
played. The starting point and destination are too far away. intermediate destinations, and per-
form route calculations multiple times.
There are time restricted roads (by the day of the week, by Set [Use Time Restricted Roads] to
time) near the current vehicle location or destination. off.
A route is managed by sections between waypoints. If you
The part of the route that you passed the first waypoint, the section between the starting
have already passed is deleted. point and the waypoint is deleted. (It may not be deleted de-
pending on the area.)
If there are restrictions (such as one-way streets) on roads
Adjust the location of the starting of
close to the starting point or destination, the system may
the starting point or destination.
suggest an indirect route.
An indirect route is suggested.
The system may suggest an indirect route because route
calculation does not take into consideration some areas
such as narrow streets (gray roads.)

A
The landmark information does
Updated information will be included
not correspond to the actual in- This may be caused by insufficient or incorrect map data.
in the next version of the data.
formation.
The suggested route does not B
Set the starting point, waypoints and
exactly connect to the starting There is no data for route calculation closes to these loca-
destination on a main road, and per-
point, waypoints, or destinations.
form route calculation.
tion.
C
RELATED TO VOICE GUIDANCE
Symptom Possible cause Possible solution D

Voice guidance is only available at certain intersections
marked with? In some case, voice guidance is not avail- This is not a malfunction.
able even when the vehicle should make a turn. E
Voice guidance is not available Go back to the suggested route or request
The vehicle has deviated from the suggested route.
route calculation again
Voice guide is set to off. Turn on voice guidance. F
Route guidance is set to off. Turn on voice guidance.
The guidance contact does not
The contact of voice guidance may vary, depending on
correspond to the actual condi-
the types of intersections at which turn are made.
Follow all traffic rules and regulations. G
tion.
RELATED TO TRAFFIC INFORMATION

H
The traffic information is not set to on. Set the traffic information to on.
I
You are in an area where traffic information is not avail- Scroll to an area where traffic information is avail-
able able
The traffic information is
not displayed You have not subscribed to XM NavTraffic or, your sub-
Check your subscription status of XM NavTraffic. J
scription to XM NavTraffic has expired.
The map scale is set at a level where the display of icons Check that the map scale is set at a level in which
is impossible. the display of icons is possible.
K
With the automatic de- The automatic detour search is not intended for
tour route search ON, There is no faster route compared to the current route, avoiding traffic jams. It searches for the fasted
no detour route is set to based on the road network and traffic information. rote taking into consideration such things as traffic
avoid congested areas. jams. L
The route does not Observe the actual road condition and follow the
avoid road section with The navigation system is designed not to avoid this instructions on road for detour when necessary. If
traffic information stat- event because the actual period of closure may differ the road closure is for certain, use detour function
ing it is closed due to from the declared roadwork period. and set the detour distance to avoid the closed M
road construction. road section.
Traffic information dis-
Observe the actual road conditions and regula- AV
played differs from in-
Other media may use different information sources. tions. Always observe safe driving practices and
formation from other
follow all traffic regulations.
media (e.g. radio).

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [NAVIGATION (TWIN MONITOR)]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Service Manual.
WARNING:
ness connectors.
WARNING:
PKIA0306E

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [NAVIGATION (TWIN MONITOR)]
PKIA0307E
AV

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [NAVIGATION (TWIN MONITOR)]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
PBIC0191E

AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [NAVIGATION (TWIN MONITOR)]

AV CONTROL UNIT
B
REMOVAL
C
JSNIA1450ZZ
F
1: AV control unit
DISASSEMBLY G
JSNIA1500ZZ

4. Bracket RH
REMOVAL
P
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
FRONT DISPLAY UNIT
REMOVAL
JSNIA1451ZZ
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA1538ZZ
1. Bracket
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

REAR DISPLAY UNIT
REAR DISPLAY UNIT
A
JSNIA1452ZZ F
1. Rear display unit 2. Rear display cover

G
REMOVAL
H
1. Insert cloth-covered driver into gaps between rear display cover
(1) and headlining, and remove rear display cover.
: Vehicle front I
K
JSNIA1453ZZ
2. Remove rear display unit mounting bolts.

3. Disconnect connector, and remove rear display unit. L
INSTALLATION
M
AV

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
REMOVAL
JSNIA1454ZZ
1: Video distributor
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA1505ZZ
1. Video distributor player

2. Bracket LH
3. Bracket RH
REMOVAL
1. Remove instrument panel. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove video distributor mounting screws.
3. Disconnect connector and remove video distributor.
INSTALLATION

DVD PLAYER
DVD PLAYER
A
Exploded View B
REMOVAL
JSNIA1455ZZ
1. DVD player F
DISASSEMBLY
G
JSNIA1501ZZ
J
1. DVD player
2. Bracket LH
3. Bracket RH K
L
REMOVAL
1. Remove DVD finisher. Refer to IP-24, "Disassembly and Assembly".
2. Remove DVD player mounting screws. M
3. Remove connector and remove DVD player.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. AV

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
JSNIA1456ZZ
REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-11, "Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A
D
JSNIA1457ZZ
E

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installation". G
INSTALLATION H
AV

FRONT SQUAWKER
FRONT SQUAWKER
JSNIA1458ZZ
1. Front squawker
REMOVAL
1. Remove speaker grille. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION

REAR SQUAWKER
REAR SQUAWKER
A
D
JSNIA1459ZZ
E
1. Rear squawker

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage side finisher upper. Refer to INT-28, "Exploded View". G
INSTALLATION H
AV

CENTER SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
JSNIA1460ZZ
1. Center speaker
REMOVAL
1. Remove center speaker grille. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
INSTALLATION

WOOFER
WOOFER
A
D
JSNIA1461ZZ
E
1. Woofer clamp
2. Woofer
F
REMOVAL
G
3. Remove harness clip and connector. H
4. Remove woofer.
INSTALLATION
AV

BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP.
REMOVAL
JSNIA1462ZZ
1. BOSE amp.
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA1539ZZ
1. BOSE amp.
2. Bracket
REMOVAL
2. Remove BOSE amp. mounting nuts.
INSTALLATION

ANTENNA BASE
ANTENNA BASE
A
D
JSNIA1463ZZ
E
1. Antenna rod
2. Antenna base
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. F
G
REMOVAL
2. Remove antenna base mounting nut. H
INSTALLATION

J
CAUTION:
K
AV

REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA1464ZZ
1. Cluster lid D
REMOVAL
3. Disconnect connector and remove multifunction switch.
INSTALLATION

PRESET SWITCH
PRESET SWITCH
A
REMOVAL B
DISASSEMBLY
C
H
JPNIA1102ZZ
1. Clock 2. Cluster lid C 3. Preset switch I
J
REMOVAL
2. Remove preset switch mounting screws. K
3. Disconnect connector and remove preset switch.
1. Clock L
2. Preset switch
A. Screw
B. Screw M
C. Screw
AV
JSNIA1481ZZ
INSTALLATION
O
NOTE:
to get caught in between AV control unit and preset switch. P

IPOD ADAPTER
IPOD ADAPTER
JSNIA1465ZZ
1. iPod adapter
REMOVAL
1. Remove front display unit with bracket. Refer to AV-1046, "Removal and Installation".
4. Disconnect connector and remove iPod adapter.
INSTALLATION

IPOD CONNECTOR
IPOD CONNECTOR
A
D
JSNIA1466ZZ
E
1. iPod connector

F
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
AV

JSNIA1467ZZ
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
A
REMOVAL B
DISASSEMBLY
C
JSNIA0132ZZ
F
1. Microphone
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003926504 G
REMOVAL
1. Remove map lamp assembly. Refer to INT-23, "Exploded View". H
bly.
I
K
JSNIA0132ZZ
INSTALLATION L
AV

GPS ANTENNA
GPS ANTENNA
JSNIA1468GB

GPS ANTENNA
A
REMOVAL
1. Remove instrument panel. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
B
2. Remove GPS antenna mounting screw.
3. Remove GPS antenna (1).
C
JSNIA1482ZZ
INSTALLATION F
AV

JPNIA0898ZZ
1. Around view monitor control unit
REMOVAL
1. Remove front seat (LH side). Refer to SE-70, "Exploded View".
3. Remove around view monitor control unit mounting screws.
4. Disconnect connector and remove around view monitor control unit.
INSTALLATION
3. Perform predicted course line center position adjustment. Refer to AV-613, "PREDICTED COURSE LINE
CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Requirement".
CAUTION:

FRONT CAMERA
FRONT CAMERA
A
D
JSNIA1469ZZ
E
1. Front camera
2. Rivet
3. Front camera finisher F
Refer to GI-3, "Contents" for symbols in the figure.

G
REMOVAL
1. Remove front camera finisher. H
2. Remove front camera mounting rivet.
3. Remove front camera.
INSTALLATION I

2. Perform camera image calibration. Refer to AV-614, "CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW J
CAUTION:
ing and replacing each camera, removing the camera mounting parts (front grille, door mirror, etc.) K
AV

REAR CAMERA
REAR CAMERA
JSNIA1470ZZ
1. Rear camera
REMOVAL
3. Remove rear camera mounting screws and rear camera harness connector.
4. Remove rear camera.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

SIDE CAMERA LH
SIDE CAMERA LH
A
D
JPNIA0900ZZ
E
1. Side camera (LH)
2. Side camera finisher assembly
F
REMOVAL
G
1. Remove glass mirror (driver side). Refer to MIR-91, "DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Exploded View".
2. Remove screws (A), and actuator connector, and then actuator
(1). H
JSNIA1471ZZ
K
4. Remove screws (A) and connector (1), and then remove side
camera finisher assembly (LH). L
AV
JSNIA1472ZZ
O
5. Remove side camera (LH) mounting screws
6. Remove side camera (LH).
INSTALLATION P
CAUTION:

SIDE CAMERA RH
SIDE CAMERA RH
JPNIA0902ZZ
Side camera finisher assembly

1.
[infrared LED (auxiliary lighting)]
2. Side camera (RH)
REMOVAL
1. Remove glass mirror (passenger side). Refer to MIR-91, "DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Exploded View".
2. Remove screws (A) and actuator connector, and then actuator
(1).
JSNIA1473ZZ
4. Remove screws (A) and connector (1), and then remove Side
camera finisher assembly (RH).
JSNIA1474ZZ
5. Remove side camera (RH) screws.

6. Remove side camera (RH).
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

SIDE CAMERA RH
ing and replacing each camera, removing the camera mounting parts (front grille, door mirror, etc.) A
AV

JSNIA1475ZZ
1. Sonar control unit
REMOVAL
1. Remove AV control unit. Refer to AV-1045, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove screws and connector, and then sonar control unit.
INSTALLATION

SONAR SENSOR
SONAR SENSOR
A
FRONT
FRONT : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003926520
B
JSNIA1476ZZ
E
1. Sonar sensor (front)

F
FRONT : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003926521
REMOVAL G
1. Remove fender protector. Keep a service area. Refer to EXT-25, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Exploded
View".
2. Remove sonar sensor connector. H
I
K
JSNIA1477ZZ
INSTALLATION
L
CAUTION:
tion when assembling the bumper. M
a : 10° AV
JSNIA0325ZZ
P
REAR

SONAR SENSOR
REAR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003926522
JSNIA1478ZZ
1. Sonar sensor (rear)
REAR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003926523
REMOVAL
JSNIA1477ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
a : 10°
JSNIA0325ZZ

BUZZER
BUZZER
A
D
JSNIA1479ZZ
E
1. Buzzer

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage side lower finisher (RH). Refer to INT-28, "Exploded View". G
2. Remove buzzer mounting bolt.
3. Disconnect connector and remove buzzer.
INSTALLATION H
AV

REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA1480ZZ
1. Spiral cable
REMOVAL
3. Remove steering angle sensor.
INSTALLATION

ANTENNA FEEDER
ANTENNA FEEDER
A
AV
P
JSNIA1468GB

Audio, Visual & Navigation System: Section

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Audio, Visual & Navigation System: Section

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Audio, Visual & Navigation System: Section

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA

AUDIO, VISUAL & NAVIGATION SYSTEM

MULTI AV SYSTEM ...........................................17 U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT .............................. 50 P

Revision: 2009 March AV-1 2009 FX35/FX50

Revision: 2009 March AV-2 2009 FX35/FX50

SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ............................ 201 WOOFER ......................................................... 258

MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS .................... 241 ANTENNA BASE ............................................ 261 P

Revision: 2009 March AV-3 2009 FX35/FX50

Revision: 2009 March AV-4 2009 FX35/FX50

U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 341 U1205 GPS ...................................................... 356 D

Revision: 2009 March AV-5 2009 FX35/FX50

IPOD ADAPTER .......................................................374 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL CIR-

Revision: 2009 March AV-6 2009 FX35/FX50

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 413 AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 579

FRONT DISPLAY UNIT .................................... 443 Exploded View ....................................................... 581

Revision: 2009 March AV-7 2009 FX35/FX50

BOSE AMP. ..................................................... 587 SONAR SENSOR ............................................. 604

MICROPHONE ................................................. 594 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .................. 613

REAR CAMERA .............................................. 599 PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION

Revision: 2009 March AV-8 2009 FX35/FX50

AUDIO SYSTEM ............................................... 627 U1201 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 684 C

Revision: 2009 March AV-9 2009 FX35/FX50

Revision: 2009 March AV-10 2009 FX35/FX50

FRONT CAMERA COMMUNICATION SIG- O

Revision: 2009 March AV-11 2009 FX35/FX50

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR ..................................... 858 FRONT DISPLAY UNIT ..................................1046

Revision: 2009 March AV-12 2009 FX35/FX50

Revision: 2009 March AV-13 2009 FX35/FX50

• Reference 1··· Refer to AV-43, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".

Revision: 2009 March AV-15 2009 FX35/FX50

1.CORRECTION OF CENTER POSITION OF PREDICTED COURSE LINE

1.CORRECTION OF CENTER POSITION OF PREDICTED COURSE LINE

Revision: 2009 March AV-16 2009 FX35/FX50

System Description INFOID:0000000003838534

System name System explanation M

Revision: 2009 March AV-17 2009 FX35/FX50

Revision: 2009 March AV-18 2009 FX35/FX50

1. Front squawker RH 2. Center speaker 3. Front squawker LH

Revision: 2009 March AV-19 2009 FX35/FX50

Part name Description

Revision: 2009 March AV-20 2009 FX35/FX50

Revision: 2009 March AV-21 2009 FX35/FX50

System Description INFOID:0000000003838538

Revision: 2009 March AV-22 2009 FX35/FX50

Revision: 2009 March AV-23 2009 FX35/FX50

1. Front squawker RH 2. Center speaker 3. Front squawker LH

Revision: 2009 March AV-24 2009 FX35/FX50

Part name Description

Revision: 2009 March AV-25 2009 FX35/FX50

System Description INFOID:0000000003838542

• TEL adapter unit is controlled with AV communication from AV control unit.

Revision: 2009 March AV-26 2009 FX35/FX50

1. Front squawker RH 2. Center speaker 3. Front squawker LH

Revision: 2009 March AV-27 2009 FX35/FX50

Part name Description

Revision: 2009 March AV-28 2009 FX35/FX50

CAMERA IMAGE OPERATION PRINCIPLE H

Revision: 2009 March AV-29 2009 FX35/FX50

Revision: 2009 March AV-30 2009 FX35/FX50